FANUC PICTURE Specification: HMI Software for Industrial Automation

7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== FANUC PICTURE Specification Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name (Edition 8.0 or later) 1/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW ··········································································· 10 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 INSTALLER CHANGE ····················································································· 10 FP CONTROL ································································································ 10 RUBY SCRIPT ································································································ 11 LIBRARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED FROM RUBY SCRIPT ································ 12 ASYNCHRONOUS EXECUTION OF RUBY SCRIPT ············································· 12 IMPROVE OF SCREEN CALL FUNCTION ·························································· 13 COMBINED APPLICATION IN STANDARD DISPLAY UNIT ···································· 13 Expansion of the maximum number of simultaneous executions of the FANUC PICTURE for iHMI ············································································································· 13 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 Floating Display Function ··············································································· 13 Script Displaying Button ················································································ 14 Expansion of FP controls supporting to the Multi-language Character Type functions14 IMAGE FILE EDITOR improvements ································································· 14 Offsetting Function of CNC memory area of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI ················· 14 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 1.24 Improvements of the operability when adding FP screens ·································· 14 FANUC Series 30i-B CPU-G ············································································ 15 Improvements of selection status retention of Control ······································· 15 Use memory card of display unit with PC function ············································· 16 Project variable management function of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI ················· 16 FP Screen Transferring Function for CNC GUIDE ··············································· 16 Collective screen bitmap output function ························································· 17 About image files ·························································································· 17 Image quality setting of display image with Automatic screen enlarged function ··· 17 Improvements of font change in character type ················································· 17 REMARKS ···································································································· 18 1.24.1 1.24.2 1.24.3 1.24.4 1.24.5 1.24.6 1.24.7 2 INSTALLER ··········································································· 22 2.1 3 About compatibility with FANUC PICTURE earlier than 8.0 ··················································· 18 About check of version ································································································ 19 About memory consumption ·························································································· 19 About compatibility of Edition 8.0 or later. ········································································· 19 Compatibility with Multi-language Character Type function enabled project created by edition 9.4 or earlier. ····························································································································· 20 Setting of CNC system ································································································· 21 Cautions when using compatible display setting ··································································· 21 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ·········································································· 22 FP CONTROL ········································································ 23 3.1 ADDITION OF FP CONTROL············································································ 23 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 3.1.1 Check Box Control ····································································································· 27 3.1.1.1 Function ············································································································ 27 3.1.1.2 Diagram ············································································································ 28 3.1.1.3 Icon design········································································································· 28 2/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 3.1.1.4 Operation ·········································································································· 28 3.1.1.5 Properties ·········································································································· 28 3.1.1.6 List display ········································································································ 38 3.1.1.7 Batch editing ······································································································ 43 3.1.1.8 Message ············································································································ 44 3.1.2 Radio Button Control··································································································· 45 3.1.2.1 Function ············································································································ 45 3.1.2.2 Diagram ············································································································ 45 3.1.2.3 Icon design········································································································· 45 3.1.2.4 Operation ·········································································································· 45 3.1.2.5 Properties ·········································································································· 47 3.1.2.6 List display ········································································································ 57 3.1.2.7 Batch editing ······································································································ 61 3.1.2.8 Message ············································································································ 62 3.1.3 List Box Control ········································································································ 63 3.1.3.1 Function ············································································································ 63 3.1.3.2 Diagram ············································································································ 63 3.1.3.3 Icon design········································································································· 63 3.1.3.4 Operation ·········································································································· 63 3.1.3.5 Properties ·········································································································· 72 3.1.3.6 List display ········································································································ 81 3.1.3.7 Batch editing ······································································································ 85 3.1.3.8 Message ············································································································ 85 3.1.4 Message Box ············································································································ 85 3.1.4.1 Function ············································································································ 85 3.1.4.2 Image ··············································································································· 85 3.1.4.3 Operation ·········································································································· 86 3.1.4.4 Configuration specifications ···················································································· 88 3.1.4.5 Properties ·········································································································· 90 3.1.4.6 Function ············································································································ 96 3.1.4.7 Drawing specifications ··························································································· 97 3.1.4.8 Messages ··········································································································· 98 3.1.5 Combo Box Control ···································································································· 98 3.1.5.1 Function ············································································································ 98 3.1.5.2 Diagram ············································································································ 98 3.1.5.3 Icon design········································································································100 3.1.5.4 Operation ·········································································································101 3.1.5.5 Properties ·········································································································105 3.1.5.6 List display ······································································································· 114 3.1.5.7 Batch editing ····································································································· 118 3.1.5.8 Message ··········································································································· 118 3.1.6 Pie Graph Control······································································································ 118 3.1.6.1 Function ··········································································································· 118 3.1.6.2 Diagram ··········································································································· 118 3.1.6.3 Icon design········································································································ 119 3.1.6.4 Operation ········································································································· 119 3.1.6.5 Properties ·········································································································120 3.1.6.6 List display ·······································································································125 3.1.6.7 Batch editing ·····································································································130 3.1.6.8 List of messages ·································································································130 3.1.7 Extended bar graph control ···························································································130 3.1.7.1 Function ···········································································································130 3.1.7.2 Diagram ···········································································································130 3.1.7.3 Icon design········································································································131 3.1.7.4 Operation ·········································································································131 3.1.7.5 Properties ·········································································································132 3.1.7.6 List display ·······································································································138 3/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.7.7 3.1.7.8 3.2 Batch editing ·····································································································143 List of messages ·································································································143 DESIGN CUSTOMIZATION ············································································· 144 3.2.1 [Image File List] Screen ······························································································144 3.2.1.1 Listing image files ·······························································································145 3.2.1.2 Creating a shape ·································································································145 3.2.1.3 Adding a shape ···································································································146 3.2.1.4 Deleting a shape ·································································································147 3.2.1.5 Editing a shape ···································································································148 3.2.1.6 Copying a shape ·································································································149 3.2.1.7 Menu bar and toolbar····························································································150 3.2.1.8 Creating a file ····································································································151 3.2.1.9 Adding a file ······································································································152 3.2.1.10 Deleting a file ····································································································153 3.2.1.11 Copying a file ····································································································154 3.2.2 Image File Edit Screen ································································································155 3.2.2.1 Startup of the image file edit screen ···········································································156 3.2.2.2 Menu bar and toolbar····························································································157 3.2.2.3 Control bar ········································································································159 3.2.2.4 Configuration tree ·······························································································161 3.2.2.5 Drawing area ·····································································································163 3.2.2.6 Property list ·······································································································164 3.3 IMPROVEMENT OF PROPERTY SETTING OF FP CONTROL ······························· 170 3.3.1 Display of Setting Value Names ·····················································································170 3.3.1.1 Function ···········································································································170 3.3.1.2 Relevant items····································································································170 3.3.1.3 Diagram ···········································································································170 3.3.1.4 Operation ·········································································································171 3.3.2 Changing FP Control Property from a Ruby Script ·······························································171 3.3.2.1 Function ···········································································································171 3.3.2.2 Operation ·········································································································172 3.3.2.3 Function ···········································································································172 4 RUBY SCRIPT ······································································181 4.1 CREATION OF RUBY SCRIPT ········································································· 181 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 4.1.1 Script List ···············································································································181 4.1.1.1 Display script list ································································································182 4.1.1.2 New ················································································································182 4.1.1.3 Entry ···············································································································184 4.1.1.4 Remove ···········································································································186 4.1.1.5 Edit ················································································································187 4.1.1.6 Check syntax ·····································································································187 4.1.1.7 Startup register/restore ··························································································187 4.1.1.8 Timer script register/restore ····················································································188 4.1.2 Enhancement of Script Editor Functions ···········································································189 4.1.2.1 Addition of the Menu Bar ······················································································190 4.1.2.2 Expansion of the UNDO Function and REDO Function ···················································193 4.1.2.3 Change in the Way Script Number/Name is Changed ······················································193 4.1.2.4 Restricting the Number of Script Description Lines ························································195 4.1.2.5 Adding Search/Replace Functions ············································································196 4.1.2.6 Adding the Symbol Setting Menu ·············································································201 4.1.2.7 Adding the FP Function Input Assistance Function ·························································201 4.1.2.8 Adding the Multi-language Text Setting Function ··························································202 4.1.3 Conversion Function ··································································································208 4.1.3.1 Conversion of a Project ························································································· 211 4.1.3.2 Conversion of Scripts ···························································································216 4/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.1.4 Syntax Check ···········································································································225 4.1.4.1 Syntax Check from the Script Editor··········································································225 4.1.4.2 Content of the Syntax Check ···················································································226 4.1.5 Checking for Characters Unavailable for Script Symbol ·························································226 4.1.6 MEM File Creation ····································································································227 4.1.7 Debug Function ········································································································230 4.1.7.1 Setting the Break Types ·························································································230 4.1.7.2 [Debug settings] Dialog Box ···················································································230 4.1.7.3 [Break detail settings] Dialog Box ············································································234 4.1.7.4 Debug Window and Log Output ···············································································235 4.1.7.5 Extension of the Debug Signal ·················································································240 4.1.8 Changes Due to Edition 8.0 ··························································································241 4.1.9 Other Functions ········································································································242 4.1.10 Remarks ·················································································································245 4.2 Functional Difference with FP Script ······························································· 247 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 mruby LICENSE DISPLAY ·············································································· 253 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 LIBRARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED FROM RUBY SCRIPT ·······257 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 LISTS OF FUNCTIONS ·················································································· 257 RETURN VALUES OF FUNCTIONS ·································································· 272 FUNCTION REFERENCE ··············································································· 274 TIMER-ACTIVATED OPERATOR FUNCTION ERROR VARIABLE ·························· 613 RESTRICTIONS ···························································································· 618 ASYNCHRONOUS EXECUTION OF RUBY SCRIPT ····················619 6.1 FUNCTIONS USED FOR ASYNCHRONOUS EXECUTION ···································· 619 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.2 ERROR DURING ASYNCHRONOUS EXECUTION ·············································· 622 IMPROVE OF SCREEN CALL FUNCTION ·································623 7.1 SETTING METHOD ······················································································· 625 7.1.1 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.3 Memory of screen number ····························································································629 Specification of screen number ······················································································630 NOTES ········································································································ 631 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 8 Group number of screen number memory ··········································································628 HOW TO USE ······························································································· 629 Displaying popup screen ······························································································632 Sub-screen and focus state ····························································································633 Memory period of screen number ···················································································633 COMBINED APPLICATION IN STANDARD DISPLAY UNIT ···········636 8.1 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created CONSTRUCTION METHOD OF THE DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT ·················· 636 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 7 Ruby Script Asynchronous Execution Function (scriptasync) ···················································619 Ruby Script Asynchronous Execution Handler Registration Function (set_handlerasync) ··················620 Task Stop Function (sleep) ···························································································621 Name 6 Overview ················································································································253 Diagram ·················································································································254 Operation················································································································255 Properties ···············································································································255 Drawing number 5 List of FP functions that can be used in Ruby scripts ·····························································247 Using User Functions in Ruby Script ···············································································253 Specifying Path to FP Function Argument in Ruby Script ·······················································253 5/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 8.1.1 The corresponding C executor library ··············································································636 8.1.2 Diab compiler version ·································································································636 8.1.3 Merge of FANUC PICTURE providing file ·······································································637 8.1.3.1 When creating a new environment ············································································637 8.1.3.2 When updating from an environment created in earlier than 8.0 ··········································638 9 Expansion of the maximum number of simultaneous executions of the FANUC PICTURE for iHMI ················································641 9.1 9.2 9.3 Flow of making screen ·················································································· 642 Specification change ···················································································· 643 Project Setting ····························································································· 645 9.3.1 About operating method of “Project Setting” ······································································645 9.3.1.1 Error Message ····································································································646 9.4 Create MEM File ··························································································· 647 9.4.1 About operating method of “Create Memory File” ·······························································647 9.4.1.1 Error Message ····································································································648 9.5 Output to card······························································································ 649 9.5.1 About operating method of “Output to card” ······································································649 9.5.1.1 Error Message ····································································································650 9.5.2 About Compatibility ···································································································651 9.6 Load ··········································································································· 652 9.6.1 About operating method of Loader ··················································································652 9.6.1.1 Error Message ····································································································656 9.7 FANUC PICTURE start setting ········································································ 659 9.7.1 9.7.2 9.7.3 9.8 Execute FANUC PICTURE ·············································································· 663 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.9 9.10 About the termination of FANUC PICTURE ······································································664 About the Warning notification of the memory usage ····························································664 CNC GUIDE ································································································· 665 9.10.1 9.11 About the method of starting the application by CNC GUIDE ··················································665 Message list ································································································ 669 Floating Display Function ······················································670 10.1 Procedure For Creating Floating Display Screen ·············································· 671 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 Creation of the custom screen ························································································671 Setting file ··············································································································671 Installation procedure ·································································································672 Moves The Custom Screen ············································································ 674 About The Setting File “screen_setting.xml” ···················································· 675 iHMI Apps Setting For Floating Display ··························································· 677 Notes ·········································································································· 678 Script Displaying Button ·······················································679 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 The Detail of Script Displaying Button ····························································· 680 Name 11.1 Drawing number 11 About FANUC PICTURE execution environment ································································663 About automatic update of screen data ·············································································663 Termination of FANUC PICTURE ····································································· 664 9.9.1 9.9.2 10 About the configuration of the load destination ···································································659 About iHMI home screen settings ···················································································661 About using with the fixed name application ······································································662 6/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 12 FP controls supporting to the Multi-language Character Type function ··············································································682 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 Numeral Indication Control with Key Input ······················································· 683 PMC Area Character String Indication Control ·················································· 684 Numeral/Character String Indication Control ···················································· 685 Key-in Buffer Control ···················································································· 686 Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad ······································· 688 Property Item Name ······················································································ 690 12.6.1 12.6.2 13 IMAGE FILE EDITOR improvement ·········································692 13.1 13.2 “Save As” Menu ··························································································· 692 “Save AS” Dialog ························································································· 692 13.2.1 13.3 13.4 14 List editor ···············································································································690 Overall editor ···········································································································691 “New” Menu ···········································································································695 [Overwrite confirmation] Dialog······································································ 696 Warning dialog ····························································································· 697 Offsetting Function of CNC memory area of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI ····················································································698 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 Overall App Development Flow ······································································ 699 Guide Line ··································································································· 700 Use Conditions ···························································································· 700 Coexistence with Applications with This Function Disabled ······························· 701 Specification Comparison when this Function is Enabled ·································· 702 Making Memory Map ····················································································· 703 14.6.1 Installing Memory Map Creation Tool ··············································································703 14.6.2 Memory Map Creation ································································································705 14.6.2.1 Edit ················································································································707 14.6.2.2 Save (Memory map configuration file) ·······································································718 14.6.2.3 Open（Memory map configuration file） ···································································718 14.6.2.4 Output Memory map ····························································································719 14.6.2.5 Input Memory map ······························································································720 14.7 Loading Memory Map ··················································································· 721 14.7.1 14.7.2 14.7.3 14.7.4 14.8 New Load ···············································································································722 Overwirte Load ········································································································723 Delete ····················································································································725 Backup ··················································································································727 Project Setting ····························································································· 728 14.8.1 14.8.2 Manual Input Memory Range ························································································729 Import Memory Range ································································································731 14.9 Screen Data Creation ···················································································· 733 14.10 Making MEM ································································································ 733 14.11 Loading Application······················································································ 735 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 14.11.1 Login ····················································································································735 14.11.2 Selecting memory used by application··············································································737 14.11.3 Changing the User Password ·························································································741 7/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 14.12 14.13 14.14 14.15 Execution ···································································································· 742 Offset of Memory in User Function ································································· 743 Execution method in CNC GUIDE ··································································· 746 Data Protection when restoring FP Project ······················································ 749 14.15.1 FP Project Protection ··································································································749 14.15.2 Restoration of Protected FP Project ·················································································749 14.16 Specifiable Area of Memory map ···································································· 751 14.17 Security function ·························································································· 752 14.17.1 Overall Structure ·······································································································752 14.18 Folder Structure ··························································································· 753 14.19 Message List ······························································································· 755 15 Improvements of the operability when adding screens ··············758 15.1 Copy and paste screen·················································································· 758 15.1.1 15.2 Screen Number Setting when adding screen ···················································· 760 15.2.1 15.2.2 15.2.3 15.2.4 15.2.5 16 Setting of CNC system ·················································································· 765 Write to Card ······························································································· 766 Combined Application Program ····································································· 767 Available CNC / display unit ··········································································· 768 Use memory card of display unit with PC function····················769 17.1 Corresponding function ················································································ 769 17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3 17.1.4 17.2 Memory card output of historical data ··············································································769 Memory card output of text message file ···········································································770 Memory card Input of text message file ············································································770 Mruby License information memory card output ·································································770 Data input / output to a display unit with a PC function ······································ 771 17.2.1 18 Property setting dialog ································································································761 List editor ···············································································································762 Overall editor ···········································································································762 Error dialog ·············································································································763 Takeing over screen number and screen number symbol ························································764 FANUC Series 30i-B CPU-G ···················································765 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 17 "Copy and Paste" menu in the project window ····································································758 Memory card status error ·····························································································771 Project variable management function of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI 772 18.1 Overall flow ································································································· 773 18.1.1 18.2 How to use project variable ··························································································773 Details ········································································································ 773 18.2.1 Definition of project variable ························································································773 18.2.1.1 What is project variable ·························································································773 18.2.2 Pocedure of Definition ································································································775 18.2.3 Project Variable List ···································································································776 18.3 How to use project variable ··········································································· 779 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 18.3.1 Use with FP control····································································································779 18.3.1.1 PMC signal setting ······························································································779 18.3.1.2 Action type and setting by input and output destination ···················································781 8/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 18.3.1.3 FP function setting ·······························································································782 18.3.2 Use in List edit and Overall edit ·····················································································785 18.3.3 Use with Ruby script ··································································································786 18.3.3.1 Changing CNC memory usage location in existing Ruby script to project variable····················788 18.3.3.2 Numerical range available in numeric variable / FP function argument /Ruby script ··················788 18.3.3.3 FP function ·······································································································789 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 19 FP Screen Transferring Function for CNC GUIDE ·····················795 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 20 About transferring of FP screen to CNC GUIDE ················································ 795 About the "Making Memory Card File" dialog box ············································· 797 NOTES ········································································································ 798 About software version ················································································· 799 About error display······················································································· 800 Collective screen bitmap output function ································801 20.1 20.2 20.3 21 About project variable memory usage ····························································· 789 About error that occurs when making MEM file ················································ 789 About Ruby script runtime error ····································································· 791 When opening an FP project with Standard Monitor mode ································· 792 Message list ································································································ 793 Setting Bitmap theme color ··········································································· 801 Outputting Property list file ··········································································· 802 Error message ····························································································· 803 About image files ·································································804 21.1 PNG file support in FANUC PICTURE for standard display ································· 804 21.1.1 21.1.2 21.2 22 About saving the FP project to a memory file ··················································· 806 Image quality setting of display image with Automatic screen enlarged function ·································································807 22.1 23 Reference of PNG format image in each image control ··························································805 Restrictions on displaying images in PNG format ································································806 Setting of image quality priority ····································································· 808 Improvements of font change in character type ························809 23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 Display font setting with character type ·························································· 809 Save character type settings ·········································································· 811 Simplified Chinese character types added ······················································· 811 Operation on adding character type ································································ 812 Function for checking character types in Overall editor ····································· 812 APPENDIX A. Operation of controls with Initial state setting ·············814 APPENDIX B. Display any position and size screen for Collective screen bitmap output function ············································815 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name REVISION RECORD ·····································································816 9/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1 OVERVIEW This section provides an overview of the functions added to FANUC PICTURE as well as functions that were improved. Refer to FANUC PICTURE MANUAL (Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0)(A-40712) in regard to specifications, bug fixes and restrictions that are common in Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0. In this manual, FANUC PICTURE may be abbreviated as “FP”. 1.1 INSTALLER CHANGE In FANUC PICTURE edition 8.0 or later, there are the following changes. ① Screnns for FS0i/0i Mate-D can not be created. ② The extension of the project file is changed. ( The project created in ealier than 8.0 edition can be used by converting. ) ③ There is no compatibility for FP Driver. ( If only FP Driver is updated to edition 8.0 or later, an error screen will be displayed. ) When you use the project created in the past as it is, please use FANUC PICTURE earlier than 8.0 edition. The latest FANUC PICTURE ealier than 8.0 edition is included in the installation disk. When installing, please choose which to use and install. For details, refer to Chapter 2, "INSTALLER ". FANUC PICTURE Installation CD FANUC PICTURE ( 8.0 or later ) FANUC PICTURE ( earlier than 8.0 ) Fig. 1.1 (a) 1.2 Installation disk image FP CONTROL Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In FANUC PICTURE, the following controls were added. ■ FP control (Refer to: "3.1 ADDITION OF FP CONTROL") Check box control Radio button control 10/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== - List box control Message box Combo box control Pie graph control Extended bar graph control Additionally, the following functions were added to support flexible screen design. ■ Design customization function (Refer to: "3.1 DESIGN CUSTOMIZATION") Function for customizing FP control image file Additionally, the following functional improvements are made and the convenience of property setting of FP control is improved. ■ Improvement of property setting of FP control. (Refer to: "3.3 IMPROVEMENT OF PROPERTY SETTING OF FP CONTROL") Display property setting values as eigenvalues Change the control property from the script 1.3 RUBY SCRIPT In addition to FP script, generic script (mruby) is now available.This allows for processes such as the following to be written in generic scripts in addition to processes that can be performed with FP scripts.In this specification, mruby script is described as Ruby script. For details, refer to Chapter 4, "RUBY SCRIPT". Table 1.3 (a) List of available functions FP script Ruby script                       -  -   15. Arithmetic operation Comparison operation Bit operation Use of FP functions Read values from control Set values in control Activate timer Repetitive processing Use of symbols Use of script variables Use of argument reference variables Use of multidimensional array variables Use of structure variables Non-volatile memory access Define/use inner functions -  16. Class definition -  17. String operations -  12. 13. 14. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Multidimensional array variables can be written in scripts. Structure variables can be written in scripts. Non-volatile memory access can be accessed from scripts. Inner functions can be created/used in scripts. Class definitions can be created/used in scripts. Script removal and conversion can be performed in scripts. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Additional explanation Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Name Function name Drawing number No. 11/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== No. Function name 18. 19. 20. 21. Hash Handling of NULL Handling of TRUE/FALSE Exception handling FP script Ruby script     - Additional explanation Hash values can be used in scripts. NULL values can be written in scripts. TRUE/FALSE can be written in scripts. Exceptions can be detected in the script. mruby version: 1. 2. 0 For basic information on mruby, refer to the following page. mruby API reference http://mruby.org/docs/api/ - Ruby 1.9.3 Library Documentation(mruby is compatible with Ruby 1.9) https://ruby-doc.org/stdlib-1.9.3/ 1.4 LIBRARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED FROM RUBY SCRIPT The following library functions can be used in Ruby script. ・CNC window library ・PMC window library ・File operation library ・Serial library ・F-ROM library ・Network library ・ANSI C standard library ・MS-C extended C standard library ・mruby extension library For details, refer to Chapter 5, "LIBRARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED FROM RUBY SCRIPT" 1.5 ASYNCHRONOUS EXECUTION OF RUBY SCRIPT Ruby scripts are normally executed during FP control processing (drawing, action, etc.), timer processing, and event processing such as screen transitions. However, ruby script processing can be executed as a separate process by using this function. This enables asynchronous execution of various control processing (drawing, action, etc.), timer processing, and event processing such as screen transitions, without having to stop the process until the Ruby script ends. The following two functions are added. A function that allows asynchronous Ruby script execution from a control action (scriptasync) A function for registering the handler, which makes the asynchronous Ruby script execution request from the timer or screen transition event (set_handlerasync) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For details, refer to Chapter 4, "ASYNCHRONOUS EXECUTION OF RUBY SCRIPT." 12/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.6 IMPROVE OF SCREEN CALL FUNCTION When displaying the FANUC PICTURE screen from the home screen, it is possible to designate and display a specific screen, but in addition to its specification, the following specifications are now possible. Displaying the custom screen of written screen number in specified PMC area Displaying the latest custom screen For details, refer to Chapter 7, "IMPROVE OF SCREEN CALL ." 1.7 COMBINED APPLICATION IN STANDARD DISPLAY UNIT There is a change in part of the development environment construction procedure concerning creation of combinated application. For details, refer to Chapter 8, "COMBINED APPLICATION IN STANDARD DISPLAY UNIT". 1.8 Expansion of the maximum number of simultaneous executions of the FANUC PICTURE for iHMI Assuming that the maximum number of simultaneous executions of FANUC PICTURE is three, the identifier ID used for registering the FANUC PICTURE screen to the iHMI home screen, and the name of the FANUC PICTURE screen and the name of the folder to be loaded are designed with fixed names. By taking the following measures in the development of this function, the upper limit as FANUC PICTURE is eliminated, and four or more screens can be registered and executed in iHMI. ① Changed to be able to set any FANUC PICTURE screen name. ② Changed so that the identifier ID of the FANUC PICTURE screen and the name of the folder to be loaded can be set arbitrarily. For details, refer to “Chapter 9 Expansion of the maximum number of simultaneous executions of the FANUC PICTURE for iHMI”. 1.9 Floating Display Function The custom screens created by FANUC PICTURE for iHMI can be displayed on the screen of any iHMI application. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For details, refer to “Chapter 10 Floating Display Function”. 13/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.10 Script Displaying Button For the items that can be specified by script in the property list, the Script Displaying Button that can directly display the script editor is displayed. For details, refer to “Chapter 11 Script Displaying Button”. 1.11 Expansion of FP controls supporting to the Multi-language Character Type functions It is possible to specify the character type (font/character size) into characters for each language displaying in the control of which has not support the Multi-language Character Type function. For details, refer to "Chapter 12 FP controls supporting to the Multi-language Character Type function". 1.12 IMAGE FILE EDITOR improvements “Save As” can be used in the ImageFileEditor. The details, refer to ”Chapter 13 IMAGE FILE EDITOR improvement”. 1.13 Offsetting Function of CNC memory area of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI PMC signals, Custom macro variables and P-CODE macro variables (hereinafter called “CNC memory”) that are used in FANUC PICTURE applications need to avoid conflicts with the CNC memory that are used by other applications or Ladder programs. With this function, CNC memory area of each application is offset at loading it to the machine. This makes it possible to execute the application without modifying it by redefining the area even in the machine in which CNC memory usage is different. Refer to “Chapter 14 Offsetting Function of CNC memory area of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI” for more details. 1.14 Improvements of the operability when adding FP screens It is possible to copy and paste FP screens on the project window of the FP editor. Also, the Screen Number and Screen Number Symbol can be set from not only the detail setting screen, but also the property setting screen, and etc. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The details, refer to “Chapter 15 Improvements of the operability when adding screens”. 14/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.15 FANUC Series 30i-B CPU-G FANUC PICTURE application and combined application for FANUC Series 30i/31i-MODEL B (CPU-G), FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B (CPU-F), FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Plus (CPU-F), and FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus STEP2 can be created. For detail, refer to “Capter 16 FANUC Series 30i-B CPU-G”. 1.16 Improvements of selection status retention of Control Option that synchronizes with the PMC signal (hereinafter called "PMC") is added to the initial state setting of Check box control, Radio button control, and Combo box control (hereinafter called “each control”). When setting “PMC”, the operation is as follows - The selection status always corresponds to the PMC signal including FANUC PICTURE start-up and after switching screens with "Free Memory" enabled. - Only when the selection status of each control is changed, the PMC signal output from each control is done. Available edition: FANUC PICTURE（A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11） 09.9 or later Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For details, refer to the following sections and Appendix A “Initial state setting operation in conjunction with PMC signals”. - Check box control : Section 3.1.1.5 "Properties" – [Action] tab Section 3.1.1.6 "List display" Section 3.1.1.7 "Batch editing" - Radio button control : Section 3.1.2.5 "Properties" – [Action] tab Section 3.1.2.6 "List display" Section 3.1.2.7 "Batch editing" - Combo box control : Section 3.1.5.5 "Properties" – [Action] tab Section 3.1.5.6 "List display" Section 3.1.5.7 "Batch editing" 15/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.17 Use memory card of display unit with PC function In FANUC PICTURE for standard display, it is possible to input/output a file to memory card of display unit with PC function with the following functions.    History data output Text message file output Text message file input License display output Available edition: FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 09.9 or later For detail, refer to Section 17 “Use memory card of display unit with PC function”. 1.18 Project variable management function of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI In FANUC PICTURE for iHMI, project variable that can be shared throughout the project is added. This makes it possible to link data among FP controls and Ruby scripts without using CNC memory. Available edition: FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 10.1 or later Available display unit: PANEL iH / PANEL iH Pro / FANUC iPC For detail, refer to “18 Project variable management function of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI”. 1.19 FP Screen Transferring Function for CNC GUIDE The contents of FANUC PICTURE screen edited by FP editor can be transferred to FANUC PICTURE app which is executing on CNC GUIDE at making memory card file. For detail, refer to Section 19 "FP Screen Transferring Function for CNC GUIDE". Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In this manual, "CNC GUIDE" refers to CNC GUIDE and CNC GUIDE2, unless listed together. 16/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.20 Collective screen bitmap output function Collective screen bitmap output function is available in FP Editor for the iHMI mode. Available edition: FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 10.3 or later For detail, refer to “Chapter 20 Collective screen bitmap output function” 1.21 About image files About image files that can be used in FANUC PICTURE, the following operations are available. In FANUC PICTURE for standard display, PNG format image file is displayed on the control that can display the image. In FANUC PICTURE for standard display, saving PNG / GIF format image files to project file in memory file. In FANUC PICTURE for iHMI, saving PNG format image files to project file in memory file. Available edition: FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 10.3 or later For details, refer to “Chapter 21 About image files”. 1.22 Image quality setting of display image with Automatic screen enlarged function When using the automatic screen enlarged function in FANUC PICTURE, setting of whether displaying images with prioritizing "display speed" (equivalent to edition 10.5 or ealier) or "image quality” is available. Available edition: FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 10.6 or later For details, refer to “Chapter 22 Image quality setting of display image with Automatic screen enlarged function”. 1.23 Improvements of font change in character type The following character type related function is improved in FP Editor for iHMI mode. This makes the operation and setting of character types easier to understand. Moreover, Simplified Chinese character are added as default character types. For details, refer to “Chapter 23 Improvements of font change in character type. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Available edition: FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 10.9 or later - 23.1 Display font setting with character type - 23.2 Save character types settings 17/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== FANUC PICTURE (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11) 11.0 or later - 23.3 Simplified Chinese character types added - 23.4 Operation on adding character type - 23.5 Function for checking character types in overall editor 1.24 REMARKS 1.24.1 About compatibility with FANUC PICTURE earlier than 8.0 In this document, they are referred to as follows for distinction. FANUC PICTURE earlier than 8.0: "Old FANUC PICTURE" FANUC PICTURE 8.0 or later: "New FANUC PICTURE" FP driver 8.0 or later FP editor earlier than 8.0 Project file (earlier than 8.0) MEM file (earlier than 8.0) FP 8.0 or later FP driver 8.0 or later Conversion processing Project file (earlier than 8.0) MEM file (8.0 or later) Fig. 1.23 (b) Restriction Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE 1. Project after conversion can not be restored. Please obtain backup in advance. 2. When converting a project of unsupported model ( FS0i/0i Mate-D etc. ), please change the setting of the project to a supported model beforehand and execute the conversion with FANUC PICTURE 8.0 or later. 18/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.24.2 About check of version There are two methods of confirming the version in the driver software of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI. - The property of driver software (FPDriverApp.exe) is displayed by using the Explorer of Windows. - The version is read by FP function GetDrvVersion. Product version 08.0 08.1 08.2 08.3 08.4 08.5 08.6 08.7 08.8 09.0 09.1 09.2 09.3 09.4 09.5 09.6 09.7 09.8 09.9 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 11.0 1.24.3 Explorer of Windows 3.0.0.0 3.1.0.0 3.2.0.0 3.3.0.0 3.4.0.0 3.5.0.0 3.6.0.0 3.7.0.0 3.8.0.0 4.0.0.0 4.1.0.0 4.2.0.0 4.3.0.0 4.4.0.0 4.5.0.0 4.6.0.0 4.7.0.0 4.8.0.0 4.9.0.0 5.0.0.0 5.1.0.0 5.2.0.0 5.3.0.0 5.4.0.0 5.5.0.0 5.6.0.0 5.7.0.0 5.8.0.0 5.9.0.0 6.0.0.0 FP function GetDrvVersion FP01-20.0 FP01-21.0 FP01-22.0 FP01-23.0 FP01-24.0 FP01-25.0 FP01-26.0 FP01-27.0 FP01-28.0 FP01-30.0 FP01-31.0 FP01-32.0 FP01-33.0 FP01-34.0 FP01-35.0 FP01-36.0 FP01-37.0 FP01-38.0 FP01-39.0 FP01-40.0 FP01-41.0 FP01-42.0 FP01-43.0 FP01-44.0 FP01-45.0 FP01-46.0 FP01-47.0 FP01-48.0 FP01-49.0 FP01-50.0 About memory consumption The memory consumption is increased at Edition 08.0 or later due to major update compared to the previous FANUC PICTURE ( ~Edition 07.x). If you don’t need any feature that is added at Edition 08.0 or later, using Edition less than 08.0 (the latest Edition of 7.x series) is recommened. Refer to FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-66284/09) A.2 “When D-RAM for FANUC PICTURE is insufficient” in regard to revising memory consumption on the standard display unit. 1.24.4 About compatibility of Edition 8.0 or later. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Use FP driver of the same edition as the one of FP editor that created a screen data. 19/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== If updating only FP Driver, in FANUC PICTURE edition 8.0 or later, an error screen is displayed with the following conbination and FANUC PICTURE does not work. iHMI／Standard display ・Screen data of edition 9.4 or earlier ⇔ FP driver of edition 9.5 or later The screen data created with a previous edition can be updated by opening it with FP Editor of a newer edition. In addition, if updating only the FP driver to version 9.7 or later with screen data that using the FpSetProperty function with the FP editor edition 9.6 or earlier, the FpSetProperty function may return an error (Invalid object ID). 1.24.5 Compatibility with Multi-language Character Type function enabled project created by edition 9.4 or earlier. When opening a Multi-language Character Type function enabled project that was created by edition 9.4 or earlier with edition 9.5 to 9.6, in the following controls, its property setting "Character type" is set as “ANK” for all Multi-language keys r egardless of the original setting. When opening a Multi-language Character Type function enabled project that was created by edition 9.4 or earlier with edition 9.7 or later, in the following controls, the set character types are taken over.. - Numeral/Character String Indication Control - Numeral Indication Control with Key Input - PMC Area Character String Indication Control See “Chapter 12 FP controls supporting to the Multi-language Character Type function" for more details about Multi-language Character Type function. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name * It is recommended to backup the applicable project before opening it by edition 9.5 or later. 20/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.24.6 Setting of CNC system In [Setting of CNC system] tab of [Setting of Project] dialog, select [CNC system] according to the CNC model to which the custom screen is applied. iHMI mode CNC system 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 35i-B, 0i-F, 30i/31i/32i-B Plus, 0i-F Plus, Power Motion i-A Plus Power Motion i-A CNC model Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B Series 30i/31i/32-iB Plus Series 0i-F Plus Power Motion i-A Plus Power Motion i-A Standard display mode CNC system 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 35i-B, 0i-F, 30i/31i/32i-B Plus, 0i-F Plus, Power Motion i-A Plus Power Motion i-A 30i/31i-B Plus(CPU-G), 30i/31i/32i-B(CPU-F), 30i/31i/32i-B Plus(CPU-F), 0i-F Plus STEP2 1.24.7 CNC model Series 30i/31i/32i-A Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B Series 0i-F Series 30i/31i/32i-A Plus Series 0i-F Plus Power Motion i-A Plus Power Motion i-A Series 30i/31i-B Plus CPU-G Series 30i/31i/32i-B CPU-F Series 30i/31i/32i-B Plus CPU-F Series 0i-F Plus STEP2 Cautions when using compatible display setting If a FANUC PICTURE project was converted from edition 07.33 or earlier, or a new FANUC PICTURE project was created with edition 08.0 to less than 10.8, and has never been applied the following workaround, switching to iHMI screen according to the compatible screen settings does not work. Workaround This behavior can be avoided by opening "Detail Setting" dialog of "Making Memory Card File" dialog, displaying "Compatible display setting" tab, and clicking <OK> button. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE Refer to FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0) Section 3.4 “Switch of CNC operation screen and custom screen" about "Compatible display setting". 21/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2 INSTALLER 2.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE The procedure for inserting the installation CD is as follows. 1. When inserting the installation CD, the following dialog box will be displayed automatically. NOTE If it is not displayed automatically, open the Explorer window, select the DVD drive, and run AutoRun.exe in the top folder. (The Administrator authority is necessary.) Select the edition you want to install and press the <OK> button. Fig.2.1 (a) The installation wizard is displayed. Follow the message and proceed with installation. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 3. Edition selection Dialog. Drawing number 2. 22/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3 FP CONTROL 3.1 ADDITION OF FP CONTROL Icons FP control icons displayed on the toolbar are displayed in the following order. For details about FP control, refer to the description of each control. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 New FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge New New New New New New Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Control name Screen configuration Screen switch Button Framed button Lamp Label Number/string display PMC string Number entry display Key in Numeric keypad entry MDI key Keyboard Message Text Combined message History message Clock Meter Graph Line graph Image Screen switch with image Button with image Lamp with image Radio button Check box List box Combo box Extended bar graph Pie graph Drawing number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. Display of Toolbar about FP Control Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Table 3.1 (a) No. 23/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Common setting items The setting items that apply to all properties have the following options. Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items Option 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 255 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 254 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 169 170 171 143 142 154 136 137 138 139 8 13 148 149 150 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Note Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page FL/F1A F1/F2B F2/F3C F3/F4D F4/F5E F5/F6F F6/F7G F7/F8H F8/F9I F9/F10J F10/F11K FR/F12L VF1/VFR1 VF2/VFR2 VF3/VFR3 VF4/VFR4 VF5/VFR5 VF6/VFR6 VF7/VFR7 VF8/VFR8 VF9 VF10 VF11 VF12 Page-Up Page-Down HELP Right-Arrow Left-Arrow Down-Arrow Up-Arrow CAN INPUT INSERT DELETE ALTER F14M F15O F16P F17Q F18R F19S F20T F21U F22V F23W F24X Name Shortcut key Value Drawing number Setting item 24/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Option 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge iHMI only Drawing number PMC area Note 219 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 176 177 232 233 234 236 237 238 235 N/A 2 3 4 5 9 $ R D C T K X Y G F A M N E Z Name F25Y VFL1 VFL2 VFL3 VFL4 VFL5 VFL6 VFL7 VFL8 VL1 VL2 VL3 VL4 VL5 VL6 VL7 VL8 VL9 VL10 VL11 VL12 TAB ESC POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET MESSAGE GRAPHIC CUSTOM/CUSTOM SYSTEM 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC 4th PMC 5th PMC DCS PMC project variable 0:R 1:D 2:C 3:T 4:K 5:X 6:Y 7:G 8:F 9:A 10 : M 11 : N 12 : E 13 : Z PMC path 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Value Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item 25/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Option PMC bit Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ANK (IPAGothic, 12pt, Regular) *2 (IPAGothic, 14pt, Regular) *4 (IPAGothic, 20pt, Bold) *6 (IPAGothic, 28pt, Bold) SMALL (IPAGothic, 9pt, Regular) UserFont1 (IPAexGothic, 12pt, Regular) UserFont2 (Times New Roman, 24pt, Bold Italic) UserFont3 (Arial, 22pt, Regular) Character type (*) Note 简体字 (Microsoft YaHei, 12pt, Regular) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 iHMI mode only iHMI mode only iHMI mode only iHMI mode only 简体字*2 (Microsoft YaHei, 14pt, Regular) 101 iHMI mode only 简体字*4 (Microsoft YaHei, 20pt, Bold) 102 iHMI mode only 简体字*6 (Microsoft YaHei, 28pt, Bold) 103 iHMI mode only 简体字 SMALL (Microsoft YaHei, 9pt, Regular) 104 iHMI mode only Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name * The font type / size / style are displayed only with iHMI mode. 26/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Changes to the project settings screen The [Operation Mode Switch Key] setting has been added in line with the addition of the list box and combo box controls. For details about the [Operation Mode Switch Key] setting, refer to "3.1.3.4 Operation." Fig. 3.1 (b) Project Settings Screen NOTE Because the key set to [Operation Mode Switching Key] takes precedence over the [Shortcut Key] of each control, do not set the same key. When the same key is set, the [Shortcut Key] of each control doesn't operate. 3.1.1 Check Box Control 3.1.1.1 Function Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The check box is a control for selecting an item by putting a check mark in the box. A caption is displayed next to the check box. To change the state of the check box (select or clear the check box), touch the check box control or enter the corresponding key. 27/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.1.2 Diagram You can select a large, medium or small check box. You can select left aligned or right aligned as the display position. The height of the control is automatically centered. The default size is "small." If the created control is smaller than the small size, the size is automatically set to small. Fig. 3.1.1.2 (a) Image of Check Box Specify centered, left aligned, or right aligned in the text area as the caption layout. Unless the caption is centered, you can specify X- and Y-coordinates. Text area Check mark area (caption area) Fig. 3.1.1.2 (b) Image of Check Box Area 3.1.1.3 Icon design The following icon is displayed on the toolbar. Fig. 3.1.1.3 (a) Icon Design 3.1.1.4 Operation To change the state of the check box, perform one of the following operations: Touch the check box control. Press the shortcut key allocated to the check box. Press the <INPUT> key with the focus on the check box. The PMC area (1 bit) can be allocated to the check box. If the PMC area is allocated, data is written into the PMC area allocated to the check box when the user changes the state of the check box. The state of the check box cannot be changed and the check is displayed as unchecked when the control is disabled, the disable signal is ON, or the interlock is engaged. 3.1.1.5 Properties This section describes the properties of check box control. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Tab configuration 28/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.1.5 (a) List of Tabs Description Item General Character Action Focus Image NoAction Image Interlock Image Used to specify the position and size of the check box. Used to specify the position, color, and text of the caption in the text area. Used to specify the initial status, allocation to the PMC area, interlock, and shortcut key. Used to specify the focus number and how to move the focus. Used to specify the image when the control is disabled and the image at usual times. Used to specify the allocation to the PMC area for the disable signal, and the image when the disable signal is ON. Used to specify the image for when the interlock is engaged. [General] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (a) Properties Page - [General] Tab Table 3.1.1.5 (b) List of Properties on the [General] Tab X User entry Numerical value Initial value - Y User entry Numerical value - Width Height 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created User entry User entry Numerical value Numerical value - Note XX is automatically entered. (User entry is not allowed.) Specify the X-coordinate with reference to the left top of the check box. (Display starting position) Specify the Y-coordinate with reference to the left top of the check box. (Display starting position) Width of the check box. Height of the check box. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Specification FPCheckBoxXX Name Entry type Fixed value Drawing number Setting item Object ID 29/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Character] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (b) Properties Page - [Character] Tab Table 3.1.1.5 (c) List of Properties on the [Character] Tab Initial value OFF Multi-language key Alignment Selection Arbitrary Selection Caption User entry Center Left Aligned Right Aligned Arbitrary First candidate Left Aligned X User entry Numerical value 0 Y User entry Numerical value 0 Character Type Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." ANK Character Color Disable Color Interlock Color Focus Color Palette Palette Palette Palette Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Black Black Black Black 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Blank Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Enter the text to be displayed in the text area. When using the multi-language key, specify a caption for each key that can be specified with [Multi-language key]. Enter a value less than or equal to the height of the caption area. This item is disabled when Center is selected. Enter a value less than or equal to the width of the caption area. This item is disabled when Center is selected. Select the character type. When using the multi-language key in the iHMI mode, specify the character type for each key that can be specified with [Multi-language key]. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Note This item is enabled when you select the [Use the multi-language display function] check box on the [Multi-Language Settings] tab for project settings. When you select this check box, [Multi-language key] is enabled. Select a language key from those registered under project settings. Select the caption layout. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Specification ON/OFF Name Entry type Check box Drawing number Setting item No use multi-language 30/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Action] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (c) Properties Page - [Action] Tab Table 3.1.1.5 (d) List of Properties on the [Action] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value NoAction Check box ON/OFF OFF Init state Selection ON/OFF/PMC(*) OFF * "PMC" is valid at Edition 9.9 or later Shortcut Key Shortcut key selection Check box Selection ON/OFF Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." OFF First candidate Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value External output Check box ON/OFF OFF Note When you select this check box, [NoAction Image] is enabled. Select the state of the check box when the screen opens. When you switch the screen with the memory for the screen configuration set to clear, the last display state is discarded and the screen appears according to this setting. <Edition 9.9 or later> When setting "PMC", the PMC signal status is allways the ON/OFF status of the control. Select this check box to use shortcut keys. This setting item is enabled when you select the [Shortcut Key] check box. Table 3.1.1.5 (e) List of I/O Properties Edition Date Created 1:ON 0:OFF Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 1:ON 0:OFF 0:ON 1:OFF Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Selection <Edition 9.9 or later> When setting "PMC" in "Init state", PMC signal setting is also required at the same time, so "External output" is grayed out in the ON state and the setting cannot be changed. Allocates the state of the bit allocated to the PMC area to the selected or cleared status of the check box. Drawing number I/O setting Note Select this check box to allocate the PMC area to the state of the check box. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. 31/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note PMC Path Selection First candidate PMC Area Selection Address User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value Bit Selection 0~7 0 Symbol Symbol selection Check box Entry or selection ON/OFF Arbitrary OFF Blank This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Use PMC]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Use PMC]: ON [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Use PMC]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Use PMC]: ON [Symbol]: OFF Select this check box to use symbols. Select a symbol from those registered in the PMC symbol list. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Use PMC]: ON [Symbol]: ON First candidate 0 Table 3.1.1.5 (f) List of Interlock Properties Entry type Specification Initial value Interlock Check box ON/OFF OFF PMC Path Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate InterlockPMCArea Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate InterlockPMCAddress User entry Numerical value 0 InterlockPMCBit Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate Symbol Symbol selection Check box Entry or selection ON/OFF Arbitrary OFF Blank Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Note Select this check box to use the interlock. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF Select this check box to use symbols. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: ON Drawing number Setting item 32/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== NOTE The PMC signal allocated in [External output] retains the status before the interlock. Therefore, the status before the interlock is displayed at recovery from the interlock. [Focus] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (d) Properties Page - [Focus] Tab List of Properties on the [Focus] Tab Initial value Focus is available Check box ON/OFF OFF Focus Index Don't move the focus to the next control after inputting data. Appoint movement index User entry Numerical value 1 Check box ON/OFF OFF Check box ON/OFF OFF User entry User entry User entry User entry Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value 0 0 0 0 UP Key LEFT Key RIGHT Key DOWN Key 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Select this check box to directly specify the index that you want to move the focus to. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Note Select this check box to use the focus. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify a number that is not already used on the screen (form). Select this check box to avoid consecutive entry. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Specification Name Entry type Drawing number Table 3.1.1.5 (g) Setting item 33/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Image] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (e) Properties Page - [Image] Tab Setting item Entry type Table 3.1.1.5 (h) List of Properties on the [Image] Tab Specification Initial value Note Button Size Selection Small Medium Large Small Button Position Selection Left Aligned Mask Image File Selection Left Aligned Right Aligned Arbitrary Style Selection Arbitrary Fig file name for the check box when disabled First style in the Fig file The display size on the standard monitor is as follows. Small: 25 pixels by 25 pixels (9") 16 pixels by 16 pixels (14") Medium: 32 pixels by 32 pixels (9") 24 pixels by 24 pixels (14") Large: 39 pixels by 39 pixels (9") 32 pixels by 32 pixels (14") The display size on the iHMI mode is as follows. Small: Equivalent to Same. Medium: Equivalent to Double. Large: Equivalent to Quad. Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the check box when disabled. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF 34/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note Image File Name Selection Arbitrary Fig file name for the check box Style Selection Arbitrary First style in the Fig file Check Color Palette Color selection Green (0.128.0) Check Back Color Border Color1 Palette Color selection Palette Color selection Gray (192.192.192) Black Border Color2 Palette Color selection White Back Color Palette Color selection Focus Color Palette Color selection Check ON Preview Check box ON/OFF Gray (192.192.192) Yellow (128.128.0) ON Focus Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the check box. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Specify the color of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. If this setting is omitted, the background color of the check mark is used. Specify the background color of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the (upper) border of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the (lower) border of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the caption area. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the status color for when the focus is selected. Select a color from the color selection dialog. You cannot select this check box in the following cases: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Pattern 3 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON You cannot select this check box in the following cases: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Pattern 3 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name *There is a preview button on the iHMI mode. 35/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [NoAction Image] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (f) Properties Page - [NoAction Image] Tab Table 3.1.1.5 (i) List of Properties on the [NoAction Image] Tab Entry type NoAction Signal Check box Specification ON/OFF Initial value OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON Image File Name Selection Arbitrary Style Selection Arbitrary Check Color Palette Color selection Check Back Color Palette Color selection Border Color1 Palette Color selection Gray (192.192.192) Black Border Color2 Palette Color selection White Back Color Palette Color selection PMC Path Selection PMC Area Selection Address User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value Gray (192.192.192) First candidate 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the check box. Fig file name for the check box First style in the Fig file Black Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Specify the color of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the (upper) border of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the (lower) border of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the caption area. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF First candidate FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Drawing number Name 0 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Note Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item 36/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Bit Selection First candidate Symbol Symbol selection Check box Entry or selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." ON/OFF Arbitrary Check Timing Selection 0: Power On Check ON Preview Preview Check box 0: Power On 1: Always ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF Check box Initial value Note This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF Select this check box to use symbols. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Specify when the disable signal is checked. Blank ON Select this check box to display the check mark on the preview screen. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON *There is a preview button on the iHMI mode. [Interlock Image] tab Fig. 3.1.1.5 (g) Properties Page - [Interlock Image] Tab Setting item Entry type Display Check box Table 3.1.1.5 (j) List of Properties on the [Interlock Image] Tab Specification Initial value Note ON/OFF OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: 37/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note OFF When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the check box. Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Image File Name Style Arbitrary Check Color Palette Fig file name for the check box First style in the Fig file Color specification Check Back Color Border Color1 Palette Color specification Palette Color specification Gray (192.192.192) Black Border Color2 Palette Color specification White Back Color Palette Color specification Check ON Preview Preview Check box ON/OFF Gray (192.192.192) ON Check box ON/OFF OFF Arbitrary Black Specify the color of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the (upper) border of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the (lower) border of the check mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the caption area. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select this check box to display the check mark on the preview screen. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON Pattern 2 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON *There is a preview button on the iHMI mode. 3.1.1.6 List display For details about the item display conditions, refer to "Table 3.1.1.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions." Table 3.1.1.6 (a) List of List Display Items Setting item Specification General - - Comment - - X Y Width Height General General General General 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is blank.) Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Object ID Tab index Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 38/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Setting item No use multi-language Multi-language key Arrangement Character Offset posX Character Center Left Aligned Right Aligned X Offset posY Character Y Character Type Character Character Color Disable Color Lock Color Focus caption Color Caption Character Character Character Character NoAction Init state (NOTE-2) Action Action Character Character Specification Item display conditions 0:OFF 1:ON Multi-language key No. - 1 Left Aligned No.1 Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.2 Character No.2 When the multi-language keys are used, the same number of captions as that of keys are displayed. 0:OFF 1:ON OFF ON OFF PMC(*) * "PMC" is valid at Edition 9.9 or later Shortcut Key Shortcut key selection Shortcut Key Action External output (NOTE-1) I/O setting Action External output PMC symbol flag External output PMC symbol External output Signal Action 1:ON 0:OFF 0:ON 1:OFF Symbol Action Symbol selection Action - Interlock Interlock signal symbol flag Interlock signal symbol Action Action Symbol No.6 Action Symbol selection No.7 Edition Date Created No.3 0:OFF 1:ON No.3 No.4 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 No.5 0:OFF 1:ON FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit 1:ON 0:OFF Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Action 0:OFF Other settings: Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0:OFF 1:ON Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item name 39/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item name Settings tab Setting item Action Focus is available Number of focus index Don't move focus to the next control after data input operation. Appoint movement index Focusing up Focus Focus Focus Numerical value Focusing down Focus Numerical value Focusing left Focus Numerical value Focusing right Focus Numerical value Button Size Position No action image file name No action image style Image File Name Style Check Color Check Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Background color Focus Color Check ON Preview Focus Preview Image Image Image Mask Image File Image Style Image 0:OFF 1:ON No action signal No action image file name No action signal style No action Check Color No action Check Back Color No action border color1 No action border color2 NoAction Image NoAction Image 0:OFF 1:ON Mask Image File No. 20, No. 21, No. 22 or No. 23 No. 20, No. 21, No. 22 or No. 23 No.16 No.15 NoAction Image Style No.15 NoAction Image Color of check mark when disabled Background color of check mark when disabled Border color 1 when the control is disabled Border color 2 when the control is disabled No.15 Created Focus Focus 0:OFF 1:ON No.24 Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) 0: Small 1: Medium 2: Large 0: Left 1: Right No.25 Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image NoAction Image NoAction Image 2018.11.13 No.25 No.25 No.13 Style number No. 14 or No. 15 No. 14 or No. 15 No.15 No.15 No.15 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No.25 Style number Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge No.24 No.13 0:OFF 1:ON NoAction Image No.24 Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Date No.8 0:OFF 1:ON Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) 0:OFF 1:ON Numerical value Name Edition Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Drawing number 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 PMC Path InterlockPMCArea InterlockPMCAddress InterlockPMCBit Item display conditions Interlock signal 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 - Specification 40/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item name Settings tab No action signal symbol flag No action signal symbol No action signal PMC NoAction Image Symbol NoAction Image Symbol selection NoAction Image - No action signal Check ON Preview No action signal preview Interlock image display Interlock image file name Interlock image style Interlock Check Color Interlock Check Back Color Interlock border color 1 Interlock border color 2 Interlock Back Color Interlock Check ON Preview Interlock preview NoAction Image No.17 No.15 NoAction Image 0:0FF 1:ON No.15 Interlock Image Display 0:OFF 1:ON No. 9 or No. 10 Interlock Image Image File Name Interlock Image Style Interlock Image Check Color No. 11 or No. 12 Interlock Image Check Back Color No. 11 or No. 12 Interlock Image Border Color1 No. 11 or No. 12 Interlock Image Border Color2 No. 11 or No. 12 Interlock Image Back Color No. 11 or No. 12 Interlock Image Preview of the check mark Preview Interlock Image No. 11 or No. 12 Style number 0:OFF 1:ON No. 11 or No. 12 0:OFF 1:ON No. 11 or No. 19 Drawing number A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Person in charge Name [Use the multi-language display function]: ON (project settings) [Left] or [Right] is selected. [Use PMC] on the [Action] tab: ON [Use PMC] on the [Action] tab: ON [Symbol] on the [Action] tab: ON [Use PMC] on the [Action] tab: ON [Symbol] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Symbol] on the [Action] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Symbol] on the [Action] tab: OFF Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 2018.11.13 No. 11 or No. 12 Table 3.1.1.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions Display condition 8 Created No.15 0:0FF 1:ON 6 7 Date 0:0FF 1:ON No.18 5 Edition Item display conditions Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 1 2 3 4 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Specification PMC path when the control is disabled PMC area when the control is disabled PMC address when the control is disabled PMC bit when the control is disabled Preview of the check mark Preview No. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Setting item 41/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== No. Display condition 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 10 Name [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Disable signal symbol on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Disable signal symbol on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [Interlock Image] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Focus move rules] on the [Focus] tab: ON Drawing number 9 42/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== NOTE <Edition 9.9 or later> 1. If "PMC" in [Init state] is selected, [External output] is turned on. 2. If [External output] is turned off when "PMC" is selected in [Init state], [Init state] is turned off. 3.1.1.7 Batch editing The following table shows the setting items on each tab that are the same as those in the list display. The property names other than the items shown below are the same as those in the list display. Table 3.1.1.7 (a) List of Differences for the Same Setting Items Item name (list display) Shortcut Key Property name (batch editing) Shortcut Key Shortcut key code <Edition 9.9 or later> Refer to the table below “Table 3.1.1.7(b) Setting value of [Init state] in Batch editing” for the setting value when setting “PMC” to [Init state] in Batch editing. When ”PMC” is selected as input of [Init state], an error occurs when generating a MEM file unless [External output] is ON (see Section 3.1.1.8, “Message”). Table 3.1.1.7 (b) Setting value of [Init state] in Batch editing Init state Setting value PMC 2 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE The output result of the property list output by the screen bitmap batch output function is also the same as the setting value of “Table 3.1.1.7(b) Setting value of [Init state] in Batch editing” in the above table. 43/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.1.8 Message The specific message displayed when setting this control is shown below. <Edition 9.9 or later> Table 3.1.1.8 (a) List of Messages Timing 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created If [Init state] is “PMC”, turn [External output] on. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Message Generating a MEM file Name [External output] is set to OFF when [Init state] is ”PMC”. Drawing number Cause 44/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.2 Radio Button Control 3.1.2.1 Function The radio button control is used to select only one choice from multiple options. You can group controls linked on the same screen by setting the [GroupNo] property. 3.1.2.2 Diagram You can select a large, medium or small radio button. You can select left aligned or right aligned as the display position. The height of the control is automatically centered. The default size is "small." If the created control is smaller than the small size, the size is automatically set to small. Fig. 3.1.2.2 (a) Images of Radio Buttons 3.1.2.3 Icon design The following icon is displayed on the toolbar. Fig. 3.1.2.3 (a) Icon Design 3.1.2.4 Operation Whether the radio button is selected or not is managed in the dynamic memory in the FP driver. 4 bytes are allocated from the output PMC address on the [Action] tab and the selection status of up to 32 buttons is output. 4 bytes are allocated according to the No. in the group set to the laid out radio button. If you change the PMC status from an external application or tool, the selection status changes. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name <Edition 9.9 or later> When multiple radio buttons in the same group are turned on in the PMC signal state, the value for 4 bytes from the output PMC address is cleared and all radio buttons are turned off. 45/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Output PMC address [R100] Output PMC address [R100] A A R100 0x02 is output to R100. Other buttons are deselected. 0 Select B. B B C C 1 0 B is selected. Control information Other buttons are deselected. Fig. 3.1.2.4 (a) PMC Output The property design and output destination PMC must be the same within the group. When you change control settings, the same settings are applied to other controls in the group. The properties of the control whose group No. is changed apply to the controls with the new group No. The applied properties are shown in the following table. Table 3.1.2.4 (a) Properties Applied When the Group No. Is Changed NoAction Image Interlock 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Image PMC Path OutPMCArea OutPMCAddress Symbol Symbol selection Button Size Button Position Mask Image File Style Image File Name Style Back Color Border Color Outer Frame Color ON Color OFF Color Image File Name Style Back Color Border Color Outer Frame Color State Color Image File Name Style Back Color Border Color Outer Frame Color State Color Name Action Setting item Drawing number Tab 46/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.2.5 Properties This section describes the properties of radio button control. Tab configuration Table 3.1.2.5 (a) List of Tabs Description Item General Character Action Focus Image NoAction Image Interlock Image Used to specify the position and size of the radio box. Used to specify the position, color, and text of the caption in the text area. Used to specify the initial status, allocation to the PMC area, interlock, and shortcut key. Used to specify the focus number and how to move the focus. Used to specify the image when the control is disabled and the image at usual times. Used to specify the allocation of the PMC area and the image for the disable signal. Used to specify the image for when the interlock is engaged. [General] tab Fig. 3.1.2.5 (a) Properties Page - [General] Tab Table 3.1.2.5 (b) List of Setting Items on the [General] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Synchronization Object ID Fixed value FPRadioBtnX - No X is automatically entered. X Y Width User entry User entry User entry Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value - No No No Height User entry Numerical value - No Specify a value smaller than the screen size. Specify a value smaller than the screen size. Specify a value smaller than the screen size starting from [X]. Specify a value smaller than the screen size starting from [Y]. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Note Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Setting item 47/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Character] tab Fig. 3.1.2.5 (b) Properties Page - [Character] Tab Table 3.1.2.5 (c) List of Properties on the [Character] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification No use multi-language Check box ON/OFF OFF No When you select this check box, [Multi-language key] is enabled. Multi-language key Alignment Selection Arbitrary No Select a language key from those registered under project settings. Selection Caption User entry Left Aligned Center Right Aligned Arbitrary First candidate Left Aligned Blank No X User entry 0 No 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Selection 0 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." ANK Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 No This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Center]: OFF Specify a value smaller than [Height] on the [General] tab. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Center]: OFF Select a character type from the settings. When using the multi-language key in the iHMImode, specify the character FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No Enter the text to be displayed in the text area. When using the multi-language key, specify a caption for each key that can be specified with [Multi-language key]. Specify a value smaller than [Width] on the [General] tab. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Character Type Numerical value Note No Name User entry Numerical value Synchronization Drawing number Y Initial value 48/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Character Color Palette Color selection Black No Disable Color Palette Color selection Black No Interlock Color Palette Color selection Black No type for each key that can be specified with [Multi-language key]. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. [Action] tab Fig. 3.1.2.5 (c) Properties Page - [Action] Tab Table 3.1.2.5 (d) List of Properties on the [Action] Tab Specification NoAction Check box ON/OFF OFF No GroupNo GroupIndex User entry User entry 1~9 0~31 1 0 No No 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Synchronizati on Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 When you select this check box, [NoAction Image] is enabled. Specify the bit to be allocated. If the same No. is set within the same group, an error occurs during generation of the MEM file. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Note Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Initial value Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Entry type Name Setting item 49/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Init Status Check box (*1) Selection(*2) ON/OFF /PMC(*) *1 Editon 9.8 or earlier *2 Editon 9.9 or later Initial value Synchronizati on Note No Set the selection status when the screen starts. If more than one is ON in the same group, an error occurs when generating a MEM file. OFF * ”PMC” is valid at Edition 9.9 or later When you switch the screen with the memory for the screen configuration set to clear, the last display state is discarded and the screen appears according to this setting. <Edition 9.9 or later> When “PMC” is selected for [Init Status], an error occurs when generating a MEM file unless all radio buttons in the same group are “PMC”. (see Section 3.1.1.8, “Message”) Shortcut Key Shortcut key selection Output PMC PMC Path Check box Selection ON/OFF Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." OFF First candidate No No Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value First candidate Yes First candidate Yes 0 Yes OutPMCAre a Selection OutPMCAdd ress User entry This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Shortcut Key]: ON This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF Symbol Symbol selection Check box Entry or selection ON/OFF Arbitrary OFF Blank Yes Yes Select a symbol from those registered in the PMC symbol list. If the number of bits of the type specified with the selected symbol is insufficient for the number of radio buttons set in the same group, an error occurs during generation of the MEM file. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Edition Date Created OFF Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 ON/OFF Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Check box Drawing number Interlock Interlock 50/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Synchronizati on PMC Path Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate No InterlockPM CArea Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate No InterlockPM CAddress User entry Numerical value 0 No InterlockPM CBit Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate No Symbol Symbol selection Check box Entry or selection ON/OFF Arbitrary OFF Blank No No Note This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: ON Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE The PMC signal allocated in [Output] retains the status from before the interlock engaged. Therefore, the same status as before the interlock engaged is displayed upon recovery from the interlock. 51/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Focus] tab Fig. 3.1.2.5 (d) Properties Page - [Focus] Tab Setting item Entry type Table 3.1.2.5 (e) List of Properties on the [Focus] Tab Specification Initial Note value Focus is available Check box ON/OFF OFF Focus Index Don't move the focus to the next control after inputting data. Appoint movement index User entry Numerical value 1 Check box ON/OFF OFF Check box ON/OFF OFF User entry User entry Numerical value Numerical value 0 0 Select this check box to directly specify the index that you want to move the focus to. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. User entry Numerical value 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. User entry Numerical value 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Drawing number Upward move Leftward move Rightward move Downward move Select this check box to use the focus. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify a number that is not already used on the screen (form). Select this check box to avoid consecutive entry. 52/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Image] tab Fig. 3.1.2.5 (e) Properties Page - [Image] Tab Screen Table 3.1.2.5 (f) List of Setting Items on the [Image] Tab Specification Initial value Synchronization Setting item Entry type Button Size Selection Small Medium Large Small Yes Button Position Mask Image File Selection Right Aligned Left Aligned Arbitrary Left Aligned Yes Fig file name for the radio button when disabled Yes First style in the Fig file Yes Style Selection Selection Arbitrary Note The display size on the standard monitor is as follows. Small: 25 pixels by 25 pixels (9") 16 pixels by 16 pixels (14") Medium: 32 pixels by 32 pixels (9") 24 pixels by 24 pixels (14") Large: 39 pixels by 39 pixels (9") 32 pixels by 32 pixels (14") The display size on the iHMImode is as follows. Small: Equivalent to Same. Medium: Equivalent to Double. Large: Equivalent to Quad. Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the radio button when disabled. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF 53/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Synchronization Note Image File Name Selection Arbitrary Fig file name for the radio button Yes Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the radio button. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF Style Selection Arbitrary First style in the Fig file Yes Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF Back Color Palette Color selection Border Color Palette Color selection Outer Frame Color ON Color Palette Color selection Palette OFF Color Palette ON Preview Check box Color selection Color selection ON/OFF Gray (192.192.19 2) Black Yes Gray (192.192.19 2) Green (0.128.0) Black Yes Yes Yes Yes Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Circle border (This applies to both the inner and outer circles.) Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. OFF Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name *There is a preview button on the iHMI mode. 54/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [NoAction Image] tab Fig. 3.1.2.5 (f) Properties Page - [NoAction Image] Tab Table 3.1.2.5 (g) List of Properties on the [NoAction Image] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Synchronization NoAction Signal Check box ON/OFF OFF No Fig file name for the radio button First style in the Fig file Gray (192.192.192) Black Yes Style Selection Arbitrary Back Color Palette Border Color Palette Color selection Color selection Outer Frame Color Palette Color selection Gray (192.192.192) Yes State Color Palette Color selection Gray (192.192.192) Yes PMC Path Selection First candidate No PMC Area Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate No 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Yes Yes Yes Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Circle border (This applies to both the inner and outer circles.) Select a color from the color selection dialog. Outer Frame Color Select a color from the color selection dialog. Color of inner circle This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Arbitrary Name Selection When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the radio button. Drawing number Image File Name Note This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON 55/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Synchronization Address User entry Arbitrary 0 No Bit Selection Symbol Symbol selection Check box Entry or selection Check Timing Selection Preview Check box Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." ON/OFF Arbitrary First candidate No OFF Blank No No 0: Power On 1: Always ON/OFF 0: Power On No OFF No Note The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Specify when the disable signal is checked. *There is a preview button on the iHMI mode. [Interlock Image] tab Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.2.5 (g) Properties Page - [Interlock Image] Tab 56/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Table 3.1.2.5 (h) List of Properties on the [Interlock Image] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Synchronization Display Check box ON/OFF OFF No Note This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON Image File Name Selection Arbitrary Fig file name for the radio button First style in the Fig file Gray (192.192.192) Black Yes Style Selection Arbitrary Back Color Palette Border Color Palette Color specification Color specification Outer Frame Color Palette Color specification Gray (192.192.192) Yes State Color Palette Color specification Gray (192.192.192) Yes Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF No Yes Yes Yes When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the radio button. Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Circle border (This applies to both the inner and outer circles.) Select a color from the color selection dialog. Outer Frame Color Select a color from the color selection dialog. Color of inner circle *There is a preview button on the iHMI mode. 3.1.2.6 List display The list display items are shown in "Table 3.1.2.6 (a) List Display Items." Note that the description is omitted in the following cases: - The item name is the same as the setting item. - The setting value is the same as that on the [Property] tab. For details about the item display conditions, refer to "Table 3.1.2.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions." - Comment - - X Y General General 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is blank.) Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page General - Name Settings tab Object ID Tab index Drawing number Item name Table 3.1.2.6 (a) List Display Items Setting item Specification 57/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item name Settings tab Setting item Width Height No use multi-language Multi-language key Arrangement General General Character Text offset posX Text offset posY Character Type Caption color Disable Color Lock Color Focus caption color Caption Character Center Left Aligned Right Aligned X Character Y No action Group no. Group index Init Status Action Action Action Action Character Character Multi-language key No. -1 Left Aligned No.2 Character Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Character Character Character Character Character When the multi-language keys are used, the same number of captions as that of keys are displayed. 0:OFF 1:ON OFF- Symbol Action Symbol selection Action - PMC Path - OutPMCArea - OutPMCAddress Interlock Interlock signal symbol flag Interlock signal symbol Action Action Symbol Action Symbol selection Date Created No.3 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 No.5 No.6 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No.4 Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Action 0:OFF Other settings: Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0:OFF 1:ON Name * ”PMC” is valid at Edition 9.9 or later - Shortcut Key - Shortcut key selection Drawing number ON OFF PMC(*) Out PMC symbol flag Out PMC symbol Out PMC Edition No.1 No.2 Action 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Item display conditions 0:OFF 1:ON Shortcut Key 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Specification 58/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Setting item Specification - PMC Path - InterlockPMCArea - InterlockPMCAddress - InterlockPMCBit Display Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.7 0:OFF 1:ON No. 8 or No. 9 Interlock signal Action Interlock image display Interlock image file name Interlock image style Interlock Back Color Interlock Border Color Interlock Outer Frame Color Interlock state color Interlock preview Focus is available Number of focus Index Don't move focus to the next control after data input operation. Appoint movement index Focusing up Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Focus Focus Numerical value Focusing left Focus Numerical value Focusing right Focus Numerical value Focusing down Button Size Focus Numerical value Position Image No action image file name No action image style Image Mask Image File Image Style Edition Date Created Style number No. 10 or No. 11 Back Color No. 10 or No. 11 Border Color No. 10 or No. 11 Outer Frame Color No. 10 or No. 11 State Color No. 10 or No. 11 Preview 0:OFF 1:ON No. 10 or No. 11 0:OFF 1:ON Focus Numerical value Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) No.19 Focus 0:OFF 1:ON No.19 Focus 0:OFF 1:ON No.19 Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) 0: Small 1: Medium 2: Large 0: Left 1: Right No.20 Image Style number 2018.11.13 No.20 No.12 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No.20 No.12 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge No.20 Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Style No. 10 or No. 11 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Image File Name Item display conditions Drawing number Item name 59/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Image File Name Style Background color Border Color Outer Frame Color ON Color OFF Color ON Preview No action signal No action signal image file name No action signal style No action Back Color No action Border color No action Outer Frame Color No action State Color No action signal symbol flag No action signal symbol No action signal PMC Image No action signal preview NoAction Image Image Image Created No. 13 or No. 14 Image Image Image NoAction Image NoAction Image 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON No.15 Mask Image File NoAction Image NoAction Image NoAction Image NoAction Image Style No.16 Style number No.16 Back Color No.16 Border Color No.16 Outer Frame Color No.16 NoAction Image NoAction Image State Color No.16 NoAction Image NoAction Image Symbol selection Symbol 0:OFF 1:ON PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit Preview No.16 No.17 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.18 0:OFF 1:ON No.16 Table 3.1.2.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions Display condition 1 2 3 [Use the multi-language display function] (project settings): ON [Left] or [Right] is selected on the [Action] tab. Output PMC symbol flag on the [Action] tab: ON 4 Output PMC symbol flag on the [Action] tab: OFF 5 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON 6 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON Interlock signal symbol flag on the [Action] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON Interlock signal symbol flag on the [Action] tab: OFF Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Date Style number Name Edition Item display conditions Image Image 7 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Specification No. 13 or No. 14 No. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Setting item Drawing number Item name 60/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3.1.2.7 Display condition [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Disable signal symbol on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Disable signal symbol on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Appoint movement index] on the [Focus] tab: ON Batch editing The following table shows the setting items on each tab that are the same as those in the list display. The property names other than the items shown below are the same as those in the list display. Table 3.1.2.7 (a) List of Differences for the Same Setting Items Item name (list display) Property name (batch editing) Shortcut Key Shortcut Key Shortcut key code *Group Nos. and the settings in "Table 3.1.2.7 (a) Properties Applied When the Group No. Is Changed" cannot be edited in batch. <Edition 9.9 or later> For the setting values when PMC is set to [Init Status] in batch editing, refer to “Table 3.1.2.7 (b) Value of [Init Status] in batch editing screen”. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Table 3.1.2.7 (b) Value of [Init Status] in batch editing screen Init Status Value to set 61/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== PMC 2 NOTE The output result of the property list output by the screen bitmap batch output function is also the same as "Table 3.1.2.7 (b) Value of [Init Status] in batch editing screen ". 3.1.2.8 Message The specific message displayed when setting this control is shown below.. Table 3.1.2.8 (a) List of Messages 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Message When the group No. is changed, the following items are also changed. Are you sure you want to continue? Output PMC Image NoAction Image Interlock Image If using PMC as "Init Status", set all "Init Status" in the same group to PMC. Name When PMC is set to "Init Status", there is a radio button control in the same group that is set to other than PMC. Timing When the property tab is switched When [Apply] is selected When [OK] is selected When generating a MEM file - Drawing number Cause A group No. is changed to an existing group No. 62/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.3 List Box Control 3.1.3.1 Function The list box control lists registered items from which the user can select multiple options. 3.1.3.2 Diagram The minimum size of a list box is as follows. Width: Width of one double-byte character + Height of row (setting value) Height: Height of row (setting value) x 2 Strings are displayed up to the number of characters that can be displayed. The part after the number of characters that can be displayed is not displayed. The vertical scroll bar is displayed if the number of items that can be registered is larger than the number of displayed rows or if you select to display the scroll bar in Property. The horizontal scroll bar is not displayed. The up and down buttons on the scroll bar are square with the same height as the row. Normal size Minimum size AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBB A B CCC DDDD EEEEEE Fig. 3.1.3.2 (a) Images of List Boxes 3.1.3.3 Icon design The following icon is displayed on the toolbar. Fig. 3.1.3.3 (a) Icon Design 3.1.3.4 Operation Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Status management Specify the first PMC address to synchronize the item selection status in the list box with the PMC. Items are allocated to the bits of the address in order. 63/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Operation Once the list box operation mode is enabled, you can operate the list box. End the list box operation mode before operating other controls. The following description when "TAB key" is set to [Operation Mode Switch Key]. (1) To start the list box operation mode (a) Move the focus with the MDI key to select the list box and press the <TAB> key to change the list box to the operation mode. (b) If you can click the list box with the mouse or touch it on the screen, click or touch the list box to directly start the list box operation mode. (2) To end the list box operation mode (a) Press the <TAB> key while the list box operation mode is active to end it. You can move the focus to another control by operating the MDI key. (b) Click outside the list box with the mouse or, if possible, touch outside the list box on the screen to end the list box operation mode. After the list box operation mode ends, there is no focus. (3) Transition of the operation mode Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Procedure 1 (operation by moving the focus with the MDI key) (i) Move the focus to the list box by using the MDI key. (ii) Press the <TAB> key to switch the list box operation mode. Press the <TAB> key to switch the list box between the operation mode and the non-operation mode. (iii) You can now operate the list box. (iv) End the list box operation mode by using the <TAB> key. (v) Switch the focus to another control by using the MDI key. Drawing number (a) 64/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== MDI key MDI key Focus on another control MDI key MDI key List box Focus TAB key List box Non-operation mode List box Operation mode TAB key MDI key MDI key Focus on another control MDI key MDI key Fig. 3.1.3.4 (a) Operation Mode Transition Diagram (1) (b) Procedure 2 (clicking the list box with the mouse or touching it on the touch panel) (i) Click or touch the list box to start the list box operation mode. (ii) Click or touch outside the list box to end the list box operation mode. (4) Key operations The key operations in each status of the list box are shown below. State The focus is in a list box. Non-operation mode Operation mode (Entire) list box The list box operation mode is enabled. The list box operation mode is enabled. Up button The list box operation mode is enabled. The list box operation mode is enabled. Down button The list box operation mode is enabled. The list box operation mode is enabled. The list box operation mode is enabled. (Specify the row that the focus is on and switch the selection status of it at the same time.) The list box operation mode The list box operation mode is enabled. (Specify the row that the focus is on and switch the selection status of it at the same time.) The list box operation Scroll bar 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 The focus is moved to the row above the current one. The focus is moved to the row below the current one. Specify the row that the focus is on and switch between selection and deselection. - FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge - Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item row Name The focus is on another control. Drawing number Mouse or touch screen operation Table 3.1.3.4 (a) Mode Transition List 65/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== State The focus is in a list box. Non-operation mode Operation mode The focus is on another control. Key operations is enabled. mode is enabled. The focus is removed from the list box. Outside the list box - <Up> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <Dn> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <Right> key <Left> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <PgUp> key - - <PgDn> key - - <INPUT> key - - <TAB> key - The list box operation mode is enabled. The focus is removed from the list box. The focus is moved to the row above the current one. The focus is moved to the row below the current one. The previous page is displayed. The next page is displayed. The row that the focus is on is selected or deselected. The list box non-operation mode is enabled. (5) Relationship between the item list and the list box In the list box display in the item list, as many items as possible are displayed in the list box from the first display item. EEEE Item list EEEE FFFF AAAA GGGG BBBB HHHH CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL MMMM First display item List box Selected row Deselected row Up button EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH Focus row Down button Fig. 3.1.3.4 (b) Item List and Display Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE When the item on the focus row is selected, the text is displayed in the selected color. 66/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (6) Position of the gauge on the scroll bar The position of the gauge is determined based on the position of the item specified as the first display item among all the items registered in the item list. In the item list that contains 12 items from "AAAA" to "LLLL" as shown below, the gauge on the scroll bar is positioned as follows. - If the item specified as the first display item is at the beginning of the item list AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL - AAAA EEEE BBBB CCCC DDDD If the item specified as the first display item is at the middle of the item list AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL - The gauge is positioned at the top. EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH The gauge is positioned at the middle. If the item specified as the first display item is at the bottom of the item list AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL IIII EEEE JJJJ KKKK LLLL The gauge is positioned at the bottom. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.3.4 (c) Display Position of Scroll Bar 67/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (7) Operation of the Up button or <Up> key Press the Up button on the scroll bar of the list box or the <Up> key to move the focus one row up. When the first display item is on the focus row, the item above the current focus row is displayed and the focus is moved there. The selected row is not changed. Press the Up button or <Up> key. EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH Press the Up button or <Up> key. EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH DDDD EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG Fig. 3.1.3.4 (d) Operation of the Up Button or <Up> Key (8) Operation of the Down button or <Dn> key Press the Down button on the scroll bar of the list box or the <Dn> key to move the focus one row down. When the focus is on the last item in the list box, the item below the current focus row is displayed and the focus is moved there. The selected row is not changed. EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH Press the Down button or <Dn> key. EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG Press the Down button or <Dn> key. EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH HHHH FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII Fig. 3.1.3.4 (e) Operation of the Down Button or <Dn> Key Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name (9) Operation of the <PgUp> key Press the <PgUp> key to display the items on the previous page (as many items as the number of display items). The focus moves to the first display item. 68/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH Press the <PgUp> key. AAAA EEEE BBBB CCCC DDDD AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL MMMM AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL MMMM Fig. 3.1.3.4 (f) Operation of the <PgUp> Key (10) Operation of the <PgDn> key Press the <PgDn> key to display the items on the next page (as many items as the number of display items). The focus moves to the first display item. EEEE EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH Press the <PgDn> key. IIII EEEE JJJJ KKKK LLLL AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL MMMM AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH IIII JJJJ KKKK LLLL MMMM Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.3.4 (g) Operation of the <PgDn> Key 69/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (11) Switch of the selection status of an item This section describes how to switch the selection status of each item in the item list. Whether multiple items can be selected or not can be selected from Property. (a) Switching the selection status with the <INPUT> key (i) Use the <PgUp> or <PgDn> key to move the focus row and select the item whose selection status you want to change with the <Up> or <Dn> key. (ii) Press the <INPUT> key in this state to switch the selection status of the focus row. When the focus row is selected, the text is displayed in the selection color. When the focus row is deselected, the text is displayed in the deselection color. (When it is not possible to select multiple items, the currently selected item is deselected. When it is possible to select multiple items, the currently selected items remain selected.) (iii) When you press the <INPUT> key again, the selection status is switched again. You can see whether an item is selected or not by looking at whether the text on the focus row is in the selection color or deselection color. EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH Press the <INPUT> key. EEEE FFFF GGGG HHHH (Selection color) (Deselection color) Fig. 3.1.3.4 (h) Change in the Text Color Depending on the Status (b) Switching the selection status by clicking the mouse or touching the screen (i) When you select the item row of which selection status you want to change by left-clicking it with the mouse or touching it on the screen, the focus moves to the row of the clicked or touched item and the selection status of that item is switched. (ii) If you click or touch the same item row again, only the selection status of the item row is switched but the focus row remains unchanged. (12) Memory clear When the memory clear setting on the screen configuration control parent screen tab is set to ON, all the settings in the list box are cleared and return to the initial status when you switch the screen. (13) Addition and deletion in the item list in the list box You can add and delete items via the Ruby script. However, note that the maximum number of items that can be added is the number of items that can be registered. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name (14) Addition of items You can add items within the number of items that can be registered. The new item is added to the end of the item list. 70/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD     Registered Empty AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD GGGG    Added to the end of the item list. Fig. 3.1.3.4 (i) Image Diagram of Item Addition (15) Deletion of item You can delete any item from the item list. When you delete an item, all the items in the item list are deselected. AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE    AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD Delete "CCCC." AAAA BBBB DDDD EEEE    AAAA BBBB DDDD EEEE Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.3.4 (j) Image Diagram of Item Deletion 71/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.3.5 Properties This section describes the properties of list box control. Tab configuration Table 3.1.3.5 (a) List of Tabs Description Item General Character Action Focus Image NoAction Image Interlock Image Used to specify the position and size of the list box. Used to specify the character type and color of the caption. Used to specify the initial status, allocation to the PMC area, and interlock and to manage and register items. Used to specify the focus number and how to move the focus. Used to specify color information at usual times. Used to specify color information when the disable signal is issued. Used to specify color information when the interlock is engaged. [General] tab Fig. 3.1.3.5 (a) Properties Page - [General] Tab Table 3.1.3.5 (b) List of Properties on the [General] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Setting item Object ID Fixed value FPListBoxX - X Y Width Height User entry User entry User entry Entry not allowed. (Automatically adjusted.*) Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value - Note X is automatically entered. (User entry is not allowed.) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name *This value is automatically set based on the row height and the number of display items. 72/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Character] tab Fig. 3.1.3.5 (b) Properties Page - [Character] Tab (Left: Standard Monitor mode, Right: iHMImode) Table 3.1.3.5 (c) List of Properties on the [Character] Tab Specification Initial value Note Setting item Entry type Multi-language key Character Type Selection Arbitrary Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Unselected Color Selected Color Palette Color selection Black Select a language key from those registered under project settings. Select the character type. When using the multi-language key in the iHMI mode, specify the character type for each key that can be specified with [Multi-language key]. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Palette Color selection Black Select a color from the color selection dialog. Interlock Color Palette Color selection Black Select a color from the color selection dialog. First candidate ANK [Action] tab Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.3.5 (c) Properties Page - [Action] Tab 73/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.3.5 (d) List of Properties on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Setting item NoAction Check box Note ON/OFF OFF When you select this check box, [NoAction Image] is enabled. Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value First candidate This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. Status management PMC PMC Path Selection Start Area Selection Start Address User entry First candidate 0 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF Symbol Check box ON/OFF OFF Symbol selection Entry or selection Arbitrary Blank Interlock Check box ON/OFF OFF PMC Path Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate InterlockPMCArea Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate InterlockPMCAddress User entry Numerical value 0 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Interlock This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF InterlockPMCBit Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate Symbol Check box ON/OFF OFF Symbol selection Entry or selection Arbitrary Blank This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: ON File Name User entry Arbitrary Blank Specify the Itemxml file. Display Item Count User entry Numerical value 2 The allowed range is between 2 and 99. Registrable Items User entry Numerical value 1 The allowed range is between 1 and 2048. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Item 74/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Row Height User entry Numerical value 16 Multi Select Check box ON/OFF ON Scroll Display Check box ON/OFF ON Note The allowed range is from the height of ANK (16 in the standard machine mode, 12 in the iHMI mode) to 64. ON: Multiple selection OFF: Single selection ON: Always displayed. OFF: Displayed when the value in [Registrable Items] is larger than that in [Display Item Count]. NOTE The PMC signal allocated in [Status management PMC] retains the status from before the interlock was engaged. Therefore, the status from before the interlock engaged is displayed upon recovery from the interlock. File edit screen Fig. 3.1.3.5 (d) Itemxml File Edit Screen Table 3.1.3.5 (e) List of Items on the Itemxml File Edit Screen Item Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Adds a row. Inserts a row. Deletes a row. Import a CSV file. Export data in CSV format. Adds a sheet for multi-language settings. Renames a sheet. Deletes a sheet. Select this check box when you do not need multi-language display switching. For example, when using characters that do not depend on the display language. Drawing number Add row Insert Row Delete row Import Export Add sheet Rename sheet Delete sheet No use multi-language 75/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Check char Checks all the message sentences to make sure that strings in the message do not contain characters that cannot be displayed with the character type set with the character property of the control. Displays the message to be displayed in the list box. Displays File Explorer and saves edits in the itemxml file format. If there are empty rows between items, an error message appears. (A row only containing spaces is considered an empty row.) Discards edits. Item OK button Cancel Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - Import A tab-separated CSV file can be imported. The CSV file that contains the multi-language key that matches that on the sheet is imported. Because files are imported row by row, the file with the most rows in the language used is imported. If there are more data items to be imported than empty rows, the file is not imported. 76/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Example) Screen CSV file English Chinese English Chinese A 1 E 3 B 2 F 4 C G D H English Chinese A 1 B 2 C D E 3 F 4 G H [Focus] tab Fig. 3.1.3.5 (e) Properties Page - [Focus] Tab Setting item Entry type Table 3.1.3.5 (f) List of Properties on the [Focus] Tab Specification Initial value Note Focus is available Check box ON/OFF OFF Index User entry Numerical value 1 Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Select this check box to use the focus. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify a number that is not already used on the screen (form). 77/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note Appoint movement index Check box ON/OFF OFF UP key User entry 0 LEFT key User entry 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. RIGHT key User entry 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. DOWN key User entry Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Select this check box to directly specify the index that you want to move the focus to. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. [Image] tab Fig. 3.1.3.5 (f) Properties Page - [Image] Tab Table 3.1.3.5 (g) List of Properties on the [Image] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note Palette Color selection Blue Select a color from the color selection dialog. Palette Color selection Gray Select a color from the color selection dialog. Palette Color selection Yellow Select a color from the color selection dialog. Palette Palette Color selection Color specification Black White Scroll OFF Color Palette Color specification Gray Scroll Button Color Palette Color specification Black Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the up and down arrow marks. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the up and down arrow marks. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the up and down arrow marks. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date 2018.11.13 Drawing number A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Created Person in charge Name Selected Back Color Unselected Back Color Focused Back Color Border Color Scroll ON Color 78/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Scrollbar Color Palette Color specification Gray Palette Color specification Black Palette Color specification Black Display Selection Status Focus Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF Check box ON/OFF OFF Note Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the scroll bar. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the border color of the scroll bar. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the scroll bar. When you select this check box, exclusive control is performed. When you select this check box, exclusive control is performed. [NoAction Image] tab Fig. 3.1.3.5 (g) Properties Page - [NoAction Image] Tab Table 3.1.3.5 (h) List of Properties on the [NoAction Image] Tab Entry type NoAction Signal Check box Specification ON/OFF Initial value Note OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction]: ON When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Palette Palette Color selection Color selection Gray Black Scroll State Color Palette Color specification Dark gray (128.128.128) Scroll Button Color Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Palette Color specification Black Palette Color specification Gray Palette Color specification Black 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the up and down arrow marks. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the up and down arrow marks. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the scroll bar. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the border color of the scroll bar. Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Back Color Border Color Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item 79/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note Dark gray (128.128.128) First candidate Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the scroll bar. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. Scrollbar Color Palette Color specification PMC Path Selection PMC Area Selection Address User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Arbitrary Bit Selection Symbol Check box Symbol selection Entry or selection Check Timing Selection Preview Check box First candidate 0 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." ON/OFF First candidate Arbitrary Blank 0: Power On 1: Always ON/OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF OFF Select a symbol from those registered in the PMC symbol list. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Specify when the disable signal is checked. 0: Power On OFF When you select this check box, exclusive control is performed. [Interlock Image] tab Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.3.5 (h) Properties Page - [Interlock Image] Tab 80/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.3.5 (i) List of Properties on the [Interlock Image] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Note Setting item Display Back Color Border Color Check box Palette Palette ON/OFF Color specification Color specification OFF Gray Black Scroll State Color Palette Color specification Dark gray (128.128.128) Scroll Button Color Palette Color specification Black Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Scrollbar Color Palette Color specification Gray Palette Color specification Black Palette Color specification Without caption Check box ON/OFF Dark gray (128.128.128) OFF Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF 3.1.3.6 List display Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the up and down arrow marks. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the up and down arrow marks. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color of the scroll bar. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the border color of the scroll bar. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the scroll bar. When you select this check box, exclusive control is performed. The setting items that can be edited in the list display are shown in "Table 3.1.3.6 (a) List of Properties in the List Display." The setting tabs and setting items are the corresponding tab names and item names on the Property screen. For details about the item display conditions, refer to "Table 3.1.3.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions." Table 3.1.3.6 (a) List of Properties in the List Display Setting item General General General General Character Object ID Tab index Comment X Y Width Multi-language key Character Type Character Character Type Character Type (1) Character Character Type Character Type (2) Character Character Type Character Type (3) Character Character Type Character Type (4) Character Character Type 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Arbitrary Arbitrary Multi-language key No. 1 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.1 No.19 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Object ID Tab index Comment X Y Width Multi-language key Specification Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 81/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Character Type (5) Character Character Type Character Type (6) Character Character Type Character Type (7) Character Character Type Character Type (8) Character Character Type Character Type (9) Character Character Type Character Type (10) Character Character Type Character Type (11) Character Character Type Character Type (12) Character Character Type Character Type (13) Character Character Type Character Type (14) Character Character Type Character Type (15) Character Character Type Character Type (16) Character Character Type Character Type (17) Character Character Type Character Type (18) Character Character Type Character Type (19) Character Character Type Character Type (20) Character Character Type Selected Color Unselected Color Lock Color Character Character Character NoAction File Name Display Item Count Number of Registrable Items Row Height Multi Select Scroll Display Status Mabagement Start Symbol Flag Status Mabagement Start Symbol Status Management Start PMC Action Action Action Action Selected Color Unselected Color Interlock Character Color NoAction File Name Display Item Count Registrable Items Action Action Action Action Row Height Multi Select Scroll Display Symbol Action Symbol selection Action - 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created 2018.11.13 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON No.2 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.3 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Item display conditions 0:OFF 1:ON PMC Path Start Area Start Address Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Specification Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Settings tab Drawing number Item name 82/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Setting item Specification Interlock Interlock signal symbol flag Interlock signal symbol Interlock signal Action Action Interlock Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Interlock image display Interlock Back Color Interlock Border Color Interlock Scroll State Color Interlock Scroll Button Color Interlock Scroll Back Color Interlock Scroll Border Color Interlock Scrollbar Color Without caption at interlock Interlock Preview Focus is available Number of focus index Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Focus Focus PMC Path InterlockPMCArea InterlockPMCAddress InterlockPMCBit Display Appoint movement index Focusing up Focus Focus Appoint movement index <UP> Key Focusing down Focus <DOWN> Key Focusing left Focus <LEFT> Key Focusing right Focus <RIGHT> Key Selected Back Color Unselected Back Color Focused Back Color Border Color Scroll ON Color Scroll OFF Color Scroll Button Color Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Scrollbar Color Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Selected Back Color Unselected Back Color Focused Back Color Border Color Scroll ON Color Scroll OFF Color Scroll Button Color Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Scrollbar Color Edition Date Created Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.6 0:OFF 1:ON Back Color No.7 No.8 No.9 Border Color No.9 Scroll State Color No.9 Scroll Button Color No.9 Scroll Back Color No.9 Scroll Border Color No.9 Scrollbar Color No.9 Without caption 0:OFF 1:ON No.9 Preview 0:OFF 1:ON No.10 Focus is available Index 0:OFF 1:ON Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) 0:OFF 1:ON Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Arbitrary (The initial value is 0.) Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 No.17 No.17 No.18 No.18 No.18 No.18 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 No.4 No.5 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item name 83/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item name Settings tab Display Selection Status Display Focused Status No action Signal No action Border Color No action Back Color No action Scroll State Color No action Scroll Button Color No action Scroll Back Color No action Scroll Border Color No action Scrollbar Color No action signal symbol flag No action signal symbol No action signal PMC Image Image NoAction Image NoAction Image NoAction Image NoAction Image Display Selection Status Focus Preview NoAction Signal Border Color Back Color Scroll State Color NoAction Image Scroll Button Color No.14 NoAction Image Scroll Back Color No.14 NoAction Image Scroll Border Color No.14 NoAction Image Scrollbar Color No.14 NoAction Image Symbol NoAction Image NoAction Image No action signal preview NoAction Image Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit Preview Interlock: ON Interlock signal symbol flag: ON Interlock: ON Interlock signal symbol flag: OFF Interlock: ON NoAction: OFF Interlock: ON NoAction: ON NoAction Signal: ON Interlock image display: ON Person in charge 2018.11.13 No.14 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Name 12 No.15 Interlock image display: ON Preview of disabled status: OFF Focus Preview: OFF Preview of disabled status: OFF Interlock preview: OFF Display Selection Status: OFF Preview of disabled status: OFF Interlock preview: OFF Drawing number 11 Date 0:OFF 1:ON Interlock: ON 10 No.11 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.14 No.14 No.16 5 9 Item display conditions Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 4 8 Edition 0:OFF 1:ON 2 3 7 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON [Use the multi-language display function] (project settings): ON Edit mode: iHMI Symbol flag: ON Symbol flag: OFF 6 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Specification Table 3.1.3.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions Display condition No. 1 Setting item 84/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== No. 13 NoAction: ON 14 NoAction Signal: ON 15 NoAction Signal: ON Blind Signal Symbol Flag: ON NoAction Signal: ON Blind Signal Symbol Flag: OFF [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON 16 17 18 19 20 3.1.3.7 Display condition [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Focus move rules] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Use the multi-language character type function] (project settings): OFF Edit mode: iHMI [Use the multi-language display function] (project settings): ON [Use the multi-language character type function] (project settings): ON Edit mode: iHMI Batch editing You can display the setting items on each tab. The property names are the same as those in the list display. 3.1.3.8 Message There is no specific message displayed when setting this control. 3.1.4 Message Box 3.1.4.1 Function The message box is a dialog box that displays a message to the user. The message box appears in the foreground of the screen in operation and prompts the user to respond by selecting a button. NOTE The screen size is nessesary to set the following size or larger if the message screen is used. Width : 494 Height : 220 3.1.4.2 Image Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The message box size is large or small. The large or small size is automatically applied depending on the number of characters in the title and message. The display position is at the center of the user-created screen. Select an icon from the provided five types. 85/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.4.2 (a) Small Message Box (Standard Monitor version) Fig. 3.1.4.2 (b) Small Message Box (iHMI version) Create relatively large buttons to support touch panel operation as well. Although the message box looks different on the standard monitor version and the iHMI version, the component parts and operation are the same. Table 3.1.4.2 (c) Size of Message Box (Image) Small size Large size 3.1.4.3 Operation Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The message box can be called and displayed as a FP function (MsgBoxShow function) from a Ruby script. The displayed message box cannot be moved. (It cannot be dragged on the touch panel, either.) While the message box is displayed, custom screens other than the message box cannot be operated. To close the message box, press a button. (Touch a button or press the allocated shortcut key.) If the number of the Ruby script is specified as an argument of MsgBoxShow function, the script is executed when the message box is closed by pressing the button. While the message box is displayed, you can switch to another screen (such as the maintenance screen). Multiple message boxes do not appear at the same time. Only one message box appears at a time. Once a message box appears, another message box cannot appear until the displayed message box is closed. 86/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.4.3 (a) Conceptual Image of Displayed Message Box NOTE When switching to another screen while displaying the message box and returning to the same custom screen again, whether the message box is displayed or not is the same as switching to another screen while displaying the popup screen. Refer to FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0) APPENDIX D, "Switching screens while displaying Popup screen" for more detail. When closing the message box by switching screens, even if the number of the Ruby script is specified as an argument of MsgBoxShow function, the script is NOT executed. Close the message box by the button on it to execute the script. Character specifications - The character type of all the displayed text (title name, message, and button text) is fixed to the default (ANK). The title must be one row. If the title string contains a line feed code, only the text before the code is displayed. When the number of characters in the title or body exceeds the maximum number of characters for the small size, the large message box is displayed. The number of characters that can be displayed in the standard monitor version is shown in the following tables.( In iHMI version, the number of characters that can be displayed depends on the setting of character type "ANK".) Table 3.1.4.3 (a) Specifications of the Number of Displayed Characters In the Standard Monitor Version When Using Small Characters (One Character = One Byte) Button type Title Body One-button Two-button Three-button Common 32 characters x 1 row 36 characters x 1 row 52 characters x 1 row 60 characters x 1 row 16 characters x 3 rows 20 characters x 3 rows 32 characters x 3 rows 40 characters x 5 rows 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Drawing number Large size Name Size Small size 87/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.4.3 (b) Specifications of the Number of Displayed Characters In the Standard Monitor Version When Using Big Characters (One Character = One Byte) Size Button type Title Body Small size One-button Two-button Three-button Common Large size 16 characters x 1 row 18 characters x 1 row 26 characters x 1 row 30 characters x 1 row 8 characters x 2 rows 10 characters x 2 rows 16 characters x 2 rows 20 characters x 3 rows NOTE A double-byte character takes up 2 bytes. - - Even if you do not insert line feed codes, line feeds are automatically inserted if text exceeds the horizontal limit of characters. If the number of rows exceeds the limit of the small size after you insert line feed codes or line feeds are automatically inserted, the large size display is used. If the number of rows exceeds the limit of the large size, text is displayed until the maximum number of rows for the large size. If the last byte in each row is the first byte of a double-byte character, that last byte is displayed as the double-byte character on a new row. If the current row is the last display row, that character is not displayed. Fig. 3.1.4.3 (b) Screen Using Big Characters 3.1.4.4 Fig. 3.1.4.3 (c) Screen Using Small Characters Configuration specifications The message box consists of components 1 to 6 below. 2 1 4 3 5 6 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.4.4 (a) Basic Message Box 88/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.4.4 (a) Names and Description of Message Box Components No. Name Description 1 2 Title bar Title 3 Background 4 Icon 5 6 Message Button Background of title. Title of message box. Screen background of the message box other than the title bar. User-specified icon that is displayed at the same time as the body of the message. User-defined string. Buttons clicked by users such as [OK]. Table 3.1.4.4 (b) List of Components that the User Can Define (Adjust) in the Message Box Component Display position Message box Size No Title bar Background No Yes (three options) (left, center or right) - Icon No Title Yes (three options) (left, center or right) No Message Button (text) Button (background) No No (automatic selection) No Multi-language Color Script - - - Yes Yes (six options) (Refer to the next section.) No No - Yes Yes - - Yes No - - No Yes (five options) (Refer to the next section.) No - Yes Yes No Yes Yes No - - Yes (*1) No *1) When this setting is ON, Border Color1 and Border Color2 are switched and output. The message box can be selected from the following types. Table 3.1.4.4 (c) Types of Message Boxes Button type Number of buttons Initial display names of buttons 1 1 OK 2 2 OK Cancel 3 3 4 3 5 2 Yes No 6 2 Retry Cancel Image (iHMI version) Image (standard monitor version) Stop Retry Ignore Yes No Cancel Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name *The initial display names of buttons are those in the English version. 89/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== The following types of icons are available. Table 3.1.4.4 (d) Images of Icons Icon type Sample usage and description of icon 1 2 No icon Cross mark in red circle Used when displaying an error message, warning the user, and so on. 3 Question mark in round balloon Used for inquiry messages and so on. 4 Exclamation mark in yellow triangle Used when prompting the user to confirm something, alerting the user, and so on. 5 "i" letter in round balloon Used when displaying information to the user and so on. Image (standard monitor version) Image (iHMI version) N/A N/A NOTE The background color is applied to the gray part of the icon image. 3.1.4.5 Properties This section describes the properties of message boxes. Overall configuration Message boxes consist of the [Button] and [Template] tabs. Table 3.1.4.5 (a) Property Tab Configuration Tab name Button Template Settings Used to set up the buttons in a message box. Used to specify the background color, text color, and text position of a message box. Displaying the message box properties Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Start FANUC PICTURE and select [Message Box Setting] from the [Project] menu. 90/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.4.5 (a) Conceptual Image of Displaying Message Properties When you select the above command, the message box dialog appears, displaying the [Button] tab. [Button] tab The following items can be specified on the [Button] tab. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.4.5 (b) Conceptual Image of the [Button] Tab (Standard Monitor mode) 91/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.4.5 (c) Conceptual Image of the [Button] Tab (iHMI mode) Table 3.1.4.5 (b) List of Properties on the [Button] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Button Type Selection ButtonType1 No use multi-language Check box Button type 1–6 ON/OFF Multi-language key Character Type Selection Any First candidate Selection Any First candidate Left Caption User entry Text Center Caption User entry Text OK (when English is used.) Blank Select the type of buttons to be used in the message box. This item is enabled when you select the [Use the multi-language display function] check box on the [Multi-Language Settings] tab for project settings. When you select this check box, [Multi-language key] is enabled. Displays the specified text in the caption of the button with the multi-language key. iHMI mode only A character type can be specified for each multi-language key when you select the [Use the multi-language character type function] check box on the [Multi-Language Settings] tab for project settings. First caption for the selected button type. Right Caption User entry Text Blank Shortcut key Shortcut key selection 1 Check box ON/OFF OFF Selection First candidate Shortcut key selection 2 Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date 2018.11.13 This setting item becomes selectable when you select the [Shortcut key] check box. This item is not selectable for ButtonType1. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Drawing number Name Second candidate A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Second caption for the selected button type. This item is unavailable for ButtonType1. Third caption for the selected button type. This item is available only for ButtonType3 and ButtonType4. When you select this check box, the items below it become selectable. This setting item becomes selectable when you select the [Shortcut key] check box. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Created Person in charge OFF 92/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Shortcut key selection 3 Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Third candidate This setting item becomes selectable when you select the [Shortcut key] check box. This item is selectable only for ButtonType3 and ButtonType4. Text displayed in each caption The default caption for each button type is shown below. Once you overwrite and save a caption, the saved string is displayed on the caption. ButtonType 1 Left Caption Center Caption Right Caption Table 3.1.4.5 (c) Default Value of Each Caption Display ButtonType ButtonType ButtonType ButtonType 2 3 4 5 ButtonType 6 OK OK Stop Yes Yes Retry - Cancel Retry No No Cancel - - Ignore Cancel - - *When English is used. Character sample display - The button size is fixed to the actual size. Strings specified in caption items are displayed. Text in "Left Caption," "Center Caption," and "Right Caption" is displayed in the display buttons from the left. If the caption contains line feed codes, the string is displayed on multiple rows. The characters displayed on the character sample screen are actually displayed. [Template] tab The following items can be specified on the [Template] tab. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.4.5 (d) Conceptual Image of the [Template] Tab (Standard Monitor mode) 93/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.4.5 (e) Conceptual Image of the [Template] Tab (iHMI mode) Table 3.1.4.5 (d) List of Properties on the [Template] Tab Initial value Selection Any First candidate Title - Character Type Selection Any First candidate Title - Alignment Selection Left Aligned Title - Color of Caption Title - Back Color Message Character Type Palette Left Aligned /Centered /Right Aligned Color selection Color selection Any Left Aligned /Centered /Right Aligned Color selection Left Aligned Palette Selection White Blue (0,255,0) First candidate Remarks iHMI mode only The multi-language key is enabled with the following settings: [Multi-Language Settings] tab for project settings [Use the multi-language character type function]: ON [Button] tab [No use multi-language]: OFF iHMI mode only A character type can be specified for each multi-language key when you select the [Use the multi-language character type function] check box on the [Multi-Language Settings] tab for project settings. Select the display position of title string in the message box. Select the color of the title text of the message box. Select the color of the title background of the message box. iHMI mode only A character type can be specified for each multi-language key when you select the [Use the multi-language character type function] check box on the [Multi-Language Settings] tab for project settings. Select the display position of the message string in the message box. Message Alignment Selection Message Color of Caption Palette 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 Black FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Select the color of the message text in the message box. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Specification Multi-language key Name Entry type Drawing number Setting item 94/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Message - Back Color Message Border Color1 Palette Color selection Color selection Gray (192,192,192) White Message Border Color2 Palette Color selection Black Button Caption Color of Caption Button Caption Back Color Palette Color selection Color selection Black Button Caption Border Color1 Palette Color selection White Button Caption Border Color2 Palette Color selection Black ON Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF Edit Cancel Button ON Selectable Initialize Button ON Selectable Select the color of the background except for the title of the message box. Select the color of the borders from the top left to the top right and from the top left to the bottom left of the message box. Select the color of the borders from the bottom right to the top right and from the bottom right to the bottom left of the message box. Displayed on the buttons in the message box. Select the color of the button text. Select the background color of the buttons in the message box. When you specify ButtonType1 to 6 and ON/OFF, this setting applies to all of them. Select the color of the borders from the top left to the top right and from the top left to the bottom left of the button in the message box. Border Color1 and Border Color2 are switched and displayed every time the button is turned ON or OFF. Select the color of the borders from the bottom right to the top right and from the bottom right to the bottom left of the button in the message box. Border Color1 and Border Color2 are switched and displayed every time the button is turned ON or OFF. Border Color1 and Border Color2 are switched and displayed for the buttons in the review display. Restores the status before the tab is switched or before [OK] or [Apply] is selected. Returns the items that can be specified on the [Template] tab to the state at the time of installation. Palette Palette Gray (192,192,192) Representation of button selection using Border Color1 and Border Color2 Example) When you allocate white and black to Border Color1 and Border Color2, respectively, under Button Caption and select [Cancel] Button Caption - Border Color1: White Border Color1 and Border Color2 are switched and displayed every time the button is turned ON or OFF. Button Caption - Border Color2: Black Fig. 3.1.4.5 (f) Conceptual Image of When a Button Is Selected in the Message Box Sample display area 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - In the sample display area, you can see the coloring of the whole message box that the items specified on the [Template] tab are applied to. The number of button types is fixed to 2. The sample text on the title bar and message is displayed in the language used at startup. Drawing number - 95/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Sample display area Fig. 3.1.4.5 (g) Sample Display Area 3.1.4.6 Function This section describes the specifications of the FP functions for message boxes. [Function] MsgBoxShow [Syntax with arguments] MsgBoxShow( msg , type, title, icon, scrptnum ) [Arguments] This function has the following arguments. Table 3.1.4.6 (a) Arguments of the MsgBoxShow Function Type Description Name msg type title icon scrptnum String Numerical value String Numerical value Numerical value Message to be displayed ButtonType1 to 6 (*1) Title text to be displayed Icon type 1 to 5 (*2) Number of the Ruby script that is executed when the button is pressed [Returns] This function has the following return values. Table 3.1.4.6 (b) Value to Be Stored in the Return Value of the MsgBoxShow Function Type Description Numerical value Execution result 0: Display request succeeded. -1: Display request failed. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] 96/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== This function requests to display a message box. The script is not stopped even when this function is executed. The settings are shown below. Table 3.1.4.6 (c) Button Types and Icon Types (*1) Specification of button type Button type (*2) Specification of icon type Numerical value Icon type Numerical value 0 1 2 3 4 5 Icon type 1 Icon type 2 Icon type 3 Icon type 4 Icon type 5 0 1 2 3 4 ButtonType1 ButtonType2 ButtonType3 ButtonType4 ButtonType5 ButtonType6 If the numerical value is out of specification, ButtonType1 is used. If the numerical value is out of specification, Icon type 1 (no icon) is used. If a button is pressed, one of the following values is stored in MESSAGE_VAL depending on the pressed button. Table 3.1.4.6 (d) List of Return Values When a Button Is Selected Caption name Selected button Return value (Default name when English is used) Button type 1 2 Left Caption Left Caption Center Caption Left Caption Center Caption Right Caption Left Caption Center Caption Right Caption Left Caption Center Caption Left Caption Center Caption 3 4 5 6 OK OK Cancel Stop Retry Ignore Yes No Cancel Yes No Retry Cancel 0 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 The arguments of this function support three pattern calls in total. Arguments 1 and 2 are required. Arguments 3, 4, and 5 can be omitted. The following rules apply when you omit arguments. Table 3.1.4.6 (e) List of Argument Conditions Used pattern Argument 1 Argument 2 Argument 3 Argument 4 Argument 5 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Omitted Specified Specified Specified Omitted Omitted Specified Specified Omitted Omitted Omitted Specified Specify arguments using one of used patterns 1 to 4. (" ") can be entered when you do not specify the body, title, and script number. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Drawing specifications Drawing number 3.1.4.7 97/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== The message box is drawn at the forefront of the custom screen when the MsgBoxShow function is called. When a button in the displayed message box (including an allocated shortcut key) is pressed, the message box closes (end of operation). 3.1.4.8 Messages The specific messages displayed when setting this control are shown below. Table 3.1.4.8 (a) List of Messages Cause Timing Message How to address the error There is no folder that contains Xml for the MessageBox template. The Figure folder does not contain FPMsgIcon.fig on the standard monitor. The FigureEx folder does not contain FPMsgIcon.fig in the iHMI mode. FigureEx/img does not contain png for icon in the iHMI mode. During generation of MEM file Failed to create the MessageBox file. During generation of MEM file Failed to open the FPMsgIcon.fig file. During generation of MEM file Failed to open the FPMsgIcon.fig file. During generation of MEM file An error occurred while the HMBICN00.png file was being compressed. File reading error. (Image files are HMBICN00.png to HMBICN03.png.) Files required to execute the application cannot be found. Reinstall the application. Files required to execute the application cannot be found. Reinstall the application. Files required to execute the application cannot be found. Reinstall the application. Files required to execute the application cannot be found. Reinstall the application. 3.1.5 Combo Box Control 3.1.5.1 Function The combo box control lists registered items from which the user can select only one option. When you select a combo box in the normal mode, the item list is displayed. When the list of registered items pops up at the center of the screen, the items can be selected. The selected item is displayed in the combo box in the normal mode. 3.1.5.2 Diagram Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Normal mode (combo box non-operation mode) The minimum size is as follows. Width: Width of one double-byte character + Width of button Height: Height of row (setting value) Strings are displayed up to the number of characters that can be displayed. The part after the number of characters that can be displayed is not displayed. (1) The horizontal scroll bar is not displayed. (2) The button next to the string is a square with the same height as the string. 98/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (3) The selected item is displayed. Specify the initially displayed item in Property. Blank is displayed if the item list is not set up. The combo box operation mode cannot be switched. *-1 is set to the status management PMC. If an invalid value is set to the item list, the first item in the item list is initially displayed. AAAAAA Fig. 3.1.5.2 (a) Image of a Combo Box in Normal Mode List mode (combo box operation mode) The minimum size is as follows. Width: Fixed to 200 Height: (Height of row (setting value) x 2) + Outer frame (fixed) Strings are displayed up to the number of characters that can be displayed. The part after the number of characters that can be displayed is not displayed. (1) The vertical scroll bar is displayed if the number of items that can be registered is larger than the number of displayed rows or if you select to display the scroll bar in Property. (2) The horizontal scroll bar is not displayed. (3) The up and down buttons on the scroll bar are square with the same height as the row. AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBB CCC DDDD EEEEEE Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.5.2 (b) Conceptual Image of a Combo Box in List Mode 99/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.5.2 (c) Conceptual Image of Combo Boxes with the Minimum Setting, Normal Mode (Left) and List Mode (Right) Fig. 3.1.5.2 (d) Conceptual Image of Combo Boxes with the Maximum Setting, Normal Mode (Left) and List Mode (Right) 3.1.5.3 Icon design The following icon is displayed on the toolbar. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.5.3 (a) Icon Design 100/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.5.4 Operation Status management Specify the first PMC address to synchronize the item selection status in the combo box with the PMC. Item indices are allocated from the address in order. The system reserves 2 bytes as the status management area. NOTE The item index value specified in the status management PMC signal exceeds the number of items that can be registered, the value of PMC memory is cleared and the first item is selected. Operation Once the combo box operation mode is enabled, you can operate the combo box. When the combo box operation mode is enabled, the list of registered items pops up at the center of the screen. End the combo box operation mode before operating other controls. Tap outside the item list pop-up or press the <INPUT> key to end the combo box operation mode and close the item list pop-up. When you end the mode after selecting an item, the selected item is applied to the combo box. (1) To start the combo box operation mode (a) Move the focus using the MDI key to select the combo box and press the operation mode switch key to change the combo box to the operation mode. The user sets any desired operation mode switch key on the project setting screen. For details, refer to "Changes to the project settings screen" in "Common setting items." (b) When you can click the combo box with the mouse or touch it on the screen, click or touch the combo box to directly start the combo box operation mode. (2) To end the combo box operation mode (a) Tap outside the item list pop-up or press the <INPUT> key in the combo box operation mode to end the combo box operation mode. After that, you can move the focus to another control with the MDI key. (3) Transition of the operation mode Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Procedure 1 (when moving the focus with the MDI key) (i) Move the focus to the combo box by using the MDI key. (ii) To switch to the combo box operation mode, press the operation mode switch key. (iii) You can operate the combo box when the item list pop-up appears. (iv) End the combo box operation mode with the <INPUT> key. (v) Switch the focus to another control by using the MDI key. Drawing number (a) 101/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== MDI key MDI key Focus on another control MDI key MDI key Combo box Focus Combo box Non-operation mode Operation mode switch key Combo box operation mode <INPUT> key MDI key MDI key Focus on another control MDI key MDI key Fig. 3.1.5.4 (a) Operation Mode Transition Diagram (b) Procedure 2 (clicking the combo box with the mouse or touching it on the touch panel) (i) Touch the combo box to start the combo box operation mode. (ii) To end the combo box operation mode, touch an item or touch outside the item list pop-up. (4) Key operations The keys that can be used in each status of the combo box are shown below. Table 3.1.5.4 (a) Mode Transition List Status Focus on the combo box Combo box The combo box operation mode is enabled. The combo box operation mode is enabled. Up button - - Down button - - Item row - - Edition Date Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge - Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Operation mode The focus is moved to the row above the current one. The focus is moved to the row below the current one. Another item is selected. Then, the combo box non-operation mode is enabled. Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Created Non-operation mode Drawing number Mouse or touch screen operation Focus on another control 102/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Status Focus on the combo box Key operations Focus on another control Non-operation mode Outside the combo box - The focus is removed from the combo box. <Up> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <Dn> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <Right> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <Left> key The focus is moved. The focus is moved. <PgUp> key - - <PgDn> key - - <INPUT> key - - Operation mode The combo box non-operation mode is enabled. The focus is moved to the row above the current one. The focus is moved to the row below the current one. The previous page is displayed. The next page is displayed. Another item is selected. Then, the combo box non-operation mode is enabled. (5) Relationship between the item list and the combo box The first five items from the first display item in the combo box display are displayed in the item list. (For the conceptual image, refer to the list box control diagram titled "Item List and Display.") (6) Position of the gauge on the scroll bar For details, refer to "(6) Position of the gauge on the scroll bar" in "3.1.3 List Box Control." (7) Operation of the Up button or <Up> key For details, refer to "(7) Operation of the Up button or <Up> key" in "3.1.3 List Box Control." (8) Operation of the Down button or <Dn> key For details, refer to "(8) Operation of the Down button or <Dn> key" in "3.1.3 List Box Control." (9) Operation of the <PgUp> key For details, refer to "(9) Operation of the <PgUp> key" in "3.1.3 List Box Control." (10) Operation of the <PgDn> key For details, refer to "(10) Operation of the <PgDn> key" in "3.1.3 List Box Control." (11) Switch of the selected item This section describes how to switch the selected item in the item list. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Switching the selected item with the <INPUT> key (i) Use the <PgUp> or <PgDn> and <Up> or <Dn> keys to move the focus row to the item you want to select. (ii) Press the <INPUT> key in this state to select the item in the focus row. (If an item is already selected, the currently selected item is deselected.) Drawing number (a) 103/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (iii) After you press the <INPUT> key, the combo box non-operation mode is enabled and the pop-up closes. (If an item is selected when the combo box non-operation mode is enabled, it is displayed in the combo box.) When the "Don't move the focus to the next control after inputting data." property is disabled, the focus moves to the next control. (b) Switching the selection status by clicking the mouse or touching the screen (i) When you select the item row you want to select by left-clicking it with the mouse or touching it on the screen, the focus moves to the row of the touched item and that item is selected. (If the focus is already on that row, the item is selected and the focus remains there. If an item is already selected, the currently selected item is deselected.) (ii) After you touch the item row, the combo box non-operation mode is enabled and the pop-up closes. (If an item is selected when the combo box non-operation mode is enabled, it is displayed in the combo box.) (c) Cancellation by touching outside the frame (i) Left-click outside the pop-up frame with the mouse or touch the screen to change the combo box to the non-operation mode without switching the selected item and close the pop-up. The items displayed in the combo box remain unchanged. (12) Memory clear When the memory clear setting on the screen configuration control parent screen tab is set to ON, the selection status in the combo box is cleared and returns to the initial status when you switch the screen. (13) Addition and deletion in the item list in the combo box You can add and delete items via Ruby scripts. However, items can no longer be added once the number of items that can be registered is reached. (14) Addition of items For details, refer to "Addition of items" in List Box Control. When the number of items in the item list changes from 0 to 1, the combo box displays the added item. Then, you can switch the combo box operation mode. (15) Deletion of items When you delete an item, all the items in the item list are deselected. When the number of items in the item list changes to 0, the combo box is blank and you can no longer switch the combo box operation mode. When the item list contains one or more items, the combo box displays the first item in the item list. (For the conceptual image of deletion, refer to the list box control image titled "Conceptual Image of Item Deletion".) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Multi-language display switching When switching the display languages using the multi-language function, if the item position selected before switching does not exist after switching, the status management PMC signal is to be cleared to zero, and the selected state of the control is to be the first item. 104/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.5.5 Properties This section describes the properties of combo box control. Overall configuration The properties of combo box control are displayed on the following tabs. Table 3.1.5.5 (a) List of Tabs Tab name Settings General Text Action Focus Image NoAction Image Interlock Image Used to specify the position and size of the combo box. Used to set up the caption. Used to manage and register items. Used to specify the focus number and how to move the focus. Normally used to specify color information. Used to specify color information when the disable signal is issued. Used to specify color information when the interlock is engaged. [General] tab Fig. 3.1.5.5 (a) Properties Page - [General] Tab Table 3.1.5.5 (b) List of Properties on the [General] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Setting item Remarks Fixed value FPComboBoxX - X is automatically entered. (User entry is not allowed.) X User entry Numerical value - Y User entry Numerical value - Specify a value smaller than the screen size. Specify a value smaller than the screen size. Width Height User entry Entry not allowed. Numerical value Numerical value - Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Object ID 105/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks (Automatically adjusted.*) *This value is automatically set based on the row height. [Character] tab Fig. 3.1.5.5 (b) Properties Page - [Character] Tab (Left: Standard Monitor mode, Right: iHMI mode) Table 3.1.5.5 (c) List of Properties on the [Character] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Setting item Any Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Character Color Focused Color Interlock Color Selected Color Unselected Color Palette Color selection Black Select a language key from those registered under project settings. Select the character type. When using the multi-language key in the iHMI mode, specify the character type for each key that can be specified with the [Multi-language key]. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Palette Palette Palette Palette Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Black Black Black Black Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Drawing number 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name Selection 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 First candidate ANK Remarks Multi-language key Character Type 106/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Action] tab Fig. 3.1.5.5 (c) Properties Page - [Action] Tab Table 3.1.5.5 (d) List of Properties on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item NoAction Check box ON/OFF OFF When you select this check box, [NoAction Image] is enabled. Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate Numerical value 0 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF The system reserves a 2-byte area within the start area. The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. Status management PMC PMC Path Selection Start Area Selection Start Address User entry First candidate This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF Symbol Check box ON/OFF OFF Symbol selection Entry or selection Any Blank Interlock Check box ON/OFF OFF PMC Path Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate InterlockPMCArea Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Interlock Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF 107/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification InterlockPMCAddress User entry Numerical value Initial value 0 Remarks The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: OFF InterlockPMCBit Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate Symbol Check box ON/OFF OFF Symbol selection Entry or selection Any Blank This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Interlock]: ON [Symbol]: ON File Name User entry Any Blank Specify the Itemxml file. Registrable Items User entry Numerical value 1 The allowed range is between 1 and 2048. Display Item Count User entry Numerical value 2 The allowed range is between 2 and 10. Default Item is acquired from PMC (*) Check box ON/OFF OFF User entry Numerical value 0 Check when getting the index of the item to be initially displayed from the [Status Management] PMC signal. When setting ON, with the PMC signal, and when setting OFF, with the [Default item] setting value, the control display item is set. Specify the index of the initially displayed item. The allowed range is between 0 and 2047. When you switch the screen with the memory for the screen configuration set to clear, the last display state is discarded and the screen appears according to this setting. Item * Edition 9.9 or later Default Item Row Height User entry Numerical value 16 Scroll Display Check box ON/OFF ON <Edition 9.9 or later> If [Default Item is acquired from PMC] is ON, input is disabled. The allowed range is from the height of ANK (16 in the standard machine, 12 in the iHMI mode) to 64. ON: Always displayed. OFF: Displayed when the value in [Registrable Items] is larger than that in [Display Item Count]. File edit screen Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For details, refer to "File edit screen" in "3.1.3 List Box Control." 108/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Focus] tab Fig. 3.1.5.5 (d) Properties Page - [Focus] Tab Entry type Table 3.1.5.5 (e) List of Properties on the [Focus] Tab Specification Initial value Remarks Focus is available Check box ON/OFF OFF Index User entry 1 Don't move the focus to the next control after inputting data. Appoint movement index Check box Numerical value ON/OFF Check box ON/OFF OFF UP key User entry 0 LEFT key User entry 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. RIGHT key User entry 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. DOWN key User entry Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Select this check box to directly specify the index that you want to move the focus to. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. 0 Specify the index that you want to move the focus to. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 OFF Select this check box to use the focus. When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Specify a number that is not already used on the screen (form). Select this check box to avoid consecutive entry. Drawing number Setting item 109/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Image] tab Fig. 3.1.5.5 (e) Properties Page - [Image] Tab Entry type Table 3.1.5.5 (f) List of Properties on the [Image] Tab Specification Initial value Remarks Back Color Palette Color selection Gray Focused Back Color Palette Color selection Yellow Border Color Palette Color selection Black Button On Color Palette Color selection White Button Off Color Palette Color selection Gray Button Color Palette Color selection Black PopUp Back Color Selected Back Color Palette Color selection Gray Palette Color selection Blue 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 Name FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Created Person in charge Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the down (or up and down) arrow marks. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the down (or up and down) arrow marks. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the down (or up and down) arrow marks. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to the list mode. Drawing number Setting item 110/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Palette Color selection Gray Palette Color selection Black Scrollbar Color Palette Color selection Black Display Selection Status Check box ON/OFF OFF Focus Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF Remarks Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to both the normal mode and the list mode. Select a color from the color selection dialog. This setting item applies to the list mode. This item cannot be set with the following settings. Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Pattern 3 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON This item cannot be set with the following settings. Pattern 1 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON Pattern 2 [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON Pattern 3 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON [NoAction Image] tab Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Properties Page - [NoAction Image] Tab Drawing number Fig. 3.1.5.5 (f) 111/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.5.5 (g) List of Properties on the [NoAction Image] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks NoAction Signal Check box ON/OFF OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction]: ON When you select this check box, the items below it are enabled. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Back Color Border Color Palette Palette Color selection Color selection Gray Black Button Caption Back Color Palette Color selection Dark gray (128.128.128) Button Color Palette Color selection Black Button Border Color PMC Path Palette Color selection Black Selection First candidate PMC Area Selection PMC Address User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Any Symbol Check box Symbol selection Entry or selection Check Timing Selection Preview Check box 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created First candidate 0 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." ON/OFF First candidate Any Blank 0: Power On 1: Always ON/OFF OFF 2018.11.13 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: ON Specify when the disable signal is checked. OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Select a symbol from those registered in the PMC symbol list. 0: Power On Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF Name Selection This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF This setting item is enabled with the following settings: [Symbol]: OFF The allowed range is between 0 and 99999. Drawing number PMC Bit Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the down arrow mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the down arrow mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item 112/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Interlock Image] tab Fig. 3.1.5.5 (g) Properties Page - [Interlock Image] Tab Table 3.1.5.5 (h) List of Properties on the [Interlock Image] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Check box Palette Palette ON/OFF Color selection Color selection OFF Gray Black Button Caption Back Color Palette Color selection Dark gray (128.128.128) Button Color Palette Color selection Black Button Border Color Without caption Palette Color selection Black Check box ON/OFF OFF Preview Check box ON/OFF OFF Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 This setting item is enabled with the following settings: Pattern 1 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON Pattern 2 [Interlock] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction] on the [Action] tab: ON [NoAction Signal] on the [NoAction Image] tab: ON [Preview] on the [NoAction Image] tab: OFF [Display] on the [Interlock Image] tab: ON Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the background color for the down arrow mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Specify the color of the down arrow mark. Select a color from the color selection dialog. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item Display Back Color Border Color 113/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.5.6 List display The setting items that can be edited in the list display are shown in "Table 3.1.5.6 (a) List of Properties in the List Display." The setting tabs and setting items are the corresponding tab and item names on the Property screen. For details about the item display conditions, refer to "Table 3.1.5.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions." Table 3.1.5.6 (a) List of Properties in the List Display Setting item General General General General Text Text Object ID Tab index Comment X Y Width Multi-language key Character Type Character Type (1) Text Character Type Character Type (2) Text Character Type Character Type (3) Text Character Type Character Type (4) Text Character Type Character Type (5) Text Character Type Character Type (6) Text Character Type Character Type (7) Text Character Type Character Type (8) Text Character Type Character Type (9) Text Character Type Character Type (10) Text Character Type Character Type (11) Text Character Type Character Type (12) Text Character Type Character Type (13) Text Character Type Character Type (14) Text Character Type Character Type (15) Text Character Type 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Any Any Multi-language key No. - 1 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.1 No.19 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 No.20 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Object ID Tab index Comment X Y Width Multi-language key Character Type Specification Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 114/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Setting item Specification Character Type (16) Text Character Type Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Character Type (17) Text Character Type Character Type (18) Text Character Type Character Type (19) Text Character Type Character Type (20) Text Character Type Caption Color Text Focus caption Color Text Lock Color Text Selected Color Text Unselected Color Text No action File name Number of Registrable Items Display Item Count Default Item is acquired from PMC(*) Action Action Action Normal Mode - Character Color Normal Mode - Focus Color Normal Mode Interlock Color List Mode Selected Color List Mode Unselected Color NoAction File Name Registrable Items Action Action Display Item Count Default Item is acquired from PMC Action Default Item Row Height Scroll Display Status Management Start Symbol Flag Status Management Start Symbol Status Management Start PMC Action Action Action Row Height Scroll Display Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Interlock Interlock signal symbol flag Interlock signal symbol Interlock signal Action Action PMC Path Start Area Start Address Interlock Symbol Action Symbol selection Action - 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 No.20 No.20 0: OFF 1: ON No.2 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON No.3 No.4 No.5 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No.6 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No.20 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON PMC Path InterlockPMCArea InterlockPMCAddress InterlockPMCBit Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 No.20 <Edition 9.9 or later> No.21 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 No.20 0: OFF 1: ON Drawing number * Edition 9.9 or later Default Item Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item name 115/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Interlock Image Focus Focus Focus Display 0: OFF 1: ON Item display conditions Back Color No.7 No.8 No.9 Border Color No.9 Button Caption - Back Color Button Color No.9 Button Border Color No.9 No.9 Without caption 0: OFF 1: ON No.9 Preview 0: OFF 1: ON No.10 0: OFF 1: ON Any (The initial value is 0.) 0: OFF 1: ON No.17 No.17 0: OFF 1: ON Any (The initial value is 0.) Any (The initial value is 0.) Any (The initial value is 0.) Any (The initial value is 0.) No.17 No.18 No.18 No.18 No.18 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON No.11 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.14 No.14 NoAction Image NoAction Image Focus is available Index Don't move the focus to the next control after inputting data. Appoint movement index <UP> Key <DOWN> Key <LEFT> Key <RIGHT> Key Back Color Focused Back Color Border Color Button On Color Button Off Color Button Color PopUp Back Color Selected Back Color Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Scrollbar Color Display Selection Status Focus Preview NoAction Signal Border Color Back Color Button Caption - Back Color Button Color Button Border Color NoAction Image Symbol 0: OFF 1: ON NoAction Image Symbol selection Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image NoAction Image NoAction Image NoAction Image NoAction Image Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Specification No.15 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No.14 No.14 No.16 Name Interlock image display Interlock Back Color Interlock Border Color Interlock Button Back Color Interlock Button Color Interlock Button Border Color Without caption at interlock. Interlock preview Focus is available Number of focus index Don't move focus to the next control after data input operation. Appoint movement index Focusing up Focusing down Focusing left Focusing right Background Color Focused Back Color Border Color Button On Color Button Off Color Button Color PopUp Back Color Selected Back Color Scroll Back Color Scroll Border Color Scrollbar Color Display Selection Status Display Focused Status No action Signal No action Border Color No action Back Color No action Button Back Color No action Button Color No action Button Border Color No action signal symbol flag No action signal symbol Setting item Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Settings tab Drawing number Item name 116/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item name Settings tab Setting item No action signal PMC NoAction Image No action signal preview NoAction Image PMC Path PMC Area PMC Address PMC Bit Preview 4 Interlock: ON 5 Interlock: ON Interlock signal symbol flag: ON Interlock: ON Interlock signal symbol flag: OFF Interlock: ON NoAction: OFF Interlock: ON NoAction: ON NoAction Signal: ON Interlock image display: ON 9 13 Interlock image display: ON Preview of disabled status: OFF Focus Preview: OFF Preview of disabled status: OFF Interlock preview: OFF Display Selection Status: OFF Preview of disabled status: OFF Interlock preview: OFF NoAction: ON 14 NoAction Signal: ON 15 NoAction Signal: ON NoAction Signal Symbol Flag: ON NoAction Signal: ON NoAction Signal Symbol Flag: OFF [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 Edition Date Created [Focus is available] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Focus move rules] on the [Focus] tab: ON [Use the multi-language character type function] (project settings): OFF Edit mode: iHMI [Use the multi-language display function] (project settings): ON [Use the multi-language character type function] (project settings): ON Edit mode: iHMI <Edition 9.9 or later> [Default Item is acquired from PMC]: OFF Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 11 Drawing number 10 No.14 Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 8 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 0: OFF 1: ON 2 3 7 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." [Use the multi-language display function] (project settings): ON Edit mode: iHMI Symbol flag: ON Symbol flag: OFF 6 Item display conditions Table 3.1.5.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions Display condition No. 1 Specification 117/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.1.5.7 Batch editing You can display the setting items on each tab. The property names are the same as those in the list display. <Edition 9.9 or later > For the setting values when [Default Item is acquired from PMC] is set in batch editing, see "Table 3.1.5.7 (a) Values in [Default Item is acquired from PMC] in the batch editing screen". Table 3.1.5.7 (a) Values in [Default Item is acquired from PMC] in the batch editing screen Default Item is acquired from PMC Value to set OFF ON 0 1 NOTE The output result of the property list output by the screen bitmap batch output function is also the same as the setting value of “Table 3.1.5.7(a) Values in [Default Item is acquired from PMC] in the batch editing screen” in the above table. 3.1.5.8 Message There is no specific message displayed when setting this control. 3.1.6 Pie Graph Control 3.1.6.1 Function The pie graph control acquires data from the PMC register or P-CODE macro variable and displays the component ratio of up to eight data items in a pie graph. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Diagram Drawing number 3.1.6.2 118/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.6.2 (a) Display Image of Pie Graph Controls (Left: without Scale, Right: with Scale) The graph title, description of data, scale numbers and other items are not displayed on the pie graph control. To display these items, use a label or other control. 3.1.6.3 Icon design The following icon is displayed on the toolbar. Fig. 3.1.6.3 (a) Icon Design 3.1.6.4 Operation Data display The component ratio of specified data items is calculated and a pie graph is drawn. Data items 1 to 8 are displayed clockwise in the specified order. Select whether to read data from the PMC signal or the P-CODE macro variable. - If the specified data value is less than 0, that data is treated as 0. If the data value is 0, that data is not displayed in the graph. If all the data values are 0, only the outer frame of the pie graph is displayed. Fig. 3.1.6.4 (a) Display Example of When the Component Ratio Cannot Be Displayed Update The timings with which the graph display is updated and data is written are adjusted using the following two signals. Display request signal Display response signal Allocate any desired PMC signal or P-CODE macro variable to the above signals. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The flow of data writing and updating the display is as follows. 119/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1. 2. 3. 4. Data is written when the value of the display request signal matches that of the display response signal. After data writing is complete, the display request signal is inverted so that the display response signal does not match the display request signal. The pie graph control monitors the display request signal and display response signal and updates the display when their values are different. After the display is updated, the pie graph control inverts the display response signal to match it to the display request signal. The flow from 1 to 4 is shown in Fig. 3.1.6.4 (b). F Fig. 3.1.6.4 (b) Flow of Display Update NOTE The display is not updated if the drawing update speed of the FANUC PICTURE driver is exceeded. 3.1.6.5 Properties This section describes the properties of pie graph control. Overall configurationThe properties of pie graph control are displayed on the following tabs. Table 3.1.6.5 (a) List of Tabs Settings Tab name Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Used to specify the position and size of the control. Used to specify the display format of the pie graph. Used to specify the color information of the pie graph. Drawing number General Action Image 120/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [General] tab Fig. 3.1.6.5 (a) Properties Page - [General] Tab Table 3.1.6.5 (b) List of Properties on the [General] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Object ID Fixed value FPPieChartX - X Y Width Height User entry User entry User entry User entry Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value - Remarks X is automatically entered. (User entry is not allowed.) [Action] tab Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Properties Page - [Action] Tab (Left Figure: PMC, Right Figure: P-CODE Macro Variable) Drawing number Fig. 3.1.6.5 (b) 121/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== How to specify display data is described below. Individual Edit You can specify the PMC signal or P-CODE macro variable saved as display data for each data item. Batch Edit You can specify consecutive areas by specifying the first address or the first variable number of the areas saved as display data. Example) When specifying 5 as the number of data items, D100 as the first address, and 2 bytes as the data type The area from D100 to D109 (2 × 5 bytes) is reserved as the storage area. Table 3.1.6.5 (c) List of Common Properties on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item Data Kind Selection 0: PMC 1: P-CODE macro variable 0: PMC Other setting items on the tab are switched depending on the setting value in [Data Kind]. (Refer to "Fig. 3.1.6.5 (b) Properties Page [Action] Tab.") Specify whether to use a data calculation script. Script Check box ON / OFF OFF Script entry User entry Any Blank Individual Edit Selection ON/OFF ON Exclusive of Batch Edit. Batch Edit Selection ON/OFF OFF Exclusive of Individual Edit. Data 1 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 1 Data 2 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 2 Data 3 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 3 Data 4 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 4 Data 5 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 5 Data 6 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 6 Data 7 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 7 Data 8 Palette Color specification Red Display color for Data 8 Table 3.1.6.5 (d) List of Properties in Display Request Signal on the [Action] Tab Specification PMC Path Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. PMC Area Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Address User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value 0 Bit Selection 0 –7 0 Symbol Check box ON / OFF OFF Symbol selection Variable Number Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Remarks Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Created Person in charge Initial value Name Entry type Drawing number Setting item 122/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.6.5 (e) List of Properties in Display Response Signal on the [Action] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks PMC Path Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. PMC Area Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Address User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value 0 Bit Selection 0 –7 0 Symbol Check box ON / OFF OFF Symbol selection Variable Number Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. Table 3.1.6.5 (f) List of Properties for Individual Edit on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item Data: Use this Data. Selection Check box Data 1 to Data 8 ON / OFF Data 1 OFF PMC Path Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate PMC Area Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate Address User entry Numerical value 0 Data Type Selection 0: 1 byte Symbol Check box 0: 1 byte 1: 2 byte 2: 4 byte ON / OFF Symbol selection Variable Number Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 Select the data you want to edit. Select this check box to use the data in the pie graph. Select the PMC path that contains the selected data. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Select the PMC area that contains the selected data. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Enter the PMC address for the selected data. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. OFF This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. Table 3.1.6.5 (g) List of Properties for Batch Edit on the [Action] Tab Entry type Selection 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 Remarks Name Select the first address (variable number). FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Initial value 1 Drawing number Specification 1 –8 Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item Number of Data: 123/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value PMC Path Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate PMC Area Selection Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." First candidate Address User entry Numerical value 0 Data Type Selection 0: 1 byte Symbol Check box 0: 1 byte 1: 2 byte 2: 4 byte ON / OFF Symbol selection Variable Number Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 Remarks Select the PMC path for the first address of [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Select the PMC path for the first address of [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Select the PMC path for the first address of [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. OFF This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Select the first variable number for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE The PMC address and variable number of each data setting is controlled as follows. Batch Edit 99999 (maximum PMC address) - ("Number of data items" × "Data type" byte count) 89999 (maximum variable number) - ("Number of data items") 124/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Image] tab Fig. 3.1.6.5 (c) Properties Page - [Image] Tab Table 3.1.6.5 (h) List of Properties on the [Image] Tab Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Image File Name User entry Any FPPieChart.fig Style Number of ticks per division Back Color Selection User entry Any Any 0: XXXX 10 Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the pie graph. Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Palette Gray Border Color Palette Graduations Back Color Graduations Color Palette Color specification Color specification Color specification Color selection 3.1.6.6 Palette Select the background color for the control from the pallet. Select the color of the outer frame of the pie graph from the pallet. Dark gray White Black List display The setting items that can be edited in the list display are shown below. The setting tabs and setting items are the corresponding tab and item names on the Property screen. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For details about the item display conditions, refer to "Table 3.1.6.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions." 125/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.1.6.6 (a) List of Properties in the List Display Settings tab Setting item Specification Item display conditions Object ID Tab index Comment X Y Width Height Data Kind General General General General General Action Object ID X Y Width Height Data Kind Use Script Script Display Request symbol flag Display Request symbol Display Request PMC Action Action Action Script Script entry Symbol Action Action Display Request variable Number Display Response symbol flag Display Response symbol Display Response PMC Action Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection No. 6 Action No. 7 Display Response Variable Number Setting method Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit Variable Number Batch Edit Number of Data Batch Edit Symbol flag Batch Edit Symbol Batch Edit PMC Action Batch Edit Data Type 0: PMC 1: P-CODE macro variable 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON - No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 0: OFF 1: ON No. 2 No. 5 Individual Edit Batch Edit Number of Data Individual Edit Batch Edit 0 –8 - 0: OFF No. 9 No. 10 No. 11 Action Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Batch Edit Variable Number Use Data 1. Action Variable Number Action Data 1 symbol flag Data 1 symbol Action Action Data 1 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 No. 8 No. 9 No. 12 0: OFF 1: ON No. 13 0: OFF 1: ON No. 14 No. 15 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Any Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Action Action Action Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Action Any Any Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item name 126/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Data 1 PMC Action Data 1 Data Type Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 1 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 2. Action Data 2 Symbol flag Data 2 Symbol Data 2 PMC Action Action Action Data 2 Data Type Action Data 2 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 2 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 3. Action Data 3 Symbol flag Data 3 Symbol Data 3 PMC Action Action Action Data 3 Data Type Action Data 3 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 3 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 4. Action Data 4 Symbol flag Data 4 Symbol Data 4 PMC Action Action Action Data 4 Data Type Action Data 4 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 4 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 5. Action Data 5 Symbol flag Action Data 5 Use this Data. Symbol 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Item display conditions Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON No. 16 0: OFF No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON No. 14 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 No. 14 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 No. 14 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Specification Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Setting item Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 127/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Action Action Data 5 Data Type Action Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 5 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 6. Action Data 6 Symbol flag Data 6 Symbol Data 6 PMC Action Action Action Data 6 Data Type Action Data 6 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 6 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 7. Action Data 7 Symbol flag Data 7 Symbol Data 7 PMC Action Action Action Data 7 Data Type Action Data 7 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 7 Variable Number Action Variable Number Use Data 8. Action Data 8 Symbol flag Data 8 Symbol Data 8 PMC Action Action Action Data 8 Data Type Action Data 8 Use this Data. Symbol Symbol selection PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Data 8 Variable Number Action Variable Number Data 1 Color Data 2 Color Action Action Color: Data 1 Color: Data 2 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 0: OFF 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 No. 16 No. 14 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 No. 14 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 No. 16 No. 17 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 No. 14 No. 17 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0: OFF 1: ON Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Data 5 Symbol Data 5 PMC Specification Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 128/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Color: Data 3 Color: Data 4 Color: Data 5 Color: Data 6 Color: Data 7 Color: Data 8 Image File Name Style Number of ticks per division - Image Image Image Image Back Color Border Color Graduations Back Color Graduations Color - Table 3.1.6.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions Display condition 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Flag for script use: ON Data Kind: PMC Data Kind: PMC Display request signal symbol flag: ON Data Kind: PMC Display request signal symbol flag: OFF Data Kind: P-CODE macro variable Data Kind: PMC Display response signal symbol flag: ON Data Kind: PMC Display response signal symbol flag: OFF Batch Edit: ON Data Kind: PMC Batch Edit: ON Data Kind: PMC Batch Edit: ON Data symbol flag: ON Data Kind: PMC Batch Edit: ON Data symbol flag: OFF Data Kind: P-CODE macro variable Batch Edit: ON Individual Edit: ON Data Kind: PMC Individual Edit: ON Use Data n.: ON (n: 1 to 8) Data Kind: PMC Individual Edit: ON Use Data n.: ON (n: 1 to 8) Data n symbol flag: ON (n: 1 to 8) Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 4 Item display conditions Action Action Action Action Action Action Image Image Image No. 1 2 3 Specification Name Data 3 Color Data 4 Color Data 5 Color Data 6 Color Data 7 Color Data 8 Color Image file name Style Number of tics per division Background Color Border Color Graduations Back Color Graduations Color Setting item Drawing number Item name 129/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== No. Display condition 16 Data Kind: PMC Individual Edit: ON Use Data n.: ON (n: 1 to 8) Data n symbol flag: OFF (n: 1 to 8) Data Kind: P-CODE macro variable Individual Edit: ON Use Data n.: ON (n: 1 to 8) 17 3.1.6.7 Batch editing The same items as those in the list display can be specified. 3.1.6.8 List of messages There is no specific message displayed when setting this control. 3.1.7 Extended bar graph control 3.1.7.1 Function This control acquires data from the PMC register or P-CODE macro variable and displays multiple data items in a bar graph. 3.1.7.2 Diagram The graph width is automatically calculated from the control width and display interval. If the display area cannot be ensured, the graph is not displayed. The coordinate axes of the extended bar graph control can be displayed inside or outside the graph. Vertical or horizontal can be selected for the display orientation of the bar graph. The scale is displayed along the vertical axis in the vertical display and along the horizontal axis in the horizontal display. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The graph title, description of data, scale numbers and other items are not displayed on the extended bar graph control. To display these items, use a label or other control. 130/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.1.7.2 (a) Display Image of Extended Bar Graph Controls (Left: When the Coordinate Axes Are Displayed Inside, Right: When the Coordinate Axes Are Displayed Outside) 3.1.7.3 Icon design The following icon is displayed on the toolbar. Fig. 3.1.7.3 (a) Icon Design (Left: Existing Graph Control, Right: Bar Graph Control) 3.1.7.4 Operation Data display - The data display method can be selected from the set display and the stacked display. In the set display, data in each category is displayed next to each other. In the stacked display, data is stacked in the positive direction along the coordinate axis from series 1 in each category. Negative data is not displayed in the stacked display. Category Series 3 Series 2 Select whether to read data from the PMC signal or the P-CODE macro variable. The bar graph data consists of series and categories. Up 32 data items (the number of series × the number of categories) can be displayed. Up to eight series can be specified. Series 1 - Series 3 Series 2 Series 1 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.1.7.4 (a) Display Methods of Extended Bar Graph Control (Left: Set Display, Right: Stacked Display) 131/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== - The graph is displayed showing the minimum value at the bottom of the axis and the maximum value at the top of the axis. Data below the minimum value is not displayed. When the display method is stacked display, the minimum value is 0. Update Set the following two signals to adjust the timings with which the graph display is updated and data is written. Display request signal Display response signal Allocate any desired PMC signal or P-CODE macro variable to the above signals. The flow of data writing and updating the display is as follows. 1. Data is written when the value of the display request signal matches that of the display response signal. 2. After data writing is complete, the display request signal is inverted so that the display response signal does not match the display request signal. 3. The bar graph control monitors the display request signal and display response signal and updates the display when their values are different. 4. After the display is updated, the bar graph control inverts the display response signal to match it to the display request signal. The flow from 1 to 4 is shown below. Display demand signal Display response signal Fig. 3.1.7.4 (b) Flow of Display Update NOTE The display is not updated if the drawing update speed of the FANUC PICTURE driver is exceeded. 3.1.7.5 Properties This section describes the properties of extended bar graph control. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Overall configurationThe properties of extended bar graph control are displayed on the following tabs. 132/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Tab name Table 3.1.7.5 (a) List of Tabs Settings General Action Data Color Image Used to specify the position and size of the control. Used to specify the display format of a bar graph. Used to specify the color of data in a bar graph. Used to specify the color information of a bar graph. [General] tab Fig. 3.1.7.5 (a) Properties Page - [General] Tab Table 3.1.7.5 (b) List of Properties on the [General] Tab Initial value - X Y Width Height User entry User entry User entry User entry Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value - 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Remarks X is automatically entered. (User entry is not allowed.) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Specification FPBarChartX Name Entry type Fixed value Drawing number Setting item Object ID 133/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Action] tab Fig. 3.1.7.5 (b) Properties Page - [Action] Tab (Left Figure: PMC, Right Figure: P-CODE Macro Variable) How to specify display data is described below. Series Edit You can specify areas for the number of categories in batch by specifying the first PMC address or the first variable number of data. - Batch Edit You can specify consecutive areas that correspond to the product of the number of categories and the number of series by specifying the first address or the first variable number of the areas saved as display data. Example) When specifying 4 as the number of series, 3 as the number of categories, D100 as the first address, and 2 bytes as the data type The area from D100 to D123 (2 bytes × 12 (series x categories)) is reserved as the storage area. Areas for the categories are reserved in order from Series 1 without spaces. Specified address: D100 Series 1 Series 2 Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Series 3 Series 4 Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Fig. 3.1.7.5 (c) Conceptual Image of Reserving Areas When Editing Data in Batch Table 3.1.7.5 (c) List of Common Properties on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item 0: PMC Check box User entry 0: PMC 1: P-CODE macro variable 0: Set Display 1: Stacked Display ON / OFF Any Selection Script Script entry OFF Blank Specify whether to use a data calculation script. Series Edit Selection ON/OFF ON Exclusive of Batch Edit. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge 0: Set Display Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Display Method Other setting items on the tab change depending on this setting value. (Refer to "Fig. 3.1.7.5 (b) Properties Page - [Action] Tab.") Name Selection Drawing number Data Kind 134/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Batch Edit Selection Specification ON/OFF Initial value Remarks OFF Exclusive of Series Edit. Table 3.1.7.5 (d) List of Properties in Display Request Signal on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item PMC Path Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value PMC Area Selection Address 0 Bit Selection 0 –7 0 Symbol Check box ON / OFF OFF Symbol selection Variable Number Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. Table 3.1.7.5 (e) List of Properties in Display Response Signal on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item PMC Path Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. User entry Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Numerical value PMC Area Selection Address 0 Bit Selection 0 –7 0 Symbol Check box ON / OFF OFF Symbol selection Variable Number Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. Table 3.1.7.5 (f) List of Coordinate Axis Properties on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks User entry 0 –100 4 User entry 0 –250 100 Max. value User entry -2147483648 2147483647 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge 100 Name - Enter the graph display width as a ratio to the graph width. When you select [1: Stacked Display] for [Display Method], enter a value greater than 0. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Number of ticks per division Display Interval Drawing number Setting item 135/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Min. value User entry Specification -2147483648 2147483647 - Initial value Remarks 0 This setting item is editable only when [0: Set Display] is selected for [Display Method]. Table 3.1.7.5 (g) List of Display Data Properties on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item Series Count Category Count Selection Selection 1 –8 1 –32 1 1 You can select any value as long as the product of [Category Count] and [Series Count] does not exceed 32. When you change [Series Count] , the initial value is selected. Table 3.1.7.5 (h) List of Properties for Series Edit on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item 1 –8 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0 - 99999 1 First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. 0 0: 1 byte Check box 0: 1 byte 1: 2 byte 2: 4 byte ON / OFF This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Selection Any Blank User entry From 10000 to 89999 10000 Series PMC Path Selection Selection PMC Area Selection Address User entry Data Type Selection Symbol Symbol selection Variable Number OFF This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. Table 3.1.7.5 (i) List of Properties for Batch Edit on the [Action] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Setting item Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." 0 - 99999 First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Selection First candidate This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Address User entry 0 0: 1 byte Check box 0: 1 byte 1: 2 byte 2: 4 byte ON / OFF This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is displayed only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Data Type Selection Symbol Symbol selection Selection Any Blank 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 OFF FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. This setting item is editable only when [0: PMC] is selected for [Data Kind]. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page PMC Area Name Selection Drawing number PMC Path 136/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Variable Number User entry Specification From 10000 to 89999 Initial value Remarks 10000 This setting item is editable only when [1: P-CODE macro variable] is selected for [Data Kind]. NOTE The PMC address and variable number of each data setting is controlled as follows. - Series Edit 99999 (maximum PMC address) - ("Number of categories" × "Data type" byte count) 16000 (maximum variable number) - ("Number of categories") 89999 (maximum number) - "Number of categories" - Batch Edit 99999 (maximum PMC address) - ("Number of categories" × "Number of series" × "Data type" byte count) 89999 (maximum variable number) - ("Number of categories" × "Number of series") [Data Color] tab Fig. 3.1.7.5 (d) Properties Page - [Data Color] Tab Table 3.1.7.5 (j) List of Properties on the [Data Color] Tab Entry type Specification Initial value Remarks Edition Date Created Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Data display color for Series 1 Data display color for Series 2 Data display color for Series 3 Data display color for Series 4 Data display color for Series 5 Data display color for Series 6 Data display color for Series 7 Data display color for Series 8 Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Color selection Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Palette Palette Palette Palette Palette Palette Palette Palette Drawing number Setting item Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Series 4 Series 5 Series 6 Series 7 Series 8 137/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== - Sample display An image for eight series in one category is displayed. The settings in "Display Method" on the action tab and "Direction" on the [Image] tab are applied. [Image] tab Fig. 3.1.7.5 (e) Properties Page - [Image] Tab Table 3.1.7.5 (k) List of Properties on the [Image] Tab Setting item Entry type Initial value Remarks Image File Name User entry Any FPBarChart.fig Style Selection Any 0: XXXX Direction Selection 0: Vertical Back Color Graduations Back Color Graduations Color Palette Palette Palette 0: Vertical 1: Horizontal Color specification Color specification Color selection Specify the Fig file that describes the style of the bar graph. Select a style from those in the specified Fig file. Select the display direction of the bar graph. 3.1.7.6 Specification Blue Gray Black - List display The setting items that can be edited in the list display are shown below. The setting tabs and setting items are the corresponding tab and item names on the Property screen. For details about the item display conditions, refer to "Table 3.1.7.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions." Table 3.1.7.6 (a) List of Properties in the List Display 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created General - Object ID - Specification 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge - Any Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Object ID Tab index Setting item Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 138/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Settings tab Setting item Specification Item display conditions Comment X Y Width Height Data Kind General General General General Action X Y Width Height Data Kind Graph Display Method Script Used Flag Script Display Request symbol flag Display Request symbol Display Request PMC Action Display Method Action Script 0: PMC 1: P-CODE macro variable 0: Set Display 1: Stacked Display 0: OFF 1: ON Action Action Script entry Symbol 0: OFF Action Symbol selection No. 3 Action No. 4 Display Request Variable Number Display Response symbol flag Display Response symbol Display Response PMC Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection No. 6 Action No. 7 Display Response Variable Number Display data setting Number of tics per division Display Interval Max. value Min. value Category Count Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Bit Variable Number Edition Date Created Action Action Action Action 2018.11.13 No. 2 No. 5 0: Series Edit 1: Batch Edit 0 –100 - 0 –250 -2147483648 - 2147483647 -2147483648 - 2147483647 1 –n n is the maximum number for which the product of the number of series and the number of categories does not exceed 32. - - No. 8 - FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No. 1 No. 2 1: ON Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge - 1: ON Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Action - No. 5 0: OFF Series Edit Batch Edit Number of ticks per division Display Interval Max. value Min. value Category Count - Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Action Any Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item name 139/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item 1 –8 0: OFF Series Count Batch Edit Symbol flag Batch Edit Symbol Batch Edit First PMC Action Action Series Count Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Batch Edit Data Type Batch Edit First Variable Number Series 1 Symbol flag Series 1 Symbol Series 1 First PMC Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Series 1 Data Type Series 1 First Variable number Series 2 Symbol flag Series 2 Symbol Series 2 First PMC Series 2 Data Type Series 2 First Variable number Series 3 Symbol flag Series 3 Symbol Series 3 First PMC Series 3 Data Type Series 3 First variable number Series 4 Symbol flag 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Item display conditions 1: ON No. 9 No. 10 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 11 No. 9 Variable Number Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Any Action Symbol 0: OFF No. 13 Action Symbol selection Action Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol 1: ON Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON 2018.11.13 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON No. 16 No. 14 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON No. 16 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No. 16 No. 14 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge No. 12 No. 14 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Specification Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Settings tab Drawing number Item name 140/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Action Symbol selection Action Series 4 Data Type Series 4 First Variable number Series 5 Symbol flag Series 5 Symbol Series 5 First PMC Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Series 5 Data Type Series 5 First variable number Series 6 Symbol flag Series 6 Symbol Series 6 First PMC Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Series 6 Data Type Series 6 First Variable number Series 7 Symbol flag Series 7 Symbol Series 7 First PMC Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection Action Series 7 Data Type Series 7 First Variable number Series 8 Symbol flag Series 8 Symbol Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Action Symbol Action Symbol selection 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created No. 14 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON 2018.11.13 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON No. 16 No. 14 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON No. 16 No. 14 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 0: OFF No. 13 1: ON No. 16 No. 14 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge No. 16 No. 14 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge Item display conditions Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Series 4 Symbol Series 4 First PMC Specification Name Settings tab Drawing number Item name 141/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item name Settings tab Setting item Specification Item display conditions Series 8 First PMC Action Series 8 Data Type Series 8 First Variable number Series 1 Color Series 2 Color Series 3 Color Series 4 Color Series 5 Color Series 6 Color Series 7 Color Series 8 Color Image file name Style Graph Display Direction Background Color Graduations Back Color Graduations Color Action PMC Path PMC Area Address Data Type Action Variable Number Data Color Data Color Data Color Data Color Data Color Data Color Data Color Data Color Image Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Series 4 Series 5 Series 6 Series 7 Series 8 Image File Name Image Image Style Direction Image Back Color - Image Graduations Back Color Graduations Color - Image Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 15 Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." Refer to "Table 3.1 (b) Common Setting Items." No. 13 No. 16 - 0: Vertical 1: Horizontal - Table 3.1.7.6 (b) List of Item Display Conditions No. 6 7 8 9 10 11 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Data Kind: PMC Display response signal symbol flag: ON Data Kind: PMC Display response signal symbol flag: OFF Display Method: Set Display Data Kind: PMC Display data setting: Batch Edit Data Kind: PMC Display data setting: Batch Edit Data symbol flag: ON Data Kind: PMC Display data setting: Batch Edit Data symbol flag: OFF Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 5 Name 4 Flag for script use: ON Data Kind: PMC Data Kind: PMC Display request signal symbol flag: ON Data Kind: PMC Display request signal symbol flag: OFF Data Kind: P-CODE macro variable Drawing number 1 2 3 Display condition 142/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== No. 12 13 14 15 16 3.1.7.7 Display condition Data Kind: P-CODE macro variable Display data setting: Batch Edit Data Kind: PMC Display data setting: Series Edit Series Count: n or more (n is the series number to be set up.) Data Kind: PMC Display data setting: Series Edit Series n symbol flag: ON (n: 1 to 8) Data Kind: PMC Display data setting: Series Edit Series n symbol flag: OFF (n: 1 to 8) Data Kind: P-CODE macro variable Display data setting: Series Edit Series Count: n or more (n is the series number to be set up.) Batch editing The same items as those in the list display can be specified. 3.1.7.8 List of messages Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name There is no specific message displayed when setting this control. 143/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2 DESIGN CUSTOMIZATION 3.2.1 [Image File List] Screen The functions to edit FP control image files and the [Image File List] screen have been added. The [Image File List] screen has the following functions. Table 3.2.1 (a) List of Functions on the [Image File List] Screen Description Function Listing image files and shapes - Creating a shape - Adding a shape - Deleting a shape - Editing a shape - Copying a shape - Creating a file - Adding a file - Deleting a file Copying a file - The file name list displays image file names. The shape list displays the shapes selected in the file name list. The files directly below the image file storage folder (Figure folder) are collectively displayed. Selecting [New...] from [Shape operations] opens the [Make new shape] dialog box. When you enter a shape name and select [OK], the image file edit screen appears. Selecting [Entry...] from [Shape operations] opens the [Select additional shape] dialog box. When you select an image file name and shape and select [OK], the shape is added to the image file selected in the image file list. Selecting [Delete] from [Shape operations] deletes the shape from the selected image file. Selecting [Edit] from [Shape operations] displays the shape in the selected image file on the image file edit screen. You can also double-click a shape to display it on the image file edit screen. Selecting [Copy] from [Shape operations] opens the [Make copied shape] dialog box. When you enter a shape name and select [OK], the selected shape is copied and saved under the entered file name. Selecting [New...] from [File] opens the [Make new file] dialog box. When you enter a file name and select [OK], the image file edit screen appears. Selecting [Entry...] from [File] opens the file selection dialog box, where you can add an external image file. Selecting [Delete] from [File] deletes the selected image file. Selecting [Copy] from [File] opens the [Make copied file] dialog box. When you enter a file name and select [OK], the selected image file is saved under the entered file name. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE 1 The design customization function applies to image files directly below the image file storage folder (Figure folder). If you want to edit the created project or screen data on another PC, copy the Figure folder as well. 2 If the shape is customized with the design customization function, the property of the control that set the shape cannot be changed by the FpSetProperty function. 144/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.1.1 Listing image files When you select [Edit image file] from the [Project] menu, the [Image File List] screen appears. The [Image File List] screen displays the image files directly below the image file storage folder (Figure folder). The image file list in the left part of the screen displays the "file names" of the image files. The shape list in the right part of the screen displays the "shapes" in the image file selected in the image file list. The image file list can display up to 1000 image files. The shape list can display up to 255 shapes. Fig. 3.2.1.1 (a) [Image File List] Screen 3.2.1.2 Creating a shape When you select an image file in the image file list and select [Shape operations] > [New...] from the menu, the [Make new shape] dialog box appears. For the items in the [Make new shape] dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.2 (a) List of Items in the [Make new shape] Dialog Box." [New...] cannot be selected unless an image file is selected. - Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.2.1.2 (a) [Make new shape] Dialog Box 145/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Table 3.2.1.2 (a) List of Items in the [Make new shape] Dialog Box Entry type Specification Initial value Note Shape Name User entry OK button × button Blank Enter a name for the shape you want to create. - Arbitrary (up to 200 characters) - - - - - Closes the dialog box and displays the image file edit screen. Closes the dialog box. When you enter a shape name in the [Make new shape] dialog box and select [OK], the shape is created under the entered shape name and the image file edit screen appears. When you select [OK], the shape name is checked. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.2 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Shape Name Check." For the image file edit screen, refer to "3.2.2 Image File Edit Screen." Table 3.2.1.2 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Shape Name Check Cause Timing Message The shape name contains characters that cannot be used in the file name. When [OK] is selected Editing failed when you tried to add a shape. You tried to add a shape though there were already 255 shapes. When [OK] is selected The shape name contains unsupported characters. (Refer to "Table 3.1.1.2 (c) Restrictions on Shape Names.") Failed to create the shape. When [New...] is selected from [Shape operations] No more shapes can be added. Characters prohibited for use in shape names The following restrictions apply to the shape name. Table 3.2.1.2 (c) Restrictions on Shape Names 3.2.1.3 Item Description 2-byte characters Prohibited characters Can be used The following characters (single-byte) cannot be used. ¥ / : * ? ”< > | Adding a shape Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When you select an image file in the image file list and select [Shape operations] > [Entry...] from the menu, the [Select additional shape] dialog box appears. [Entry...] cannot be selected unless an image file is selected. 146/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.2.1.3 (a) [Select additional shape] Dialog Box Table 3.2.1.3 (a) List of Items in the [Select additional shape] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note ImageFile Image file selection Shape selection Selection - Blank First shape Preview OK button - - - × button - - - Displays the full path of the selected image file. Selecting […] opens the file selection dialog box. The shapes in the specified image file are registered in the combo box. Displays the sample of the selected shape. Closes the dialog box and adds the selected shape to the image file. Closes the dialog box. When you select an image file and shape and select [OK], the shape is added to the file selected in the image file list. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears when you select the image file or shape. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.3 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Shape Selection." Table 3.2.1.3 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Shape Selection Cause Timing Message The image file is opened using an external editor or other tool. You tried to add a shape though there were already 255 shapes. 3.2.1.4 When [OK] is selected Failed to add the shape. When [Entry...] is selected from [Shape operations] No more shapes can be added. Deleting a shape Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When you select an image file in the image file list, select a shape in the shape list, and select [Shape operations] > [Delete] from the menu, the deletion confirmation dialog box appears. You can also display the deletion confirmation dialog box by pressing the <DEL> key instead of using the menu. 147/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== When you select [OK] in the deletion confirmation dialog box, the selected shape is deleted from the image file. If you try to delete a shape from the file opened using an external editor, the deletion error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.4 (a) List of Messages That May Appear at File Deletion." Fig. 3.2.1.4 (a) Deletion Confirmation Dialog Box Fig. 3.2.1.4 (b) Deletion Error Dialog Box Table 3.2.1.4 (a) List of Messages at File Deletion Cause Timing The image file is opened using an external editor or other tool. 3.2.1.5 Message When [OK] is selected The currently edited shape cannot be deleted. Editing a shape When you select an image file in the image file list, select a shape in the shape list, and select [Shape operations] > [Edit] from the menu, the shapes in the selected image file are displayed in the image file edit screen. You can also display a shape in the selected image file on the image file edit screen by double-clicking it in the shape list instead of using the menu. Double-clicking a listed shape displays the shape in the selected image file on the image file edit screen. Double-clicking a shape preview in the [Control Properties] window on the FANUC PICTURE side also displays the image file edit screen. Table 3.2.1.5 (a) List of Messages That May Appear at Shape Editing Cause Timing Message Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge The edit tool failed to start. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 When [Edit] is selected from [Shape operations] Drawing number The edit tool failed to start. 148/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.1.6 Copying a shape When you select an image file in the image file list, select a shape in the shape list, and select [Shape operations] > [Copy] from the menu, the [Make copied shape] dialog box appears. When you enter a shape name and select [OK], the selected shape is saved under the entered shape name. You can also make a copy by selecting a shape, pressing the <Ctrl> + <C> keys, and then pressing the <Ctrl> + <V> keys. Fig. 3.2.1.6 (a) [Make copied shape] Dialog Box Setting item Table 3.2.1.6 (a) List of Items in the [Make copied shape] Dialog Box Entry type Specification Initial value Note Shape Name User entry OK button × button Blank Enter a name for the shape you want to copy. - Arbitrary (up to 200 characters) - - - - - The shape in the selected image file is saved under the entered shape name. Closes the dialog box. When you enter a shape name and select [OK] in the [Make copied shape] dialog box, the selected shape is copied and saved under the entered shape name. When you select [OK], the shape name is checked. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.6 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Shape Name Check." Table 3.2.1.6 (b) List of Error Messages that may appear at Shape Name Check The shape name contains characters that cannot be used in the file name. When [OK] is selected The image file is opened using an external editor or other tool. You tried to add a shape though there were already 255 shapes. When [OK] is selected Edition Date When [Copy] is selected from [Shape operations] Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 No more shapes can be added. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge The shape name contains unsupported characters. (Refer to "Table 3.1.1.2 (c) Restrictions on Shape Names.") The currently edited shape cannot be copied. Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Message Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Created Timing Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Cause 149/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.1.7 Menu bar and toolbar The menu bar on the [Image File List] screen is shown below. Fig. 3.2.1.7 (a) Menu Bar on the [Image File List] Screen The menu configuration is shown in "Table 3.2.1.7 (a) List of Functions on the Menu Bar." Table 3.2.1.7 (a) List of Functions on the Menu Bar Parent menu item Child menu item Description File - Delete Copy - Close Shape operations New - Entry - Delete Edit - Copy - 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created - Opens the [Make new shape] dialog box. When you enter a shape name and select [OK], the image file edit screen appears. Opens the [Select additional shape] dialog box. When you select an image file and shape and select [OK], the shape is added to the selected image file. Deletes the shape from the selected image file. Displays the shape in the selected image file on the image file edit screen. Double-clicking a listed shape also displays the shape in the selected image file on the image file edit screen. Opens the [Make copied shape] dialog box. When you enter a shape name and select [OK], the shape selected in the list is saved under the entered shape name. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Entry Opens the [Make new file] dialog box. When you enter a file name and select [OK], an image file is created under the entered file name. Opens the file selection dialog box. When you select a file and select [Open], the external image file is added. Deletes the selected image file. Opens the [Make copied shape] dialog box. When you enter a file name and select [OK], the selected image file is saved under the entered file name. Closes the [Image File List] screen. Name - Drawing number New 150/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.1.8 Creating a file Selecting [File] > [New...] from the menu on the [Image File List] screen opens the [Make new file] dialog box. For the items in the [Make new file] dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.8 (a) List of Items in the [Make new file] Dialog Box." Fig. 3.2.1.8 (a) [Make new file] Dialog Box Setting item Table 3.2.1.8 (a) List of Items in the [Make new file] Dialog Box Entry type Specification Initial value Note File name User entry OK button × button Blank Enter a name for the image file you want to create. - Arbitrary (up to 59 characters) - - - - - Closes the dialog box and creates an image file under the entered file name. Closes the dialog box. When you enter an image file name in the [Make new file] dialog box and select [OK], an image file is created under the entered file name. When you select [OK], the image file name is checked. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.8 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Image File Name Check." Table 3.2.1.8 (b) List of Error Messages that may appear at Image File Name Check The image file name including the path exceeds 256 characters. The number of image files exceeds 1000. When [OK] is selected Edition Date When [OK] is selected When [New...] is selected from [File] Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Message The file name the same as the image file name exists. The image file name contains unsupported characters. (Refer to "Table 3.2.1.8 (c) Restrictions on Image File Names.") The image file name including the path exceeds 256 characters. No more files can be added. Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Created Timing When [OK] is selected Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Cause The image file name is the same as an already registered file name. The image file name contains characters that cannot be used in the file name. 151/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Characters prohibited for use in image file names The following restrictions apply to the image file name. Table 3.2.1.8 (c) Restrictions on Image File Names 3.2.1.9 Item Description 2-byte characters Prohibited characters Can be used The following characters (single-byte) cannot be used. ¥ / : * ? ”< > | Adding a file Selecting [File] > [Entry...] from the menu on the [Image File List] screen opens the file selection dialog box. Fig. 3.2.1.9 (a) File Selection Dialog Box File selection dialog box For information on how to add an image file, refer to "Table 3.2.1.9 (a) List of Addition Operations." If you click [Cancel] or [x], the file will not be added and you will return to the [Image File List] screen. You can only select one file in the file selection dialog box. Table 3.2.1.9 (a) List of Addition Operations Type of the file that can be added Operation 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name A file with an extension other than .fig An image file is registered in the project. The added file is added to [Image File List]. An error dialog box appears. For details about errors, refer to "Table 3.2.1.9 (b) List of Messages That May Appear at Addition." Drawing number A file with a .fig extension 152/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.2.1.9 (b) Example of the Error Dialog Box Errors When you select [OK] in an error dialog box, the file will not be added and you will return to the [Image File List] screen. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.9 (b) List of Messages That May Appear at Addition." Cause Table 3.2.1.9 (b) List of Messages That May Appear at Addition Timing Message The number of image files exceeds 1000. The image file name exceeds 59 characters. The image file name including the path exceeds 256 characters. The selected file is not an image file. Copy of an image file is failed. When [Entry...] is selected from [File] When [OK] is selected When [OK] is selected When [OK] is selected When [OK] is selected No more files can be added. The image file name exceeds 59 characters. The image file name including the path exceeds 256 characters. Select an image file. Addition of an image file is failed. 3.2.1.10 Deleting a file When you select an image file in the list on the [Image File List] screen and select [File] > [Delete] from the menu, the deletion confirmation dialog box appears. When you select [OK] in the deletion confirmation dialog box, the selected image file is deleted. If you try to delete a file opened using an external editor, the deletion error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.10 (a) List of Messages That May Appear at File Deletion." Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 3.2.1.10 (a) Deletion Confirmation Dialog Box 153/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.2.1.10 (b) Deletion Error Dialog Box Table 3.2.1.10 (a) List of Messages at File Deletion Timing Cause The image file is opened using an external editor or other tool. When [OK] is selected Message Failed to delete the image file. 3.2.1.11 Copying a file When you select an image file in the list on the [Image File List] screen and select [File] > [Copy] from the menu, the [Make copied shape] dialog box appears. When you enter a file name and select [OK], the selected image file is saved under the entered file name. Fig. 3.2.1.11 (a) [Make copied shape] Dialog Box Table 3.2.1.11 (a) List of Items in the [Make copied shape] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note File name User entry Blank Enter a name for the image file you want to copy. OK button - Arbitrary (up to 59 characters) - - × button - - - Saves the selected image file under the entered file name. Closes the dialog box. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When you enter an image file name in the [Make copied shape] dialog box and select [OK], the selected image file is saved under the entered file name. When you select [OK], the image file name is checked. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.1.11 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Image File Name Check." 154/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.2.1.11 (b) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Image File Name Check Cause Timing Message The image file name is the same as an already registered file name. The image file name contains characters that cannot be used in the file name. When [OK] is selected The file name the same as the image file name exists. When [OK] is selected The number of image files exceeds 1000. The image file name including the path exceeds 256 characters. Copy of an image file is failed. When [Copy] is selected from [File] When [OK] is selected The image file name contains unsupported characters. (Refer to "Table 3.1.1.8 (c) Restrictions on Image File Names.") No more files can be added. 3.2.2 When [OK] is selected The image file name including the path exceeds 256 characters. Failed to copy the image file. Image File Edit Screen The image file edit screen to edit control image files is added. The configuration of the image file edit screen is shown in "Table 3.2.2 (a) Configuration List of the Image File Edit Screen." You can change whether to display the toolbar, control bar, configuration tree, or properties on the screen and their display positions. Table 3.2.2 (a) Configuration List of the Image File Edit Screen Function Description Menu bar Toolbar Control bar Configuration tree Drawing area Properties The file, edit, and display menus are displayed for each function. The icons for some functions on the menu bar are displayed. The icons for controls are displayed. The commands making up the shape are displayed in the tree view. A control is displayed according to the commands. Used to display and specify detailed control settings. Refer to "Table 3.2.2 (b) List of Editable shapes" about editable shapes. Table 3.2.2 (b) List of Editable shapes Editable shapes (iHMI mode) FPButton4.fig FPButtonAIHMI.fig FPButtonAllow.fig PCheckBox.fig FPCircle.fig FPClock.fig FPDecimal.fig FPEllipse.fig FPInput.fig 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Other than No Figure All * File not implemented All All All All All All All FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name Other than No Figure and Rectangle (Round Rect) All All All All All Other than No Figure All All All Drawing number FPButton.fig Editable shapes (Standard display unit mode) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page File name (Common in iHMI mode / Standard display unit mode) 155/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== FPKey.fig FPKeybord.fig FPKyInBf.fig FPLabel.fig FPLabel4.fig FPLamp.fig FPLamp4.fig FPLampAHMI.fig FPLine.fig FPLine2.fig FPMsg.fig FPMsgIcon.fig FPNAButton.fig FPNAInput.fig FPNALamp.fig FPNANDisp.fig FPNDisp.fig FPPmcstr.fig FPPScrn.fig FPRect.fig FPShapeFS30i.fig FPTButton.fig TFPChgScrn.fig All All All Other than No Figure All Other than No Figure All All All All All All Other than C_BTN7 Other than C_BTN7 All Other than C_BTN7 Other than No Figure All All All Other than No Figure All Other than No Figure TFPInput.fig TFPNAButton4.fig TFPNAChgScrn.fig TFPNAInput.fig TFPNALamp4.fig TFPNAOpButton.fig TFPNAOpButton2.fig TFPNATInput.fig TFPOpButton.fig Other than No Figure All Other than No Figure Other than C_BTN7 All All All All All TFPOpButtonAHMI.fig All 3.2.2.1 All All All All All All All All All All All All Other than C_BTN7 Other than C_BTN7 All Other than C_BTN7 Other than No Figure All All All Other than No Figure All Other than Down Triangle(No.3) and No Figure All All All Other than C_BTN7 All All All All Other than Left Triangle+frame and Right Triangle+frame Other than Left Triangle+frame, Right Triangle+frame, Up Triangle+frame and Down Triangle+frame Startup of the image file edit screen When editing image file is selected, this screen starts up.If the shape you want to edit contains errors, an error dialog box appears at the time of starting this screen For the messages on the error screen, refer to "Table 3.2.2.1 (a) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Startup." Table 3.2.2.1 (a) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Startup Cause Timing Message Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 The processing is aborted because the target shape contains commands out of the target or format errors. Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 When the Image File Editor is started Drawing number The selected shape contains uneditable commands or properties. 156/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.2.2 Menu bar and toolbar The menu bar and toolbar are displayed at the top of the image file edit screen. The icons for some functions on the menu bar are displayed on the toolbar. Fig. 3.2.2.2 (a) Menu Bar Each configuration is shown in "Table 3.2.2.2 (b) List of Functions on the Menu Bar." If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears when [File] > [Save] is selected from the menu on the image file edit screen or when [OK] is selected in the save confirmation dialog box. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.2.2 (a) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Saving." Table 3.2.2.2 (a) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Saving Cause Timing Message The coordinate parameter contains an error value. When you try to save the parameter The parameter contains an error value and cannot be saved. Table 3.2.2.2 (b) List of Functions on the Menu Bar Parent menu item Child menu item Grandchild menu item Toolbar Icon Description File - End Edit Undo Redo Cut Copy - Saves currently edited data to a file. If the parameter contains an error value, the error message appears. Closes the image file edit screen. - Goes back before the last operation. Restores the status before editing. Cuts the currently selected control. Copies the currently selected control. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Save 157/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Parent menu item Child menu item Grandchild menu item Toolbar Icon Description Paste Delete Insert Pastes the cut or copied control. Deletes the currently selected control. Opens the [Select additional shape] dialog box. (Refer to "[Select additional shape] dialog box.") Align Align the left sides Align the right sides Horizontal centering Vertical centering Align the top sides Align the bottom sides Horizontally evenly align Vertically evenly align Match width - Match height - Order Foreground - Background - Front - Back - Display Toolbar Control bar Configuration tree List editor Grid Zoom - Aligns the left side of each selected control rectangle to the left position of the reference control. Aligns the right side of each selected control rectangle to the right position of the reference control. Aligns the horizontal center of each selected control rectangle to the horizontal center of the reference control. Aligns the vertical center of each selected control rectangle to the vertical center of the reference control. Aligns the top side of each selected control rectangle to the top side of the reference control. Aligns the bottom side of each selected control rectangle to the bottom side of the reference control. Changes the display positions of each selected control rectangle so that they have the same horizontal interval. Changes the display positions of each selected control rectangle so that they have the same vertical interval. Matches the width of each selected control rectangle to that of the reference control. Matches the height of each selected control rectangle to that of the reference control. Moves the overlapping display of each selected control to the forefront (the top layer). Moves the overlapping display of each selected control to the background (the bottom layer). Moves the overlapping display of each selected control to frontward (an upper layer). Moves the overlapping display of each selected control to backward (a lower layer). Displays/hides the toolbar. Displays/hides the control toolbar. Displays/hides the configuration tree. Displays/hides the list editor. Displays/hides the grid. Opens the zoom dialog box. Specify the display magnification. [Select additional shape] dialog box Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [Insert] on the menu bar or toolbar opens the [Select additional shape] dialog box. For the items in the [Select additional shape] dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.2.2 (c) List of Items in the [Select additional shape] Dialog Box." [Shape] and [OK] cannot be selected unless an image file is selected. 158/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.2.2.2 (b) [Select additional shape] Dialog Box Table 3.2.2.2 (c) List of Items in the [Select additional shape] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Note ImageFile Image file selection Shape Selection - Blank First shape Preview OK button - - - × button - - - Displays the full path of the selected image file. Selecting […] opens the file selection dialog box. The shapes in the specified image file are registered in the combo box. Displays the sample of the selected shape. Closes the dialog box and updates the configuration tree and drawing area. Closes the dialog box. When you select a shape and select [OK], the shape in the image file is registered and the configuration tree and drawing area are updated. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears when you select [OK]. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.2.2 (d) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Added Shape Selection." Table 3.2.2.2 (d) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Added Shape Selection Cause The selected shape contains uneditable commands. 3.2.2.3 Timing Message When [OK] is selected The shape could not be inserted because the target shape contains commands out of the target or format errors. Control bar Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The control bar is displayed at the top of the image file edit screen. The icons for available functions are displayed on the control bar. 159/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.2.2.3 (a) Toolbar The functions of the icons on the control bar are shown in "Table 3.2.2.3 (a) List of Functions on the Control Bar." Display Command Table 3.2.2.3 (a) List of Functions on the Control Bar iHMI Standard Function display mode unit mode L Yes Yes Draws a straight line. C2 C A R R2 O I c2 c a r r2 Og Yg Im P rb Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Draws an ellipse (not filled). Draws a circle (not filled). Draws an arc or fan shape (not filled). Draws a rectangle (not filled). Draws a rectangle (not filled, line thickness specified). Draws a rectangle with round corners (not filled). Draws a PNG image (without color specification). Draws an ellipse (filled). Draws a circle (filled). Draws an arc or fan shape (filled). Draws a rectangle (filled). Draws a rectangle (filled, line thickness specified). Draws a rectangle with round corners (filled). Draws a rectangle without corners (filled). Draws a PNG image (with color specification). Fill Rectangle for radio button and check box (filled) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Select the control icon you want to draw and draw it in the drawing area. After drawing, the configuration tree and property list are updated. When using the P (Fill) command, the color pallet appears when you select the drawing position. 160/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.2.4 Configuration tree The configuration tree is displayed in the left part of the image file edit screen. The configuration tree displays the controls drawn in the drawing area in tree format. Fig. 3.2.2.4 (a) Configuration Tree The controls in the drawing area are displayed in the drawing order regarding the selected shape name as the parent node. (The top is the back side.) When you select a child node, the relevant control is selected and the property list is updated. Right-clicking a node displays a menu. For details about menus, refer to "Table 3.2.2.4 (a) List of Menus in the Configuration Tree." If you move or delete a child node, the drawing area is updated. When you select [Insert comment] or [Edit comment], the [Enter comment] dialog box appears. A comment is inserted on the selected control. [Edit comment] cannot be selected when you select an item other than the comment. Multiple items cannot be selected in the configuration tree. Table 3.2.2.4 (a) List of Menus in the Configuration Tree Item Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Moves the currently selected child node to the foreground. Moves the currently selected child node to the background. Moves the currently selected child node to frontward. Moves the currently selected child node to backward. Inserts a comment (not displayed in the drawing area). Edits a comment (not displayed in the drawing area). Deletes the currently selected child node. Drawing number To foreground To background To front To back Insert comment Edit comment Delete Function 161/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Enter comment] dialog box When you select [Insert comment] or [Edit comment] in the configuration tree, the [Enter comment] dialog box appears. For the items in the [Enter comment] dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.2.4 (b) List of Items in the [Enter comment] Dialog Box." [OK] cannot be selected unless a comment is not entered. Fig. 3.2.2.4 (b) [Enter comment] Dialog Box Table 3.2.2.4 (b) List of the Items in the [Enter comment] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Specification Initial value Comment User entry Arbitrary Blank OK button × button - - - Note Enter a comment. The maximum number of characters you can enter is 199. Closes the dialog box and updates the configuration tree. Closes the dialog box. When you enter a comment in the [Enter comment] dialog box and select [OK], the entered comment is registered in the configuration tree and the configuration tree is updated. The comment is checked when you select [OK]. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. For the messages in the error dialog box, refer to "Table 3.2.2.4 (c) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Comment Check." Table 3.2.2.4 (c) List of Error Messages That May Appear at Comment Check Timing Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 The comment can contain up to 199 characters. Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Message When [OK] is selected Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Cause You tried to register a comment that contains 200 or more characters. 162/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.2.5 Drawing area The center part of the image file edit screen is the drawing area. In the drawing area, the controls selected on the control bar are drawn. The controls are drawn according to the order in the configuration tree. Fig. 3.2.2.5 (a) Drawing Area Select the control you want to draw from the control bar and draw it, adjusting the drawing size by dragging. You can select the drawn control by clicking it to adjust the position or size. When you select a control, the property list in the right part of the screen is updated. Right-clicking in the drawing area displays a menu. The menu items in the drawing area are shown in "Table 3.2.2.5 (a) List of Menus in the Drawing Area." When you perform an operation such as addition, deletion, resizing or reposition of control or relocation between levels, the configuration tree and property list are updated. Table 3.2.2.5 (a) List of Menus in the Drawing Area Minor item Function 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Order Copies the currently selected control. Pastes the copied or cut control. Cuts the currently selected control. Deletes the currently selected control. Moves the currently selected control to the foreground. Moves the currently selected control to the background. Moves the currently selected control to frontward. Moves the currently selected control to backward. Name To foreground To background To front To back Drawing number Major item Copy Paste Cut Delete 163/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.2.2.6 Property list The property list is displayed in the right part of the image file edit screen. The property list displays the properties of the selected control. Fig. 3.2.2.6 (a) Property List [Property] displays the setting values related to the currently selected control. The displayed setting items differ depending on the control. The setting items are shown in "Table 3.2.2.6 (a) List of Line Figure Commands" and "Table 3.2.2.6 (b) List of Surface Figure Commands." *The setting value between parentheses is the value without scaling. Yes Yes Start reference point Reference point X-coordinate of start Yes Yes point - coordinates specification Yes Yes X-coordinate of start point Yes Yes Left top Right top Bottom right Bottom left Yes Yes Yes Left top Right top Bottom right Bottom left Yes Yes Specified Not specified 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Specify the reference point for specifying dot coordinates. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the start point. Specify the X-coordinate of the drawing start point. Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate of the start point. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Specify the reference point for specifying dot coordinates at the start point. Yes Yes 0 to X-coordinate of end point *For L, 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Yes Specified Not specified Y-coordinate of start Yes Yes point - coordinates Function Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page R Name L Drawing number Item Table 3.2.2.6 (a) List of Line Figure Commands Command Specification R2 A C C2 I O 164/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item L R R2 Command A C C2 I Specification O Function specification Yes Yes 0 to Y-coordinate of end point *For L, 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Yes Left top Right top Bottom right Bottom left Yes Yes Specified Not specified Specify the Y-coordinate of the drawing start point. Yes Yes X-coordinate of start point to 10000 (500) *For L, 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Yes Specified Not specified Specify the X-coordinate of the drawing end point. Yes Yes Y-coordinate of start point to 10000 (500) *For L, 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Yes Yes Specified Not specified Specify the Y-coordinate of the drawing end point. Yes Yes Yes 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Yes Yes Specified Not specified Specify the X-coordinate of the center. Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate of the center. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 to 10000 (500) Specified Not specified 0 to 5000 (250) *For A, 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Specified Not specified Specify the Y-coordinate of the center. Specify whether to use the circle radius scaling. Specify the radius of circle. Yes 0 to 5000 (250) *For O, 0 to X-coordinate of the end point Yes Specified Not specified Specify the radius in the lateral direction. X-coordinate of end point - coordinates specification Yes Yes Yes Yes X-coordinate of end point Y-coordinate of end point - coordinates specification Yes Yes Yes Yes Y-coordinate of end point X-coordinate of center - coordinates specification X-coordinate of center Y-coordinate of center - coordinates specification Y-coordinate of center Radius - coordinates specification Yes Yes Radius Radius in the horizontal direction coordinates specification Yes Yes Radius in the horizontal direction Radius in the vertical direction - coordinates specification Radius in the 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Yes Yes Yes 0 to 5000 (250) Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the end point. Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate of the end point. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the center. Specify whether to use the scaling for the radius in the horizontal direction. Specify whether to use the scaling for the radius in the vertical direction. Specify the deformation in the FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Specify the reference point for specifying dot coordinates at the end point. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page End reference point Name Yes Yes Drawing number Yes Yes Y-coordinate of start point 165/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== L R R2 Command A C C2 vertical direction Yes Border adjustment Start angle End angle Yes Yes Arc equivalence flag Expansion/contracti on mode Specification Function *For O, 0 to coordinate of the end point None Top section Bottom section Left section Right section 0 to 3600 0 to 3600 Yes ON OFF Yes Fixed Expanded/ contracted Yes File selection dialog box longitudinal direction. I O Subtracts 1 from the coordinates of the start and end points according to the setting value. Specify the start angle. Specify the end angle. Prevents collapse of round corners due to the control form. Fits the image display to the rectangle. File name Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Line type Line color Properties Width Line color 1 Line color 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Property 1 Yes Property 2 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Solid line Broken line Dotted line Dashed-dotted line Dashed-two dotted line Yes Color pallet Yes none BackColor BorderColor BorderColor1 BorderColor2 MainColor NAColor 1 to 500 Color pallet Color pallet none BackColor BorderColor BorderColor1 BorderColor2 MainColor NAColor none BackColor BorderColor BorderColor1 BorderColor2 MainColor Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Specify the line color. Specify the name of the property of which line color you want to replace. Specify the border width in dots. Specify the color. Specify the color. Specify the name of the property of which line color 1 you want to replace. Specify the name of the property of which line color 2 you want to replace. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name Yes Yes Yes Drawing number Yes Yes Specify the name of the image file you want to display. *Files that contain spaces are not displayed. *The files must be saved in FigureEx¥img. Specify the type of the line you want to draw. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item 166/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item L R R2 Command A C C2 I Specification O Function NAColor a Yes Yes Yes Yes Start reference point Yes Yes Yes Reference point X-coordinate coordinates specification X-coordinate X-coordinate of start point coordinates specification X-coordinate of start point Y-coordinate coordinates specification Y-coordinate Y-coordinate of start point Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes End reference point X-coordinate of end point coordinates specification X-coordinate of end point Y-coordinate of end point coordinates specification Y-coordinate of end point X-coordinate of center coordinates specification X-coordinate of center 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Left top Right top Bottom right Bottom left Yes Left top Right top Bottom right Bottom left Yes Specified Not specified Specify the reference point for specifying dot coordinates at the start point. Yes 0 to 10000 (500) Specified Not specified Specify the X-coordinate. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the start point. 0 to X-coordinate of end point Yes Specified Not specified Specify the X-coordinate of the drawing start point. Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate. Yes 0 to 10000 (500) 0 to Y-coordinate of end point Left top Right top Bottom right Bottom left Specified Not specified Specify the Y-coordinate. Specify the Y-coordinate of the drawing start point. Specify the reference point for specifying dot coordinates at the end point. X-coordinate of start point to 10000 (500) Specified Not specified Specify the X-coordinate of the drawing end point. Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate of the end point. Y-coordinate of start point to 10000 (500) Specified Not specified Specify the Y-coordinate of the drawing end point. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the center. 0 to 10000 (500) Specify the X-coordinate of the center. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Specify the reference point for specifying dot coordinates. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the end point. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Function Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page r2 Name r Drawing number Item Table 3.2.2.6 (b) List of Surface Figure Commands Command Specification c c2 Yg Im O rb P 167/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== r r2 Y-coordinate of center coordinates specification Y-coordinate of center Radius coordinates specification a c Command c2 Yg Im O rb Specified Not specified Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate of the center. Yes Yes Yes 0 to 10000 (500) Yes Yes Specified Not specified Specify the Y-coordinate of the center. Specify whether to use the circle radius scaling. Yes Yes 0 to 5000 (250) *For a, 0 to 10000 (500) Specified Not specified Specify the radius of circle. 0 to 5000 (250) *For Yg and O, 0 to X-coordinate of the end point Specified Not specified Specify the radius in the lateral direction. 0 to 5000 (250) *For Yg and O, 0 to Y-coordinate of the end point 0 to 3600 0 to 3600 ON OFF Fixed Expanded/contracted File selection dialog box Specify the deformation in the longitudinal direction. Radius in the horizontal direction coordinates specification Radius in the horizontal direction Radius in the vertical direction - coordinates specification Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Radius in the vertical direction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes File name Yes 1 to 250 Yes Right top Yes Bottom left Yes Bottom right 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Yes None Yes None Yes None Yes None Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Specify whether to use the scaling for the radius in the horizontal direction. Specify whether to use the scaling for the radius in the horizontal direction. Specify the start angle. Specify the end angle. Prevents collapse of round corners due to the control form. Fits the image display to the rectangle. Specify the name of the image file you want to display. *Files that contain spaces are not displayed. *The files must be saved in FigureEx¥img. Specify the border width in dots. Specify whether there is the corner at the left top. Specify whether there is the corner at the right top. Specify whether there is the corner at the bottom left. Specify whether there is the corner at the bottom right. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name Yes Left top Drawing number Width Function Yes Yes Yes Radius Start angle End angle Arc equivalence flag Expansion/ contraction mode Specification P Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Item 168/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item Border Color Surface color Properties Gradation X-coordinate of gradation start point - coordinates specification X-coordinate of gradation start point Y-coordinate of gradation start point - coordinates specification Y-coordinate of gradation start point r r2 a c Command c2 Yg Im O rb Specification P Yes Color pallet Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Color pallet Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes none BackColor BorderColor BorderColor1 BorderColor2 MainColor NAColor Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes None Yes Yes Specified Not specified Function Specify the color. Specify the color. Specify the name of the property of which surface color you want to replace. Specify whether to use gradation. Specify whether to use scaling at the X-coordinate of the gradation start point. Yes Yes Left end to right end of circle Specify the X-coordinate of the gradation start point. Yes Yes Specified Not specified Specify whether to use scaling at the Y-coordinate of the gradation start point. Yes Yes Top end to bottom end of circle Specify the Y-coordinate of the gradation start point. Specify the gradation pattern. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Brightness at the Yes Yes start point Brightness at the Yes Yes end point Yes Yes Yes Yes Top down Left to right Left top to bottom right Right top to bottom left Fill 0 to 100 Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 to 100 Pattern Specify the starting concentration of the gradation. Specify the ending concentration of the gradation. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When you click the following value columns, the color pallet is displayed: Line color, line color 1, line color 2, surface color, and border color In the following value columns, the pull-down menu displays options. Start reference point, end reference point, reference point, each type of coordinates specification item, border adjustment, line orientation, arc equivalence flag, expansion/contraction mode, line type, property, property 1, property 2, left top, right top, bottom left, bottom right, and gradation In the following value columns, the file selection dialog box appears. File name If an invalid value is entered, the value is returned to the value before entry. [Fill], a setting value in [Pattern], only applies to commands c and c2. The horizontal direction radius and vertical direction radius of the Yg and O commands are automatically adjusted to the maximum size of rectangle. 169/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.3 IMPROVEMENT OF PROPERTY SETTING OF FP CONTROL 3.3.1 Display of Setting Value Names 3.3.1.1 Function As on the property setting screen, the setting value in the property list is displayed as the name. Select the value for the item whose name is displayed list from the pull-down menu. 3.3.1.2 Relevant items The following items are relevant: Check box Pull-down menu Radio button 3.3.1.3 Diagram Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name An example of multiple relevant items is shown below. 170/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 3.3.1.3 (a) Display Image of Relevant Items and Corresponding Setting Values in the Property List Fig. 3.3.1.3 (b) Image of Changing the Value of a Name Display Item in the Pull-down Menu 3.3.1.4 Operation This section describes the display operation in the property list for each relevant item on the property setting screen. ■ Display operation of each relevant item - Check box: "OFF" is displayed when the check box is cleared. "ON" is displayed when the check box is selected. Pull-down menu: The name of the selected item is displayed as is as the setting value in the property list. Radio button: The name of the selected item is displayed as is as the setting value in the property list. 3.3.2 Changing FP Control Property from a Ruby Script 3.3.2.1 Function Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name You can change property values of FP control from a Ruby script. You can also view or operate the state of controls from a Ruby script. For the relevant items, refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (h) List of Property Change Operation Names." 171/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.3.2.2 Operation Changes to the settings of each control are reflected when the control is redrawn at the drawing cycle after the Ruby script operation ends. NOTE 1 In FANUC PICTURE 8.0 or later (iHMI version), all characters in the rectangle are deleted when redrawing the control to enable caption change. Therefore, if control overlaps, the caption may not be displayed depending on the placement order. In that case, place the control with the caption on the front. 2 In standard display, changing the character control's properties changes the background color of the character control to the screen background color. 3 If you change the properties of "text color" or "background color" with the focus on the radio button and check box, the display will be temporarily without focus. 4 Do not change the property for color when setting "Use 7 colors" in Lamp, Number or string, Number entry display, and Numeric keypad entry. 5 The display-changed control by changing the settings of it is displayed on the foreground even though this control was arranged on the background of other controls. 6 If the shape is customized with the design customization function, the property of the control that set the shape cannot be changed by the FpSetProperty function. 7 Properties of FP controls on FP screens that are not displayed cannot be acquired or changed. In this case, the result of the return value is -11 (Other error). However, properties can be acquired or changed only when all of the following conditions are met. - The FP screen which was already displayed after starting the FP driver. - The FP screen for which "Free Memory" is turned off in the base screen tab of Screen Structure Definition Control. - FP parameter No.6 "The function to save the used quantity of D-RAM" is 0 (disabled). 3.3.2.3 Function This section describes the specifications of FP function for setting the properties. [Function] FpSetProperty [Syntax with arguments] FpSetProperty(scrn_no, objname,ope_no, setstr, index) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Arguments] This function has the following arguments. 172/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 3.3.2.3 (a) Arguments of the FpSetProperty Function Description Name Type scrn_no Numerical value String Reserved word String Numerical value objname ope_no setstr index Screen No. (1 to N) Object ID Operation No. (Refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (h) List of Property Change Operation Names.") Setting value (Refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (h) List of Property Change Operation Names.") Index 0-N: When deleting an element (specifying an index) Fixed to 0: Other than above. [Returns] This function has the following return values. Table 3.3.2.3 (b) Value to Be Stored in the Return Value of the FpSetProperty Function Type Description Numerical value Result For details, refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (c) Details of Result." Table 3.3.2.3 (c) Details of Result Value Description 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 Normal Invalid screen No. (The specified screen does not exist.) Invalid object ID (The object ID name is invalid.) No relevant object ID (The object ID does not contain the specified component.) Invalid operation No. (The specified operation No. is out of the operation No. range in "Table 3.3.2.3 (h) List of Property Change Operation Names.") Operation not allowed (The operation of the specified operation No. is out of the control operation target.) Invalid setting value (At the time of setting only. The setting value is invalid.) *NOTE 3 Invalid index (At the time of setting only. The index is out of the range.) The list box does not contain options. Acquisition impossible. (At the time of acquisition only. The value cannot be acquired when the status is disabled or the disable signal is received.) Other error It was failed to reserve the memory area. -5 -6 -7 -9 -10 -11 -12 However, the properties of the control cannot be changed from the script when it is disabled, when the disable signal is ON for it or when it is interlocked. [Description] Changes the property of the specified control. [Example] When specifying the ON caption text on Button 1 on Screen 1 ret = FpSetProperty( 1, “FPButton1”, SET_ONCAPTION, “New button name”, 0 ) 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name This section describes the specifications of the functions for acquiring the properties added as FP functions. Drawing number - 173/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Function] FpGetPropertyValue [Syntax with arguments] FpGetPropertyValue(scrn_no, objname,ope_no) [Arguments] This function has the following arguments. Table 3.3.2.3 (d) Arguments of the FpGetPropertyValue Function Name Type scrn_no Description Numerical value String Reserved word objname ope_no Screen No. (1 to N) Object ID or radio button group No. (String in the fixed format RadioGroup[No.]) Operation No. (Refer to "3.3.2.3 (h) List of Property Change Operation Names.") [Returns] An array that contains n + 1 elements (n: Number of acquired values. 0 in case of error.) is returned as the return value. This function has the following return values. Table 3.3.2.3 (e) Value to Be Stored in the Return Value of the FpGetPropertyValue Function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value Numerical value 2nd and subsequent elements Result For details, refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (c) Details of Result." Acquired value Status of check box/selection status of radio button/index of list box/index of combo box [Description] Acquires the status of the specified control in the numerical format. Only the check box, radio button, list box, or combo box only can be specified. [Example] When acquiring the status of the radio button in Group number 1 on Screen 2 statusList = FpGetPropertyValue( 2, “RadioGroup1”, GET_RADIOSTATE) if statusList[0] == 0 then #Any radio button is not selected. elsif statusList[0] > 0 then radioState = statusList[1] else errcode = statusList[0] end 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When acquiring the status of Check box 1 on Screen 1 statusList = FpGetPropertyValue( 1, “FPCheckBox1”, GET_CHKSTATE ); if statusList[0] >= 0 then checkState = statusList[1] else Drawing number - 174/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== errcode = statusList[0] end - When acquiring the value selected in List box 1 on Screen 1 statusList = FpGetPropertyValue( 1, “FPListBox1”, GET_SELINDEX ); kosu = statusList[0] if kosu == 0 then # Any list box is not selected. elsif kosu > 0 then for i in 1 .. kosu do select = statusList[i] end else errcode = kosu end [Function] FpGetPropertyStr [Syntax with arguments] FpGetPropertyStr(scrn_no, objname,ope_no, index) [Arguments] This function has the following arguments. Table 3.3.2.3 (f) Arguments of the FpGetPropertyStr Function Type Description Name scrn_no axis ope_no Numerical value String Reserved word index Numerical value Screen No. (1 to N) Object ID Operation No. (Refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (h) List of Property Change Operation Names.") Index of list box or combo box [Returns] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 3.3.2.3 (g) Value to Be Stored in the Return Value of the FpGetPropertyStr Function Type String Description Element string in the list box The result is set to the first three characters as the string. For details of the result, refer to "Table 3.3.2.3 (c) Details of Result." (Example) When the result is normal, the return value is "000 Element string in the list box." When the result is the invalid screen No., the return value is "-01." Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Acquires the setting value of the specified control in the string format. Only the list box or combo box only can be specified. 175/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When acquiring the string selected in List box 1 on Screen 1 strdata = FpGetPropertyStr( 1, “FPListBox1”, GET_SELSTR, 0 ); List of Property Change Operation Names Operation name Specification ON caption setting OFF caption setting Caption setting ON text color (focus text color) setting OFF text color (focus off text color) setting Text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image background color setting SET_BKCOLOR SET_BORDER1COLOR SET_BORDER2COLOR SET_ONBKCOLOR2 SET_OFFBKCOLOR2 SET_IMGBKCOLOR2 State color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting On state color 2 setting Off state color 2 setting Image background color 2 setting SET_BTNCOLOR SET_BARCOLOR SET_MAXVAL SET_MINVAL SET_ADDINDEX SET_DELINDEX GET_CHKSTATE Button color setting Bar color setting Maximum value setting Minimum value setting Element addition Element deletion (index specification) Acquisition of check status ON caption text OFF caption text Caption text ON text color OFF text color Text color ON state color Off state color Image background color State Color Image border color 1 Image border color 2 ON state color 2 Off state color 2 Image background color 2 Button color Bar color Max. value Min. value Element string NULL - GET_RADIOSTATE Acquisition of selected control - GET_SELINDEX Acquisition of selected value (index) - GET_SELSTR Acquisition of selected value (element string) - 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Edition Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 Note (*NOTE 2, *NOTE 4) (*NOTE 2) (*NOTE 2) (*NOTE 1) (*NOTE 3) For acquiring properties (A numerical value is acquired.) For acquiring properties (A numerical value is acquired.) For acquiring properties (A numerical value is acquired.) For acquiring properties (A string is acquired.) Drawing number FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name Operation No. SET_ONCAPTION SET_OFFCAPTION SET_CAPTION SET_ONCAPCOLOR SET_OFFCAPCOLOR SET_CAPCOLOR SET_ONBKCOLOR SET_OFFBKCOLOR SET_IMGBKCOLOR Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Table 3.3.2.3 (h) 176/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Date Created Minimum value setting Element addition(*NOTE 3) Element deletion (index specification) On state color 2 setting Off state color 2 setting Image background color 2 setting Button color setting Bar color setting Acquisition of check status Acquisition of selected control Acquisition of selected value (index) Acquisition of selected value (element string) No No No No No No No Image border color 2 setting No No No No No No No Image border color 1 setting No No No No No No No State color setting No No No No No No No Off state color setting No No No No No No No On state color setting No No No No No No No Text color setting No No No No No No No OFF text color setting No No No No No No No ON text color setting No No No No No No No Caption setting(*NOTE 2) No No No No No No No OFF caption setting(*NOTE 2) No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition No No No No No No No Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Maximum value setting ON caption setting(*NOTE 2, *NOTE 4) Screen switch Button Framed button Button with image Lamp Lamp with image Image Screen switch button with image Label Number or string PMC string Number entry display Key in Numeric keypad entry MDI key Keyboard Clock Message Text Combined message History message Text Meter Graph Line graph Bar graph Pie graph Line Rectangle Arc Circle Ellipse Radio button Check box List box Combo box Image background color setting(*NOTE 1) Table 3.3.2.3 (i) List of Possible Operations by Control Operation name Control 177/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== In the table, "Yes" indicates that the operation is possible and "No" indicates that the operation is not possible. When specifying a color from the Ruby script, use the rgb code. (For example, specify "FF0000" for red. The color is subtracted to a similar color of 256 colors in the NC machine.) For changes to the caption, the language string specified with the [Setting value] argument is displayed in the language code of the multi-language key set on the NC. (Set the language string that corresponds to the multi-language key at the time of setting on the script.) In the project using the multi-language display function, “Element addition” and ”Element deletion (index specification)” are applied only to the displaying language. NOTE 1 Number entry with the numerical keypad and the background color for the MDI key are out of the operation target. 2 If no character is set in the caption of the control to be changed, the caption cannot be changed. 3 FpSetProperty will return -6 (Invalid setting value) and no element will be added if the character strings to be added by “Element addition” under any of the following conditions. - Contains line feed code (¥r or ¥n) - 1020 bytes or more - Only null character 4 For the following controls that have captions for both ON and OFF, even if “On caption is copied onto Off caption” (*) in the property page [Character] tab of the FP editor is checked, "SET_ONCAPTION (ON caption setting)" operation can only set the ON caption. If you would also like to set the OFF caption, please also perform the "SET_OFFCAPTION (OFF caption setting)" operation. - Screen Switch Control - Screen Switch Control with image - Lamp Control - Button Control - Button Control with image - Framed Button Control *Refer to "On Caption is copied onto Off Caption" in ”B-66284EN-09 2.3.1.1 Description of general property setting items”. Table 3.3.2.3 (j) Correspondence List of Operation Names Property name on the editor Property change operation name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 N/A FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Note Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 ON caption setting OFF caption setting ON text color setting OFF text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting - Name Image ON caption OFF caption ON text color OFF text color ON state color OFF state color Border Color1 Border Color2 - Drawing number Control Screen switch Button Framed button Button with image Screen switch button with image 178/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Lamp with image Label Number or string Key in PMC string Number entry display Numeric keypad entry MDI key Keyboard Clock Message Text Combined message History message Text 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created ON caption OFF caption ON text color OFF text color ON state color OFF state color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Back Color State Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Caption Text color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Text color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Focus text color OFF text color Focus Color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Check text color OFF text color Check state color OFF state color Border Color1 Border Color2 Max. value Min. value ON text color OFF text color ON state color OFF state color Border Color1 Border Color2 Text color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 ON caption setting OFF caption setting ON text color setting OFF text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting Image background color setting State color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting ON caption setting ON text color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting ON text color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting ON text color setting OFF text color setting On state color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting ON text color setting OFF text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting Maximum value setting Minimum value setting ON text color setting OFF text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting ON text color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting Caption ON caption setting Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Note FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name Lamp Property change operation name Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Property name on the editor Drawing number Control 179/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Line graph Bar graph Pie graph Line Arc Rectangle Circle Ellipse Radio button Check box List box Combo box 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Text color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Max. value Min. value Max. value Min. value Border Color1 ON text color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting Maximum value setting Minimum value setting Maximum value setting Minimum value setting Image border color 1 setting Back Color Image background color setting Caption Text color ON state color OFF state color Back Color Border Color Outer Frame Color Caption Text color Check Color Check Back Color Back Color Border Color1 Border Color2 Selected Color Unselected Color Selected Back Color Unselected Back Color Border Color Scroll border color Scroll ON state color Scroll OFF state color Scroll background color Scroll button color Scroll bar color Caption setting Text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting Caption setting Text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image background color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting ON text color setting OFF text color setting On state color setting Off state color setting Image border color 1 setting Image border color 2 setting On state color 2 setting Off state color 2 setting Image background color 2 setting Button color setting Bar color setting Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Note N/A FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name Meter Graph Property change operation name Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Property name on the editor Drawing number Control 180/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4 RUBY SCRIPT In addition to FP script, generic script mruby is now available. mruby version: 1. 2. 0 For basic information on mruby, refer to the following page. - mruby API reference http://mruby.org/docs/api/ - Ruby 1.9.3 Library Documentation(mruby is compatible with Ruby 1.9) https://ruby-doc.org/stdlib-1.9.3/ 4.1 CREATION OF RUBY SCRIPT 4.1.1 Script List The Script List screen of the FP Editor has been changed as a result of the function addition of the Ruby script. Table4.1.1 (a) List of Changes in Functions on the [Script List] Screen Description New Entry Remove Edit Check syntax - Startup register/restore - Timer script register/restore - Debug settings - 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created The "File name" and "Type" items have been added. Ruby script files and FP script files are displayed. Script numbers and check boxes are displayed under the Number item. The [Check All] check box has been added. The type of a script that is registered for Startup is indicated as "S". The type of a script that is registered as a Timer Script is indicated as "T". The [Make new file] dialog box opens. A Ruby script file or an FP script file can be imported. Script files selected using the check boxes are removed. Script files selected using the check boxes are displayed in the Script Editor. Double-clicking a script file shown in the list displays the script file in the [Script Editor] dialog box. The syntax of the script file selected using the check box is checked. The caption for the [Check all syntax] box on the [Script List] screen has been changed to [Check syntax...]. The [Detail] button has been divided into the [Register...] button and the [Restore...] button under the [Startup] group. The script files selected using the check boxes can be registered or restored from startup. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.1.7 Startup register/restore." [Register...] and [Restore...] have been added under the [Timer Script] group. The script files selected using the check boxes can be registered or restored from the timer script. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.1.8 Timer script register/restore." Refer to "Section 4.1.7 Debug Function." Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page - Name Display script list Drawing number Function 181/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.1.1.1 Display script list Ruby script files and FP script files that are registered in a project are all displayed on the [Script List] screen. The script number, type, file name, and script name of each script file are displayed on the [Script List] screen. For changes to the list display of scripts, refer to "Table 4.1.1.1 (a) Changes to List Display of Scripts." For a project, you can register up to a total of 1,000 Ruby script files and FP script files. Fig. 4.1.1.1 (a) [Script List] Screen Table 4.1.1.1 (a) Changes to List Display of Scripts Item Description Number Check boxes have been added, allowing multiple script files to be selected. The following functions allow multiple script files to be selected. ● Remove function ● Check syntax function Selecting the [Check All] check box allows you to select or deselect all the check boxes at once. ● A script registered for startup is indicated with "S". When the registration is restored, the "S" will be removed. ● A script registered for startup is indicated with "T". When the registration is restored, the "T" will be removed. This new field shows script file names. Type File name 4.1.1.2 New Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [New...] on the [Script List] screen opens the [Make new file] dialog box. 182/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== For the items in the [Make new file] dialog box, refer to "Table 4.1.1.2 (a) List of Items in the [Make new file] Dialog Box." If 1,000 script files have already been registered, [New...] is not available. Fig. 4.1.1.2 (a) [Make new file] Dialog Box Table 4.1.1.2 (a) List of Items in the [Make new file] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Setting value Initial value Remarks RubyScript/FPScript Selection ON/OFF ScriptNumber User entry Numerical value ScriptName User entry Optional RubyScript is selected An unused number is entered automatically. Blank OK button - - - × button - - - Select RubyScript or FPScript to make a new script. Enter a number for the script you want to create. The maximum number you can enter is 999. Script numbers are mandatory. Enter a name for the script you want to create. The maximum number of characters you can enter is 20. Closes the Make new file dialog box and opens the Script Editor. Closes the [Make new file] dialog box. Use the RubyScript and FPScript radio buttons to select the type of script you want to create, enter the script number and script name, and select [OK] to open the Script Editor. For details on the Script Editor, refer to "Section 4.1.2 Enhancement of Script Editor Functions." When you select [OK], the script number and the script name are checked. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. If you specify the same script file name as one that has been removed from the list, a dialog box appears asking whether you want to overwrite the script. (Fig. 4.1.1.2 (b) Script Overwrite Confirmation Dialog Box) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.1.2 (b) Script Overwrite Confirmation Dialog Box 183/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Characters prohibited for use in script names Ruby script names have restrictions as described "Table 4.1.1.2 (b) Restrictions on Script Names.". Table 4.1.1.2 (b) Restrictions on Script Names Item FP Script Maximum number of characters 2-byte characters Prohibited characters 4.1.1.3 Ruby Script 20 Can be used The following characters (single-byte) cannot be used. ¥/:*?”<>| None Entry Selecting [Entry...] in the [Script List] opens the [Open] dialog box. If 1,000 script files have already been registered, you cannot select [Entry...]. Fig. 4.1.1.3 (a) [Open] Dialog Box [Open] dialog box Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For information on how to import an external file, refer to Table 4.1.1.3 (a) List of External File Import Operations." If you click [Cancel] or [x], the file will not be imported and you will return to the [Script List] screen. You can only select one file in the [Open] dialog box at a time. 184/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 4.1.1.3 (a) List of External File Import Operations Operation File to be Imported A file with a .rb extension A file with a .dat extension A file with an extension other than .rb or .dat The file is treated as a Ruby script file. The character code is determined, and if a file that is not saved as unicode (with BOM), an error dialog box appears. (Fig. 4.1.1.3 (b) [Save Script] Dialog Box) If the character code is acceptable, the [Save Script] dialog box opens. (Fig. 4.1.1.3 (c) [Save Script] Dialog Box) In the [Save Script] dialog box, set the "ScriptNumber" and "ScriptName" and select [Save] to add the file to the Script List. For information on items in the [Save Script] dialog box, refer to "Table 4.1.1.3 (b) List of Items in the [Save Script] Dialog Box." For information on file names, refer to "Ruby script file names." The file is treated as an FP script. If there is a format error, an error dialog box appears. If you select a file that already has a registered script number, a dialog box opens asking whether you want to use the automatically assigned number. An error dialog box appears. Fig. 4.1.1.3 (b) Example of the Error Dialog Box Fig. 4.1.1.3 (c) [Save Script] Dialog Box Setting item Table 4.1.1.3 (b) List of Items in the [Save Script] Dialog Box Entry type Setting value Initial value Remarks ScriptNumber User entry Numerical value ScriptName User entry Optional Save button - - Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Enter the number of the script you want to save. The maximum number you can enter is 999. Script numbers are mandatory. Enter a name for the script you want to create. (up to 20 characters) For details on script names, refer to "Table 4.1.1.2 (a) List of Items in the [Make new file] Dialog Box" under "New." Closes the [Save Script] dialog box and saves the script. Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 An unused number is entered automatically. 185/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Setting value Cancel button × button - - Initial value Remarks Closes the [Save Script] dialog box. Closes the [Save Script] dialog box. When you select [Save] in the [Save Script] dialog box, the script number, script name, number of lines, and number of characters are checked. If there are any errors, an error dialog box appears. When you click [OK] in the error dialog box, you will return to the [Save Script] dialog box. Fig. 4.1.1.3 (d) Automatic Numbering Confirmation Dialog Box Ruby script file names - When you set a script name for a Ruby script, the file name will be "script file name.rb". If you do not set a script name, the file name will be "RBSxxxx.rb". (xxxx represents a four-digit script number) If the file name already exists, a number is added to the file name, as in "RBSxxxx_(n).rb". Error dialog box When you select [OK] in an error dialog box, the file will not be imported and you will return to the [Script List] screen. 4.1.1.4 Remove Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [Remove...] on the [Script List] screen opens a dialog box confirming whether you want to remove the script ("Fig. 4.1.1.4 (a) Remove Confirmation Dialog Box"). When you select [OK] in the remove confirmation dialog box, the script files with check boxes selected under the Number item are removed. If you select a script file that is registered for startup, the delete error dialog box appears ("Fig. 4.1.1.4 (b) Delete Error Dialog Box"). 186/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.1.4 (a) Remove Confirmation Dialog Box Fig. 4.1.1.4 (b) Delete Error Dialog Box 4.1.1.5 Edit Selecting [Edit...] on the [Script List] screen displays the selected script files under the Number item in the Script Editor. You can also double-click a script file displayed in the list to display the file in the Script Editor. You can also display the script file in the script editor by clicking the Script Displaying Button in the property list. (For the Script Displaying Button, see “Chapter 12 Script One Shot Displaying Function”.) 4.1.1.6 Check syntax Selecting [Check syntax...] on the [Script List] screen checks the syntax of the selected Ruby scripts and FP scripts under the Number item. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.4 Syntax Check." 4.1.1.7 Startup register/restore Startup registration Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [Register...] under the [Startup] group on the [Script List] screen opens a dialog box for confirming whether you want to register the script file for startup. ("Fig. 4.1.1.7 (a) Startup Registration Confirmation Dialog Box) When you select [OK] in the startup registration confirmation dialog box, the script files with check boxes selected under the Number item are registered for startup. 187/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.1.7 (a) Startup Registration Confirmation Dialog Box Startup registration restoration Selecting [Restore...] under the [Startup] group on the [Script List] screen opens a dialog box confirming whether you want to restore from startup. ("Fig. 4.1.1.7 (b) Startup Restoration Confirmation Dialog Box") When you select [OK] in the startup restoration confirmation dialog box, the script files with check boxes selected under the Number item are restored from startup. Fig. 4.1.1.7 (b) Startup Restoration Confirmation Dialog Box Display of startup registration status A script file that has been registered for startup is displayed on the [Script List] screen with "S" shown under the Type item. When the startup registration is restored, the "S" is removed. All files displayed on the [Script List] screen can be registered for startup. 4.1.1.8 Timer script register/restore Timer script registration Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [Register...] under the [Timer Script] group on the [Script List] screen opens a dialog box for confirming whether you want to register the script file as a timer script. ("Fig. 4.1.1.8 (a) Timer Script Registration Confirmation Dialog Box") When you select [OK] in the timer script registration confirmation dialog box, the script files with check boxes selected under the Number item are registered as timer scripts. 188/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.1.8 (a) Timer Script Registration Confirmation Dialog Box NOTE To use a script as a timer script, you need to register the script as a timer script and then write the set_handler function in the script or control. Timer script registration restoration Selecting [Restore...] under the [Timer Script] group on the [Script List] screen opens a dialog box for confirming whether you want to restore the script file registered as a timer script. ("Fig. 4.1.1.8 (b) Timer Script Restoration Confirmation Dialog Box") When you select [OK] in the timer script restoration confirmation dialog box, the script files with check boxes selected under the Number item are restored from timer scripts. Fig. 4.1.1.8 (b) Timer Script Restoration Confirmation Dialog Box Display of timer script registration status A script file that has been registered as a timer script is displayed on the [Script List] screen with "T" shown under the Type item. When the registration is restored, the "T" will be removed. All files displayed on the [Script List] screen can be registered as timer scripts. Behavior when a project is converted In FANUC PICTURE prior to edition 8.0, all scripts with numbers 900 to 999 were available as timer scripts. For this reason, when a project is converted, all of the scripts with numbers 900 to 999 are registered as timer scripts. Restore all scripts except those you wish to run as timer scripts. 4.1.2 Enhancement of Script Editor Functions Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The Script Editor has been expanded. 189/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 4.1.2 (a) Enhancement contents list in FP Scripts and Ruby Scripts Expanded/Added Function FP Script Ruby Script    ×    (*) × Addition of the Menu Bar Expansion of the UNDO Function and REDO Function Change in the Way Script Number/Name is Changed Restricting the Number of Script Description Lines Adding Search/Replace Functions Adding the Symbol Setting Menu Adding the FP Function Input Assistance Function Adding the Multi-language Text Setting Function        (*)  *In the dialog box, the functions that are available for either FP scripts or Ruby scripts are shown in a function list. 4.1.2.1 Addition of the Menu Bar The appearance of the Script Editor has been changed and now all operations can be performed from the menu bar. Some operations can also be performed with shortcut keys. For details on each item in the dialog box, refer to "[File] menu", "[Edit] menu", and "[Tool] menu." Fig. 4.1.2.1 (a) Script Editor Table 4.1.2.1 (a) List of Script Editor Items Item Description Dialog title The type and file name of the script to be edited are shown. "Ruby Script Edit XXXX.rb", "FP Script Edit FPSXXXX.dat" [File] menu [Edit] menu [Tools] menu This is an edit box where the script is written. Closes the Script Editor. If there is an update to the script that has not been saved, a confirmation dialog box appears. Menu bar Edit box × button [File] menu Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The [File] menu has been added to the Script Editor. 190/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== For details on each menu item, refer to "Table 4.1.2.1 (b) List of [File] Menu Items." Fig. 4.1.2.1 (b) Script Editor (Expanded [File] Menu) Table 4.1.2.1 (b) List of [File] Menu Items Description Item Overwrite Save... Close Saves the script and closes the Script Editor. Closes the Script Editor. If there is an update to the script that has not been saved, a confirmation dialog box appears. [Edit] menu The [Edit] menu has been added to the Script Editor. For details on each menu item, refer to "Table 4.1.2.1 (c) List of [Edit] Menu Items." Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.2.1 (c) Script Editor (Expanded [Edit] Menu) 191/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 4.1.2.1 (c) List of [Edit] Menu Items Description Item Undo Undoes the immediately prior operation in the edit box. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.2.2 Expansion of the UNDO Function and REDO Function." Redoes the operation canceled with [Undo]. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.2.2 Expansion of the UNDO Function and REDO Function." Cuts the character string selected in the edit box. Copies the character string selected in the edit box. Pastes the character string stored by the cut or copy operation. Deletes the character string selected in the edit box. Opens the [Search] dialog box. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.2.5 Adding Search/Replace Functions." Opens the [Replace] dialog box. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.2.5 Adding Search/Replace Functions.." Redo Cut... Copy... Paste... Delete... Search... Replace... [Tools] menu The [Tools] menu has been added to the Script Editor. For details on each menu item, refer to "Table 4.1.2.1 (d) List of [Tools] Menu Items." Fig. 4.1.2.1 (d) Script Editor (Expanded [Tools] Menu) Enter International Language Text... Symbol Register... 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Script Name Change... Name Syntax Check... Table 4.1.2.1 (d) List of [Tools] Menu Items Description Opens the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.2.7 Adding the FP Function Input Assistance Function." Performs a syntax check. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.1.6 Check syntax." Opens the [Change of ScriptName] dialog box. For details, refer to "Section 4.1.2.3 Change in the Way Script Number/Name is Changed." Opens the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box. For details, refer to "List of Items in the [Multi-language Text Setting] Dialog Box." You cannot select this item if no multi-language keys have been set. This item is not shown when an FP script file is being edited. As in the case of the [File] menu of the FP Editor, the [PMC...] and [DEFINE...] menus are displayed, which open list dialog boxes for PMC symbols and Define symbols. Drawing number Item Enter FP Function... 192/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Project variable Setting 4.1.2.2 The project variable list is displayed. For details, refer to "18 Project variable management function of FANUC PICTURE for iHMI". Expansion of the UNDO Function and REDO Function The UNDO function and the REDO function have been expanded. The UNDO function and the REDO function, which previously supported only a single operation, now support multiple operations. Details of the UNDO and REDO functions When you select [Edit] > [Undo] from the menu bar of the Script Editor, the immediately prior operation is undone. When you select [Edit] > [Redo] from the menu bar, the operation that has been undone by the UNDO function is redone. The UNDO function and the REDO function can be used from the following shortcut keys.Shortcut key assignment for the UNDO function: <Ctrl> + <Z> Shortcut key assignment for the REDO function: <Ctrl> + <U> If there is not enough memory, an error dialog box appears. When this happens, follow the instructions in the dialog box to close all other programs and then retry the operation. Fig. 4.1.2.2 (a) Memory Allocation Error Dialog Box 4.1.2.3 Change in the Way Script Number/Name is Changed Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The script number/name can be changed from the [Change of ScriptName] dialog box, which is displayed by selecting [File] > [Change of ScriptName] from the menu bar of the Script Editor. For details on each item in the dialog, refer to "Table 4.1.2.3 (a) List of Items in the [Change of ScriptName] Dialog Box." 193/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.3 (a) [Change of ScriptName] Dialog Box Setting item Table 4.1.2.3 (a) List of Items in the [Change of ScriptName] Dialog Box Entry type Setting value Initial value Description ScriptNumber User entry Numerical value Script number before change ScriptName User entry Optional Script name before change OK button - - - Cancel button - - - × button - - - Enter if you want to change the script number. The maximum number you can enter is 999. Entry is required. Enter if you want to change the script name. Entry is optional. With Ruby scripts, the name entered becomes the file name. If a prohibited character is entered, an error dialog box is displayed when [OK] is selected. For script naming rules, refer to "4.1.1.3 Entry." Changes the script number/name and closes the dialog box. For the behavior when there is a duplicate script number/name, refer to "4.1.1.3 Entry." Closes the dialog box without changing the script number/name. Closes the dialog box without changing the script number/name. Changing the Script Number When a script number is changed, the file is duplicated. File names may change as a result of changing a script number. For details, refer to "Table 4.1.2.3 (b) Behavior When the Script Number is Changed." Table 4.1.2.3 (b) Behavior When the Script Number is Changed Change number No No - Yes No No Yes - Yes 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Same name Ruby script FP script Change in file name Example) RBS0000.rb  RBS0001.rb Creates a file using the script name as the file name Example) Sample.rb  Yomple.rb Duplicate file name error The automatic numbering confirmation dialog box appears  If [OK], file name is changed Example) RBS0000.rb  RBS0002.rb Change in file name Example) FPS0000.dat  FPS0001.dat Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge The automatic numbering confirmation dialog box appears  If [OK], file name is changed Example) FPS0000.dat  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Name setting Name Overlapping numbers after the change Drawing number Changes 194/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Yes No Yes The automatic numbering confirmation dialog box appears  If [OK], creates a file using the script name as the file name Example) Sample.rb  Yomple.rb Duplicate script name error FPS0002.dat For details on automatic numbering confirmation dialog box, refer to "4.1.1.3 Entry," "Fig. 4.1.2.3 (b) Automatic Numbering Confirmation Dialog Box." Changing the Script Name When the script name is changed, the file name changes in Ruby script and the file is replaced. For details, refer to "Table 4.1.2.3 (c) Ruby Script Behavior When Changing the Script Name." With FP script, the file name does not change when the script name is changed. Table 4.1.2.3 (c) Ruby Script Behavior When Changing the Script Name Changes Name before the change Same name after the change Set name No No Change name Yes Yes No Delete name Yes Yes No Yes (Note) Ruby script behavior Creates a file using the script name Creates a file and deletes the original file Example) RBS0000.rb  Sample.rb Duplicate file name error Creates a file using the script name Creates a file and deletes the original file Example) Sample.rb  Sample2.rb Duplicate file name error Create a file with a file name based on the script number, and delete the original file Example) Sample.rb  RBS0000.rb Sequential number assigned to file name Example) Sample.rb  RBS0000_(2).rb If a file with the same name as the name after the change exists in the destination folder for saving, the script overwrite confirmation dialog box is displayed. For details, see "4.1.1.2 New," "Fig. 4.1.1.2 (b) Script Overwrite Confirmation Dialog." NOTE Deleting the file name automatically changes the file name in Ruby script. If a file with the same name already exists, a number is assigned. 4.1.2.4 Restricting the Number of Script Description Lines Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name A Ruby script can contain up to 9,999 lines or 100,000 characters. Entries, pastes, or replacements exceeding this will cause an error dialog box to be displayed. If this occurs, delete extra lines or reduce the processes. For the range available for describing FP script files and Ruby script files, refer to "Table 4.1.2.4 (a) List of Ranges Available for Writing Scripts." 195/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.4 (a) Lines/Characters Exceeded Error Dialog Box Table 4.1.2.4 (a) List of Ranges Available for Script Description Description range FP script file Up to line 100 Line 101 to line 200 Ruby script file Can be written Can be written. However, a warning is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Cannot be written. An error dialog box appears Cannot be written. An error dialog box appears Line 201 to line 9999 Line 10000 and beyond Can be written Can be written. No warning displayed. Can be written. An error dialog box does not appear. Cannot be written. An error dialog box appears. With FP scripts, when the number of script lines exceed 101, a warning message appears on the status bar. When the number of script lines exceed 201, an error dialog box appears. Fig. 4.1.2.4 (b) Script Editor (Warning Displayed) 4.1.2.5 Adding Search/Replace Functions Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Specified character strings can be searched/replaced from the Script Editor. 196/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Search Function Select [Edit] > [Search] from the menu bar of the Script Editor to display the [Search] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.5 (a) [Search] Dialog Box") For items in the [Search] dialog box, refer to "Table 4.1.2.5 (a) List of Items in the [Search] Dialog Box." Fig. 4.1.2.5 (a) [Search] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Table 4.1.2.5 (a) List of Items in the [Search] Dialog Box Setting value Initial value Description String to search combo box Search option settings check box User entry Optional Blank Check ON/OFF OFF Backward button Forward button - - - - - - Close button × button - - - Enter the string to search for. The maximum number of characters you can enter is 255. A history of the 10 most recent searches is recorded. An option for distinguishing between uppercase and lowercase letters in the search string. If ON, searches are case-sensitive. If OFF, searches are not case-sensitive. The initial value is OFF. Search is performed upward from the current cursor position. Cannot be selected if the string to search combo box is blank. The search is performed downward from the current cursor position. Cannot be selected if the string to search combo box is blank. Closes the [Search] dialog box. Closes the [Search] dialog box. Details of the search function operation The [Search] dialog box can be displayed using the shortcut key as well. Assigned key: <Ctrl> + <F> - Enter the search string in the combo box of the [Search] dialog box and select [Backward] or [Forward] to start the search. - Selecting [Backward] searches upward from the current cursor position, while selecting [Forward] searches downward. - If there is a search string that matches completely, the cursor moves to that string and the string is selected. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - 197/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.5 (b) Image of Selected State - If there are no matching strings, the search result dialog box is displayed. (Fig. 4.1.2.5 (c) "Search Result Dialog Box (No Matching Strings)") Fig. 4.1.2.5 (c) Search Result Dialog Box (No Matching Strings) - If the search is repeated and has been completed to the end in the specified direction, a continue search confirmation dialog box appears. ("Fig. 4.1.2.5 (d) Continue Search Confirmation Dialog Box") Fig. 4.1.2.5 (d) Continue Search Confirmation Dialog Box Selecting [Yes] in the continue search confirmation dialog searches the area that has not yet been searched. If a search was performed by selecting the [Backward] button, the search is performed from the end of the file to the position of the cursor when [Backward] was selected. If a search was performed by selecting [Forward], the search is performed from the beginning of the file to the position of the cursor when [Forward] was selected. Select [No] in the continue search confirmation dialog to close the dialog box and return to the Script Editor. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When search is continued and the search advances to the position of the cursor when the search began, the continued search result dialog box is displayed. ("Fig. 4.1.2.5 (e) Continued Search Result Dialog Box") Drawing number - 198/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.5 (e) Continued Search Result Dialog Box Replacement Function Select [Edit] > [Replace] from the menu bar of the Script Editor to display the [Replace] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.5 (f) [Replace] Dialog Box") [Replace] Dialog Box Setting item Entry type Table 4.1.2.5 (b) [Replace] Dialog Box Setting Items Setting value Initial value Remarks String to search User entry Optional Blank Search option Check ON/OFF OFF To User entry Optional Blank Backward button - - - Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Enter the string to search for. The maximum number of characters you can enter is 255. A history of the 10 most recent searches is recorded. An option for distinguishing between uppercase and lowercase letters in the search string. If ON, searches are case-sensitive. If OFF, searches are not case-sensitive. Enter the replace string. The maximum number of characters you can enter is 255. A history of the 10 most recent searches is recorded. Search is performed upward from the current cursor position. Cannot be selected if the string to search combo box is blank. Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Fig. 4.1.2.5 (f) 199/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Forward button - - - Replace button - - - Replace all button - - - Close button × button - - - The search is performed downward from the current cursor position. Cannot be selected if the string to search combo box is blank. Replaces the search string with the specified string. Cannot be selected if the string to search combo box is blank. Replaces all instances of the search string found in the file with the specified string. Cannot be selected if the string to search combo box is blank. Closes the [Replace] dialog box. Closes the [Replace] dialog box. Details of the replacement function operation - Enter the search string in the string to search combo box of the [Replace] dialog box and select [Backward] or [Forward] to start the string search. - If there is a matching string, the replace string is selected. Selecting [Replace] in this state replaces the replace string with what is specified in "To:." - After replacing the string, the string search is performed toward the end of the file. If there is a string that matches, the replace string is selected. - When [Replace all] is selected, all matching strings in the file are replaced with the string in "To:." When the replacement is complete, the replacement result dialog box appears. ("Fig. 4.1.2.5 (g) Replacement Result Dialog Box") For information on the search function, see "Adding Search/Replace Functions," "Search Function." Fig.4.1.2.5 (g) Replacement Result Dialog Box The "Replace" dialog box can be displayed using the shortcut key. Assigned key: <Ctrl> + <H> - When a search has run to the end in the specified direction after selecting [Replace], a continue search confirmation dialog box appears. ("Fig. 4.1.2.5 (d) Continue Search Confirmation Dialog") Selecting [Yes] in the continue search confirmation dialog searches the area that has not yet been searched. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - 200/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.1.2.6 Adding the Symbol Setting Menu Selecting [Tool] > [Symbol] from the menu bar of the Script Editor displays the [PMC] and [Symbol] menus. As in the case of the [File] menu of the FP Editor, selecting them displays the PMC symbol list dialog box and constant symbol list dialog box and the symbols can be edited. 4.1.2.7 Adding the FP Function Input Assistance Function Select [Script] > [FP function input] from the menu bar of the Script Editor to display the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.7 (a) [FP Function Input Assistance] Dialog Box") For items in the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box, refer to "Table 4.1.2.7 (a) [FP Function Input Assistance] Dialog Box Setting Items." Fig. 4.1.2.7 (a) [FP Function Input Assistance] Dialog Box - No selection FP function Description User entry - Optional - Blank Blank OK button - Cancel button × button - 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created FP functions available in the target script file are displayed. When an FP function is selected, the function is automatically entered in the FP function edit box. Edit box for editing the FP function. Description of the function selected in the FP Function List list box is displayed. The function in the FP function edit box is inserted in the Script Editor cursor position, and the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box closes after the insertion. Closes the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box. Closes the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Selection Name FP Function List Drawing number Setting item Table 4.1.2.7 (a) [FP Function Input Assistance] Dialog Box Setting Items Entry type Setting value Initial value Description 201/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== When an FP function is selected from the [FP Function List] list box in the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box, a template for the function is automatically entered in the FP function edit box. Description of the selected FP function is displayed in the [Description] list box. The FP function edit box can be edited freely. When [OK] is selected, the content of the FP function edit box is inserted in the Script Editor cursor position, and the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box closes. Selecting [Cancel] discards the edited content and the [FP Function Input Assistance] dialog box closes. The functions available in the FP script and Ruby script being edited are listed in the [FP Function List]. 4.1.2.8 Adding the Multi-language Text Setting Function Select [Tool] > [Multi-language text setting] from the menu bar of the Script Editor to display the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (a) [Multi-language Text Setting] Dialog Box") In the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box, multi-language text used in the Ruby script file can be specified. For the items, refer to "Table 4.1.2.8 (a) List of Items in the [Multi-language Text Setting] Dialog Box." Multi-language text allows the text of multiple languages to be specified for any string specified by the user in the script file. By allowing multi-language texts to be specified, appropriate strings for the language can be used when the language is switched. Fig.4.1.2.8 (a) [Multi-language Text Setting] Dialog Box Edition Date Created - The [Add row] dialog box is displayed. (Fig. 4.1.2.8 (b) [Add Row] Dialog Box) Use this dialog box to add a record at the bottom. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 - Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 - Drawing number Setting item Add row button Table 4.1.2.8 (a) List of Items in the [Multi-language Text Setting] Dialog Box Entry type Setting value Initial value Description 202/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Setting item Entry type Setting value Initial value Insert Row button - - - Delete Rows button - - - Import button - - - Export button - - - Search button - - - Character type button - - - Check character box Text edit - - - User entry Optional Blank - - - - OK button Cancel button × button - Description The [Insert Row] dialog box is displayed. (Fig. 4.1.2.8 (c) [Insert Row] Dialog Box) Use this dialog box to insert a record above the cursor position. The deletion confirmation dialog box appears. (Fig. 4.1.2.8 (d) Row Deletion Confirmation Dialog Box) Use this dialog box to delete the record at the cursor position. Imports and displays the CSV file where multi-language text is listed. The character code of the CSV file must be Unicode (with BOM). The displayed multi-language text data is saved in a CSV file. The character code of the CSV file will be Unicode (with BOM). The [Search] dialog box is displayed. (4.1.2.5 (a) [Search] Dialog Box) Use this dialog box to search for the specified text. Specifies the target character type for character check when selecting a row. Not displayed in the iHMI mode. Checks if the character code is displayable. Not displayed in the iHMI mode. Text ID and multi-language text can be edited. The numbers of characters are as follows. - Text IDs must be 20 bytes or less - Each multi-language text must be 128 bytes or less * Half-size characters are 1 byte and full-size characters are 2 bytes. Checks if the character code is displayable for the character type ANK. If the check result is OK, the changes are saved and the dialog box closes. The changes are discarded and the dialog box closes. The changes are discarded and the dialog box closes. NOTE 1 If no multi-language key is set, the [Multi-language Text Setting] in the menu of the Script Editor cannot be used. 2 Multi-language key operations cannot be performed using the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box. Multi-language key setting must be performed using the "Multi-language setting sheet" in the "Setting of Project dialog box" as before. 3 If the multi-language key is deleted, the settings will be deleted. 4 If entry exceeds the maximum number of bytes that can be specified, the entry beyond the maximum bytes will be invalid. Text ID Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Text ID is an index for multi-language text that can be specified by the user. By setting the corresponding multi-language text for the text ID, strings corresponding to the language specified in the system can be used. 203/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Multi-language Text Setting] Dialog Box Details - On the text edit data sheet, enter the text ID in the Text ID field and the corresponding strings in the multi-language text field, and select [OK] to save the setting. However, if no text ID is specified, the corresponding records will be deleted. ("Table 4.1.2.8 (b) Record Operations When Saving Multi-language Text") Table 4.1.2.8 (b) Record Operations When Saving Multi-language Text Text ID Data exists Data exists Blank Blank Multi-language text Operation performed on record Data exists Blank Data exists Blank Save the record Save the record Delete the record Delete the record - Up to 65535 rows of multi-language texts can be registered. - Selecting [Add row] displays the [Add row] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (b) [Add row] Dialog Box") Entering the number of rows and selecting [OK] adds a blank row at the bottom of the text edit data sheet. If the entered numerical value results in the number of rows exceeding 65535 rows after the addition, an error dialog box is displayed. Select [Cancel] or [×] to return to the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box. Fig. 4.1.2.8 (b) [Add Row] Dialog Box Selecting [Insert row] displays the [Insert Row] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (c) [Insert Row] Dialog Box") Entering a number of rows and selecting [OK] inserts blank rows above the cursor position of the text edit data sheet. If the entered numerical value results in the number of rows exceeding 65535 rows after the insertion, an error dialog box is displayed. Select [Cancel] or [×] to return to the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box. Fig. 4.1.2.8 Selecting [Delete row] displays the row deletion confirmation dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (d) Row Deletion Confirmation Dialog Box") Select [Yes] to delete the row where the cursor is positioned. Select [No] to return to the [Multi-language Text Setting] dialog box. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - (c) [Insert Row] Dialog Box Drawing number - 204/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.8 (d) Row Deletion Confirmation Dialog Box - Selecting [Import] displays the [Open] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (e) [Open] Dialog Box") Selecting a CSV format file from the [Open] dialog box adds the file to the text edit data sheet if the character code is Unicode (with BOM). If an error occurs during the import, an error dialog box appears. Selecting [Cancel] or [×] closes the [Open] dialog box. Fig. 4.1.2.8 (e) [Open] Dialog Box 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [Export] displays the [Save As] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (f) [Save As] Dialog Box") Selecting "Save" after editing the file name in the [Save As] dialog box saves the content of the text edit data sheet as a CSV format file (character code). Selecting [Cancel] or [×] closes the [Save As] dialog box. Drawing number - 205/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.8 (f) - [Save As] Dialog Box Selecting [Search] displays the [Search] dialog box. ("Fig. 4.1.2.8 (g) [Search] Dialog Box") This dialog box behaves similar to the search function for Script Editor. For details, refer to "4.1.2.5 Adding Search/Replace Functions." Fig. 4.1.2.8 (g) [Search] Dialog Box 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Selecting [Check char] checks the character specified in the multi-language text to see if it is a displayable character code. If no row is selected, the check is performed on whether the character code is displayable with the ANK character type. If a character type other than ANK is specified with the character type button, the following dialog box is displayed. When [OK] is selected, character code check is performed after ANK is specified for the content of the character type button. Drawing number - 206/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.2.8 (h) Character Code Check Notification Dialog Box - If a row is selected, the check is performed on whether the character code is displayable with the character type specified with the button. If everything is displayable, the following dialog box appears. Fig. 4.1.2.8 (i) Character Code Check Result OK Dialog Box If a character code that is not displayable was specified, an error dialog box appears and the background of all error cells turn gray. Using the Multi-language Text To use multi-language texts, write the LangCaption function in the Ruby script. The LangCaption function receives the text ID and whether or not multi-language text is used as the argument, and it returns the text in the language specified as the return value. [Function] LangCaption [Syntax with arguments] LangCaption( textid , mltlanguse ) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Name Table 4.1.2.8 (c) Arguments of the LangCaption Function Description Type textid mltlanguse String True/false String specified by the user true: Use multi-language input false: Do not use multi-language input [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 4.1.2.8 (d) Value to Be Stored in the Return Value of the LangCaption Function Description Type When using multi-language input (mltlanguse = true), a string corresponding to the language specified in the system (*) When not using multi-language input (mltlanguse = false), a string corresponding to the language with "*" on the language key in the multi-language text input dialog box If the text ID specified for the argument textid does not exist, "textid not found" is specified as the return value. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 If there is no multi-language key corresponding to the language specified in the system, the string corresponding to the default language set for the multi-language key will be the return value. Name * Drawing number String 207/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Description] Calls the multi-language text specified in advance. [Example] msgText = LangCaption(“ErrorMessage1”, true); titleText = LangCaption(“ErrorTitle1”, true); MsgBoxShow( msgText, 0, titleText); Or MsgBoxShow(LangCaption("ErrorMessage1", true), 0, LangCaption("ErrorTitle1", true)); * Since the MsgBoxShow function displays the string for the 1st argument, the string corresponding to the language specified in the system can be displayed by using the LangCaption function. 4.1.3 Conversion Function To open a project created in a edition of FANUC PICTURE that is older than edition 8.0 (old FP) in FP edition 8.0 or later (new FP), it is necessary to convert the project. Conversion is performed for "FP scripts" and "Project." The converted file cannot be opened with an old FP editor. Conversion can only be performed for the project created with the old FP included in that edition or with the one in the previous editions. NOTE Conversion from FP script to Ruby script is only to help creation.Therefore, please confirm the contents after conversion and confirm the operation. FP script is supported after edition 8.0. Conversion to Ruby script is not mandatory, so implement it as necessary. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name An outline of the conversion is described in the figure below. 208/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Existing FP editor New FP editor Old FP project New FP project • The argument specification method for FP functions is changed. • The name of the function for calling a script from control is changed. • The extension of the project is changed. FP script FP script Ruby script • The FP script syntaxes are changed. • A mark is added to GOTO statements and labels. • The extension is changed to "rb." • The debug information is deleted. Fig. 4.1.3 (a) Outline of conversion The timing and processing for conversion of FP scripts and projects are as follows. Table 4.1.3 (a) Conversion processing for each target Timing Conversion processing Target Project - FP script When an old FP project is opened When [Project] > [Add screen ...] is selected from the Menu bar When [File] > [Screen], and then [Open] is selected from the Menu bar When [Open] is selected from the tool bar When an old FP project is opened When [Project] > [Convert to Ruby script...] is selected from the Menu bar (1) The name of the function for calling a script from control is changed. (2) The argument specification method for FP functions is changed. (3) The extension of the project is changed. (4) The FP script syntaxes are changed. (5) A mark is added to GOTO statements and labels. (6) The extension is changed to "rb." (7) The debug information is deleted. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The flow of conversion is as follows. ("Fig. 4.1.3 (b) Flowchart up to the completion of conversion") For the details of each process, refer to "4.1.3.1 Conversion of a Project" and later. 209/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Start The project conversion wizard appears. No Convert the project Yes (1) Change the name of the function for calling a script from control (2) Change the argument specification method for FP functions (3) Change the extension of the project No Convert the scripts Yes (4) Change the FP script syntaxes (5) Add a mark to GOTO statements and labels (6) Change the extension to "rb" (7) Delete the debug information Open the project End Fig. 4.1.3 (b) Flowchart up to the completion of conversion Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When an old FP project is opened, the confirmation wizard for conversion of the project appears. The project will be converted when you follow the steps in the wizard. (Refer to "4.1.3.1 Conversion of a Project.") After the project conversion is completed, you can move on to conversion of scripts. When moving on to conversion of scripts, the wizard closes and the conversion confirmation dialog box appears. In the conversion confirmation dialog box, all the FP scripts registered in the projects are displayed, and you can convert all the selected scripts into Ruby scripts. The converted FP script files remain in the original files. (Refer to "4.1.3.2 Conversion of Scripts.") 210/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== You can convert scripts by opening the project. Otherwise, you can convert them later by selecting [Project] > [Convert to Ruby script...] on the Menu bar and then converting them. After [Convert to Ruby script...] is selected, the conversion confirmation dialog appears. Fig. 4.1.3 (c) Conversion to Ruby script In addition, project conversion is performed when importing a screen created with an old FP editor into a new FP editor. For information on the conversion of projects, refer to "4.1.3.1 Conversion of a Project." 4.1.3.1 Conversion of a Project When an old FP project is opened, the project conversion wizard appears. The project will be converted when you follow the instructions in the wizard, and the following procedures will be performed. The name of the function for calling a script from control is changed. The argument specification method for FP functions is changed. The extension of the project is changed. In addition, conversion of the project is also performed when the following procedures are performed to import a screen into the FP editor. When [Project] > [Add screen ...] is selected from the Menu bar When [File] > [Screen], and then [Open] is selected from the Menu bar When [Open] is selected from the Menu bar When a file is dragged and dropped onto the editor At this time, the following procedures are performed for the selected folder. The name of the function for calling a script from control is changed. The argument specification method for FP functions is changed. When opening a screen file by dragging and dropping it on a place other than the project window of the editor, a dialog box such as that shown below appears ("Fig. 4.1.3.1 (a) Screen file conversion confirmation dialog box displayed when dragged and dropped"). If you select [Yes] in this dialog box, conversion of the screen file will be performed and the target screen will open. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In addition, when it is necessary to convert a project, the project conversion wizard appears. For details, refer to "Project wizard." 211/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.1 (a) Screen file conversion confirmation dialog box displayed when dragged and dropped NOTE In FANUC PICTURE 8.0 or later (iHMI version), all characters in the rectangle are deleted when redrawing the control to enable caption change. Therefore, if control overlaps, the caption may not be displayed depending on the placement order. In that case, place the control with the caption on the front. Project conversion wizard When project conversion is performed, the project conversion wizard ([FANUC PICTURE PROJECT CONVERT] screen) appears. The project conversion will be completed by following the steps in this wizard. In the wizard that appears when the project is opened, you can continue to perform script conversion by selecting the [rubyscript convert] check box on the screen that appears after the conversion is completed. Fig. 4.1.3.1 (b) Project conversion wizard (before the conversion starts) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE The converted file can not be restored. Please obtain backup in advance. 212/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.1 (c) Project conversion wizard (after the conversion is completed) Fig. 4.1.3.1 (d) Project conversion wizard (when importing a screen) Table 4.1.3.1 (a) Details of the project conversion wizard Setting Initial value Description value - - - Progress bar Next button (OK button) - - -- Cancel button - - - rubyscript convert check box Check ON/OFF OFF 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Displays the description of the dialog. The display is updated according to the situation. When importing a screen, the conversion target file name is displayed. Displays the progress of the conversion. Click this button to start the conversion. This button will be hidden after the conversion is complete. Click this button to stop opening the project and close the wizard. If you click this button in the middle of the conversion, the conversion will be stopped and the project will be restored to the state before the conversion, and then the wizard will be closed. This button will be hidden after the conversion is complete. Displayed after the conversion is complete. If you click the Complete button with this check box selected, the conversion confirmation dialog box appears and you can move on to the conversion of scripts. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Description field Name Entry type Drawing number Item 213/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Item Entry type Complete button - Setting value -- Initial value Description This check box cannot be selected for projects that do not contain scripts. Click this button to close the project conversion wizard and open the converted project. - When the conversion target is a screen file, the following dialog box appears and the screen file becomes operable with the editor. Fig. 4.1.3.1 (e) Screen file conversion completion dialog box When conversion of a project fails, the following dialog box appears. Click [OK] to stop the conversion and restore the project to the state before the conversion. Fig. 4.1.3.1 (f) Project conversion error dialog box Changing the name of the function for calling scripts from control Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In old FP projects, only FP scripts could be called, so the call functions were specified by "FP_Script + script no.", as in "FP_Script[100_…]." In new FP projects, both Ruby scripts and FP scripts are called using the same FP function "script", so the call function has been changed to be specified by "script+script no.", as in "script("script no.", …)". For this reason, if the call function is specified by "FP_script[100_…]," an error occurs during MEM file creation. 214/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.1 (g) Example of the change of the function for calling scripts from control Changing the argument specification method for FP functions In old FP projects, arguments were specified in the form of "[Argument 1_Argument 2_Argument 3]." After conversion, it is changed so that arguments are specified in the form of "(Argument 1, Argument 2, Argument 3)" according to the Ruby description rules. Fig. 4.1.3.1 (h) Example of the change of argument specification method for functions NOTE 1. When performing the conversion, square brackets of “Easy setting of macro variable” are also converted to round brackets. An error occurs when making the MEM file, so please correct them with square brackets. 2. Since the arguments of only FP function “str_keyinput” are specified in the form of “(Argument 1_Argument 2)”, changing from “,”(comma) to “_” manually is needed after the conversion. Changing the project extension Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In the new FP editor, a new extension is used for project files. Therefore, the extension is also changed when a project is converted. The following shows how the extension is changed for the standard display mode and iHMI mode. 215/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 4.1.3.1 (b) Extension conversion correspondence table Target mode Before conversion After conversion Standard display iHMI 4.1.3.2 .fpp .fppx .fp2 .fp2x Conversion of Scripts When script conversion is performed, the conversion confirmation dialog box appears. The following conversion processing is performed for the FP scripts selected in the conversion confirmation dialog box. The FP script syntaxes are changed. A mark is added to GOTO statements and labels. The extension is changed to "rb" when the conversion is completed. The debug information is deleted. NOTE Conversion from FP script to Ruby script is only to help creation.Therefore, please confirm the contents after conversion and confirm the operation. Conversion is performed at the following timing. When an old FP project is opened When [Project] > [Convert to Ruby script...] is selected from the Menu bar Conversion confirmation dialog box Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When script conversion is performed, the conversion confirmation dialog shown below appears. Select the scripts to be converted from the FP script list and click [OK]. The conversion of the selected FP scripts will then start. 216/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.2 (a) [Convert to Ruby Script ...] dialog box Table 4.1.3.2 (a) List of the items in the dialog box Setting item Entry type Setting value Initial value Check All Check ON/OFF - List Check box Number Check - ON/OFF - ON - Script name - - - - Progress bar - *There are unprocessed processes. - OK button - - - Cancel button - - - Remarks - Remarks Scripts are collectively selected or unselected. When this check box is selected, all the unselected check boxes will become selected. When all the check boxes are selected, they will all become unselected. The scripts to be converted are selected. The registered script numbers are displayed. The numbers are set by the user when registering the scripts. The names of the registered scripts are displayed. The names are set by the user when registering the scripts. A comment is displayed when there is a GOTO statement in the script. The progress of the script or project conversion processing is displayed. Click this button to perform the processing. After the processing is complete, the dialog box will be closed automatically. For details, refer to "Table 4.1.3.2(b) Dialog box display timing and relations between each operation." The display timing and corresponding operations, and content of this dialog box are as shown below. Table 4.1.3.2 (b) Dialog box display timing and relations between each operation Display timing Title OK processing Cancellation processing Displayed list When an old FP project is opened Converted to Ruby script When you select scripts and click [OK], the script files will be converted. When no scripts are selected, you cannot click [OK]. When you select [Convert to Ruby script...] Starts FANUC PICTURE without converting the scripts. If clicked during the conversion, the conversion is stopped and the scripts are restored to the state before conversion. Returns to the original screen without performing the conversion. If clicked during the conversion, the conversion is stopped and the scripts are restored to the state before conversion. All the FP scripts registered in the old FP project All the FP scripts registered in the new FP project Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When the conversion is successfully completed, the following dialog box appears. 217/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.2 (b) Script conversion completion dialog box If the conversion fails, the following dialog box appears. The conversion processing is stopped and the same processing as the cancellation processing is performed. Fig. 4.1.3.2 (c) Conversion error dialog box Changing the FP script syntaxes Fig. 4.1.3.2 (d) Example of the changes from a FP script to a Ruby script In the conversion processing from an FP script to a Ruby script, there are "syntaxes not requiring conversion" and "syntaxes requiring conversion." The syntaxes not requiring conversion are as follows. (1) Those that have the same meaning in FP scripts and Ruby scripts (2) Those that are unique to FP scripts but can be used in Ruby scripts without modification Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The syntaxes requiring conversion are as follows. (3) Those that are unique to FP scripts and need modification when used in Ruby scripts 218/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (4) Those that are written differently but have the same meaning in FP scripts and Ruby scripts (5) Those that have a different meaning in Ruby scripts when written in the description method for FP scripts (6) Those that are not necessary in Ruby scripts For (1), operators, etc., fall under this category. Conversion processing is not performed for these syntaxes. Fig. 4.1.3.2 (e) Example in which the same syntax can be used in FP scripts and Ruby scripts (operator) Syntaxes that fall under this category are as follows. Table 4.1.3.2 (c) Syntaxes that can be used without modification in FP scripts and Ruby scripts Arithmetic operators + * / % = && || ! > < <= >= != == << >> | & ^ () NN 0xNN Comparison operator Bitwise operator Operator command Decimal numbers Hexadecimal number Numerical values 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Remainder of division Assignment operator Logical AND Logical OR Logical NOT Less than Greater than Less than or equal to Greater than or equal to Not equal to Equal to Bit shift right Bit shift left Bitwise OR Bitwise AND Exclusive OR Operator command Decimal numerical value Hexadecimal numerical value FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Description Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Syntax Name Operators Category 2 Drawing number Category 1 219/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== NOTE 0 Numbers at the beginning are treated as decimal numbers in FP Script, but in Ruby Script it is treated as octal numbers. Please note that automatic conversion can not be done on this point. For example: If it is described as 0101, it becomes decimal number 101 in FP Script, but in Ruby Script it becomes 101 of octal number, and when converted to decimal number it becomes 65. For (2), symbol variables, etc., fall under this category. Conversion processing is not performed for these syntaxes. Fig. 4.1.3.2 (f) Example of syntaxes that are unique to FP scripts but can be used in Ruby scripts without modification (symbol variable) Variables and constants that fall under this category are as follows. Table 4.1.3.2 (d) Syntaxes that are unique to FP scripts but can be used in Ruby scripts without modification Category 1 Category 2 Syntax Meaning Symbol variables Input variables :temp: INPUT_BVAL INPUT_WVAL INPUT_LVAL INPUT_UBVAL INPUT_UWVAL INPUT_ULVAL INPUT_DVAL READ_VAL Variables/constants Display variables Argument reference variables Constants for arithmetic operation DISP_VAL ARG[0~4] Symbol variables Byte type input variable Word type input variable Long type input variable Unsigned byte type input variable Unsigned word type input variable Unsigned long type input variable Floating point type input variable Long type input variable (Only from line graph control) Floating point type display variable Signed long type argument reference variable The ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter Not-a-number (used in association with FP functions) Variable displayed when an overflow occurs (used in association with FP functions) PI NAN 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name HUGE_VAL Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Variables/constants 220/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Category 1 Category 2 Syntax Meaning EDOM ERANGE Variables for timer activation operation function ERROR_TYPE ERROR_SCRIPT_NO ERROR_FPFUNUC_NO Variables/constants Variables for timer activation operation function ERROR_FPFUNUC_CODE ERROR_MACRO_NO SCREEN_NO FOCUS_NO An argument of an arithmetic operation function is outside the defined range. An arithmetic function operation resulted in an overflow. Type of an error that has occurred in an FP script Number of the FP script in which the error has occurred Number of the FP function in which the error has occurred Error code for the FP function in which the error has occurred Number of the macro variable in which the error has occurred Screen number of the screen being displayed Identification number of the control where the input focus is located For (3), "macro variables" and "function call" fall under this category. The conversion processing is performed, and the syntaxes are replaced by the applicable syntaxes. Although custom macro variables and program macro variables were specified by "#..." in FP scripts, they are specified by comments in Ruby scripts; therefore, they are converted. After the conversion, they are specified by "#[...]". As the method to pass arguments for calling functions, they were specified in the form of "[Argument 1_ Argument 2_ Argument 3]" in FP functions. However, after the conversion processing, they are specified in the form of "Argument 1, Argument 2, Argument 3" according to the Ruby script description rules. Fig. 4.1.3.2 (g) Example in which a syntax unique to FP scripts requires conversion before being used in Ruby scripts (function call) Syntaxes that fall under this category are as follows. Table 4.1.3.2 (e) Syntaxes unique to FP scripts requiring conversion before being used in a Ruby script Syntax Before conversion After conversion Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 #[100] wdpmc(9,500,0) usr_pmc(3,101,2) Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 #[100], #100 wdpmc[9_500_0] usr_pmc[3_101_2] Drawing number Macro variable FP function User function 221/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== NOTE In FP script, even wrong descriptions that enclose arguments of FP function and user function in parentheses, sometimes worked correctly. However, conversion is not done normally because it is not in the correct format. For (4), comment statements, etc., fall under this category. The conversion processing is performed, and the syntaxes are replaced by the applicable syntaxes. Fig. 4.1.3.2 (h) Example of syntaxes that are written differently but have the same meaning in FP scripts and Ruby scripts Syntaxes that fall under this category are as follows. Table 4.1.3.2 (f) Syntaxes that are written differently but have the same meaning in FP scripts and Ruby scripts Syntax Before conversion Comment Return command If statement // RETURN if(decision statement 1){ Processing statement 1 }else if(decision statement 2){ Processing statement 2 }else{ Processing statement 3 } After conversion # return if(decision statement 1) then Processing statement 1 elsif(decision statement 2) then Processing statement 2 else Processing statement 3 end NOTE Ruby script error might occur due to the way of using “return” in ruby script. Please refer to “4.1.10 Return Execution” for details. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For (5), temporary variables fall under this category. The conversion processing is performed, and the syntaxes are replaced by those that perform the same processing. 222/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.2 (i) Example of syntaxes that have a different meaning in Ruby scripts when written in the description method for FP scripts (temporary variables) Syntaxes that fall under this category are as follows. Table 4.1.3.2 (g) Syntaxes that have a different meaning in Ruby scripts when written in the description method for FP scripts Syntax Before conversion After conversion Byte type temporary variable Word type temporary variable Long type temporary variable Unsigned byte type temporary variable Unsigned word type temporary variable Unsigned long type temporary variable BVAL[0~9] WVAL[0~9] LVAL[0~9] UBVAL[0~9] UWVAL[0~9] ULVAL[0~9] Floating point type temporary variable DVAL[0~9] BVAL0,BVAL2,,BVAL9 WVAL0,WVAL2,,WVAL9 LVAL0,LVAL2,,LVAL9 UBVAL0,UBVAL2,,UBVAL9 UWVAL0,UWVAL2,,UWVAL9 ULVAL0,ULVAL2,,ULVAL9 * ".to_f" is added to the right side. DVAL0,DVAL2,,DVAL9 * ".to_f" is added to the right side. For (6), the semicolons at the end of lines fall under this category. They are removed in Ruby scripts as they are not necessary. If two or more statements are described on one line, the semicolon between them is not deleted. Fig. 4.1.3.2 (j) Example of syntaxes that are unnecessary in Ruby scripts (semicolon at the end of a line) Adding a mark to GOTO statements or labels Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name If a GOTO statement is included in an FP script, a mark "[replace goto]" is added to the target command and label, as it is impossible to replace it with an equivalent process in a Ruby script. 223/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.3.2 (k) Example in which replacement is impossible and a mark is added (jump command) Changing the extension to "rb" The ".dat" extension of FP scripts is converted to ".rb," which is the extension of a Ruby script, when the conversion processing is completed. Deleting the debug information Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name If the target script has been set to be debugged the setting is canceled. 224/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.1.4 Syntax Check The syntax check function is provided as a tool to help with the development of Ruby scripts. For the timing and target files of syntax check, refer to "Table 4.1.4 (a) Timing of syntax check and files targeted by it." Table 4.1.4 (a) Timing of syntax check and files targeted by it Timing of syntax check Target script files Select the scripts to be checked in the Script List dialog box and select [Check syntax...]. Selected script files Select [Check syntax...] from the Script Editor menu. Script files being edited If no errors are found as a result of the syntax check, the syntax check result OK dialog box appears. ("Fig. 4.1.4 (a) Ruby script syntax check result OK dialog box") If any errors are found as a result of the syntax check, the syntax check result error dialog box appears. ("Fig. 4.1.4 (b) Ruby script syntax check result error dialog box") Fig. 4.1.4 (a) Ruby script syntax check result OK dialog box Fig. 4.1.4 (b) Ruby script syntax check result error dialog If you select "Yes" in the syntax check result error dialog box, the error log file appears in a separate window. 4.1.4.1 Syntax Check from the Script Editor Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name To perform a syntax check from the Script Editor, select [Check syntax...] from the Script Editor menu. For the content of the syntax check, refer to "4.1.4.2 Content of the Syntax Check." 225/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== All the buttons on the Script Editor are disabled while the syntax check is being executed. (For the Script Editor, refer to "4.1.2 Enhancement of Script Editor Functions.") 4.1.4.2 Content of the Syntax Check The following are examples of cases in which a syntax check error occurs. A closing bracket is missing or an if statement is not closed. The string specified in a here document is not described. A double-byte space is in a portion other than a comment. Four or more symbols (@, =, etc.) appear consecutively. A variable name starts with a number. NOTE The following content will not cause a syntax check error due to the specification of Ruby. - An unknown function is described. - A new line is started in the middle of a function name or variable name. - The number of arguments of a function definition is incorrect. For the syntaxes of Ruby scripts, refer to the references, etc. for Ruby scripts. 4.1.5 Checking for Characters Unavailable for Script Symbol With the addition of Ruby scripts, certain symbols can no longer be used in a PMC symbol name or constant symbol name. If use the symbol with unavailable characters in script, error occurs when making the mem file. For unavailable characters, refer to “Table 4.1.5 (a) Symbol name specifications (Script)”. Table 4.1.5 (a) Symbol name specifications（Script） Type Ruby script Available characters Characters that are available but not recommended(※) Unavailable characters FP script A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 _ ’()?‘|~@ #{}[];:,!”&*+-<=>/^¥$.% Blank, double-byte characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 _ !”’&()*+-<>?/^‘|~ ¥$.@ #{}[];:,=% Blank, double-byte characters ※The characters not recommended by IEC61131-3(Gauge for PLC) . Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name There are available characters for symbol in function of controls even in unavailable characters for symbol in scripts. For available characters for symbol in function of controls, Refer to ”Table 4.1.5(b) Symbol name specifications(Control)”. 226/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 4.1.5 (b) Symbol name specifications（Control） Type Function of control Available characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 _!”’&()*+-<=>?/^‘|~ ¥$.@#{}[];: ,% Blank, double-byte characters Unavailable characters 4.1.6 MEM File Creation You can create the MEM file by selecting [OK] in the MEM file creation dialog. MEM file creation dialog box Select [OK]. Error check MEM file creation processing The MEM file creation processing completes. MEM file Fig. 4.1.6 (a) Overall image of MEM file creation If an FP function listed in "Table 4.1.6 (a) List of FP functions that cannot be used in a timed script" is used in a timed script, an error log will be output. The MEM file creation failure dialog box appears. Select [Yes] to display the error log content. Table 4.1.6 (a) Function name Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Reads the program information Reads the skip position of a controlled axis Reads the servo delay amount of a controlled axis Reads the acceleration/deceleration delay amount for a controlled axis Reads CNC status information Reads tool offset amount Reads work zero offset Reads parameter Reads setting parameter Reads pitch error compensation data Drawing number rdproginfo skip srvdelay accdecdly statinfo rdtofs rdzofs rdparam rdset rdpitchr List of FP functions that cannot be used in a timed script Description 227/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Function name Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Reads diagnostics data Reads tool life management data (tool group number) Reads tool life management data (number of tool groups) Reads tool life management data (number of tools) Reads tool life management data (tool life) Reads tool life management data (tool life counter) Reads tool life management data (tool length compensation number 1) Reads tool life management data (tool length compensation number 2) Reads tool life management data (tool radius compensation number 1) Reads tool life management data (tool radius compensation number 2) Reads tool life management data (tool information 1) Reads tool life management data (tool information 2) Reads tool life management data (tool number) Writes path index (multi-path system) Reads P-CODE variable Writes P-CODE variable Reads path index (multi-path system) Writes tool offset amount Writes setting parameter Reads custom macro variable Writes custom macro variable Reads operator's message Reads program directory Deletes specified program Searches for specified program Reads the program being executed Reads D-RAM memory usage Reads tool offset amount (specified indirectly) Writes tool offset amount (specified indirectly) Reads custom macro variable (specified indirectly) Writes custom macro variable (specified indirectly) Deletes specified program (specified indirectly) Searches for specified program (specified indirectly) Reads setting parameter (specified indirectly) Writes setting parameter (specified indirectly) Reads P-CODE variable (specified indirectly) Writes P-CODE variable (specified indirectly) Reads the absolute position of a controlled axis (type 2) Reads the relative position of a controlled axis (type 2) Presets the calendar/clock Reads the CNC alarm Reads program directory (2) Increments/decrements the rdprgdir2 display pointer Copies the variable data Reads manual overlapped motion value Reads operator's message (2) Reads/sets the control property Switches the screen Reads the cursor number Writes the cursor number Reads the actual feed rate (F) of a controlled axis (3) Drawing number diagnoss rdgrpid rdngrp rdntool rdlife rdcount rd1length rd2length rd1radius rd2radius t1info t2info toolnum setpath rdpmacro wrpmacro getpath wrtofs wrset rdmacro wrmacro rdopmsg rdprgdir progdel progsrch rdexecprog rdmemsize idrdtofs2 idwrtofs idrdmac idwrmac idprogdel idprogsrch idrdset2 idwrset idrdpmac2 idwrpmac2 absolute2 relative2 settimer rdalminfo rdprgdir2 setrdprgtop copyval movrlap rdopmsg2 setproperty swscreen rdcursor wrcursor actf3 228/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Function name Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Reads the absolute position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the machine position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the relative position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the distance-yet-to-go of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the skip position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the servo delay amount of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the acceleration/deceleration delay amount for a controlled axis (type 3) Reads tool offset amount (type 3) Reads work zero offset (type 3) Reads manual overlapped motion value (type 3) Writes the tool management data Deletes the tool management data Scrolls the message Inputs/outputs text messages Writes parameters Reads PMC (bit) (specified indirectly) Writes PMC (bit) (specified indirectly) Reads PMC (1/2/4 bytes) (specified indirectly) Writes PMC (1/2/4 bytes) (specified indirectly) Reads PMC arbitrary bit length Writes PMC arbitrary bit length Reads the array type record variable data Reads the array type record variable bit data Writes the array type record variable data Writes the array type record variable bit data Copies the array type record variable data Writes the array index number Reads the array type record variable arbitrary bit data Writes the array type record variable arbitrary bit data Changes the number of decimal places of the control Changes the maximum value of the control Changes the minimum value of the control Reads the error code Sets the error code Determines if it is NaN Calculates the arc cosine Calculates the arcsine Calculates the arctangent Calculates the arctangent (type 2) Rounds up to the nearest integer Calculates the cosine Calculates the hyperbolic cosine Calculates an exponential function Calculates the absolute value of a floating-point number Discards decimal places Calculates the remainder of a floating-point number Reads the mantissa part of a floating-point number Reads the exponent part of a floating-point number Calculates the product of 2 raised to a power Calculates the natural logarithm Calculates the common logarithm Drawing number absolute3 machine3 relative3 distance3 skip3 srvdelay3 accdecdly3 rdtofs3 rdzofs3 movrlap3 wrtool deltool scroll chgtxtmsg wrparam idrdpmcb idwrpmcb idrdpmc idwrpmc rdpmcbr wrpmcbr idxrdval idxrdvalb idxwrval idxwrvalb idxmvval idxwridx idxrdvalbr2 idxwrvalbr2 setdecimal setmaxlimit setminlimit errno seterrno isnan acos asin atan atan2 ceil cos cosh exp fabs floor fmod frexp_mantissa frexp_exponent ldexp log log10 229/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Function name Description modf_integer modf_decimal pow sin sinh sqrt tan tanh settenkeypos str_keyinput 4.1.7 Reads the integer part of a floating-point number Reads the fractional part of a floating-point number Calculates the power Calculates the sine Calculates the hyperbolic sine Calculates the square root Calculates the tangent Calculates the hyperbolic tangent Changes the ten key display position Key input Debug Function The same debug function as that for the FP script is provided in Ruby script as a tool to help with script development. In this subsection, only the differences from the debugging function of FP script are described. 4.1.7.1 Setting the Break Types When debugging Ruby scripts, select "Specified steps of specified scripts" for "Break occurs at:" and set the breakpoints and break conditions. If you select "First and last step of all scripts" or "All steps of all scripts," debugging of Ruby scripts cannot be performed. For FP scripts, debugging can be performed with any break type settings, as before. 4.1.7.2 [Debug settings] Dialog Box Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In the [Debug settings] dialog box, you can set breakpoints in Ruby scripts, as well as in FP scripts. For the [Debug settings] dialog box, refer to "Fig. 4.1.7.2 (a) [Debug settings] dialog box (scripts other than timed scripts)" and "Fig. 4.1.7.2 (b) [Debug settings] dialog box (timed scripts)." 230/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.7.2 (a) [Debug settings] dialog box (scripts other than timed scripts) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.7.2 (b) [Debug settings] dialog box (timed scripts) 231/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 4.1.7.2 (a) Changes made to the [Debug setting] dialog box Before change After change Location - Contents of the script list Display contents of the script list on the [Timed script] tab - Setting breakpoints - - Contents of the debug list [Debug operation signal] combo box on the [Script called from object] tab [Debug operation signal] combo box on the [Timed script] tab Settings for [Variable display language setting] [Debug setting file operation] combo box - The display also includes Ruby scripts and displays them in order of script number. (Refer to "Contents of Script List." All the scripts registered as timed scripts in the All the FP scripts with script numbers Script List are displayed. 900 to 999 are displayed. (Refer to "Contents of Script List." FP script: Set by the step address Set by the step address. Ruby script: Set by the line number (Refer to "Breakpoint setting.") The contents set in Ruby scripts are also displayed. The contents set in FP scripts are The Display Variable field has been added. displayed. This field is blank for FP scripts as display variables cannot be set for FP scripts. (Refer to "Contents of the debug list.") Only WORD type and DWORD type symbols All registered symbols are displayed. are displayed. Editable. Not editable. FP scripts are displayed in order of script number. All registered symbols are displayed. Editable. - Only WORD type symbols are displayed. Not editable. - (No setting item) - - The font used for displaying temporary variables can be set by each multi-language key. Only WORD type symbols are displayed. Not editable. All registered symbols are displayed. Editable. - Contents of the script list Ruby scripts are displayed in addition to FP scripts. Scripts are displayed in order of script number, as in the case of the Script List dialog box. On the [Timed script] tab, all the scripts registered as timed scripts are displayed in the script list. Fig. 4.1.7.2 (c) Script list Setting breakpoints In FP scripts, breakpoints are set by the step addresses. In Ruby scripts, they are set by line numbers including comment lines and blank lines. NOTE Breaks do not occur if a comment line or blank line is specified as a breakpoint. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.7.2 (d) Breakpoint setting 232/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Contents of the debug list In addition to the step address, condition of arguments, condition of execution count, and debug target enable signal that were displayed for FP scripts, the temporary variables that are output during the debug execution when the break occurs (Display Variable) are displayed separated by commas. This field is displayed for Ruby scripts when the variables are set; however, it is always left blank for FP scripts because these variables cannot be set for FP scripts. For how to set the display variables, refer to "4.1.7.3 [Break detail settings] Dialog Box." Fig. 4.1.7.2 (e) Breakpoint setting Debug operation signal / Debug setting file operation signal combo box In the [Debug operation signal]/[Debug setting file operation signal] combo box, where all the symbols registered in FP Script, only WORD type symbols are displayed in Ruby Script. DWORD type symbols are also displayed only in the [Debug operation signal] combo box, which is displayed when the [Script called from object] tab is selected. These combo boxes cannot be edited. Fig. 4.1.7.2 (f) Debug operation signal pull-down contents Changes made to the debug screen for Ruby scripts depending on the debug operation signal setting When performing step execution when debugging Ruby scripts, create the debug setting file by setting a DWORD type symbol for the debug operation signal. When using this debug setting file, the [STEP] button appears in the debug window when debugging Ruby scripts. For information on the debug window, refer to "Debug Window and Log Output ." For detailed information on the debug operation signal, refer to "4.1.7.5 Extension of the Debug Signal." When breakpoints in Ruby scripts are enabled and a WORD type symbol is set as the debug operation signal, a warning appears when [Output debug setting file...] is selected in the [Debug setting] dialog box. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Warning dialog box Drawing number Fig. 4.1.7.2 (g) 233/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Select [OK] to continue creation of the debug setting file. Select [Cancel] to stop creation of the debug setting file. Table 4.1.7.2 (b) Output content of the new warning displayed at the time of debug setting file output Warning message Output timing How to cancel the warning Target script Ruby script STEP execution cannot be performed because the debug operation signal symbol in the script called from object is WORD. When the break points in the Ruby script set as the script called from object are enabled and a WORD type symbol is set as the debug operation signal. Set a DWORD type symbol as the debug operation signal. Only for Ruby scripts 4.1.7.3 [Break detail settings] Dialog Box To set the break conditions, double-click the target line of the step list of the break list in the [Debug settings] dialog box to display the [Break detail settings] dialog box. The script type is displayed in the title of this dialog box. For Ruby scripts, temporary variables to be output during the debug execution can be specified in addition to the break conditions. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.7.3 (a) [Break detail settings] dialog box (Ruby script) 234/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Location Table 4.1.7.3 (a) Changes made to the [Break detail settings] dialog box FP script Ruby script Specification of [Condition of Specify inside the ( arguments] ) separated by commas. [Debug target enable signal] Only BOOL type symbols are displayed. combo box Not editable. Specification of temporary Cannot be specified (same as the previous variables ([Display variable]) dialog box). Up to 10 variables to be output by the CNC can be specified. *It is not required to specify these variables. Specification of the condition of arguments The condition of arguments is set in [Condition of arguments] in the [Break detail settings] dialog box, as in the existing dialog box. However, the method for specifying argument reference variables has been changed to surround them in round brackets and separate each of them by a comma. If the specification of the condition of arguments is incorrect, an error occurs when [Output debug setting file...] is selected in the [Debug settings] dialog box. Fig. 4.1.7.3 (b) The debug setting file output error dialog boxes Setting of the temporary variables to be displayed To output temporary variables to the debug window log file when the break occurs, set the variable names in Display Variable 1 through 10 in the [Break detail settings] dialog box. 4.1.7.4 Debug Window and Log Output Debug window Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When the specified break conditions are satisfied, the debug window is displayed if the log file output signal is 0 and the debug target is something other than timer scripts. 235/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Ruby script number and the number of the line at which a break occurred are displayed. The values of the specified temporary variables are displayed in the specified font. The execution history is displayed using line numbers. The [CONTINUE] button shrinks and the [STEP] button is displayed. Fig. 4.1.7.4 (a) Debug window in the "Small(14inch)" font (extension signal ON) Ruby script number and the number of the line at which a break occurred are displayed. The values of the specified temporary variables are displayed in the specified font. The execution history is displayed using line numbers. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.7.4 (b) Debug window in the "Small(14inch)" font (extension signal OFF) 236/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Ruby script number and the number of the line at which a break occurred are displayed. The values of the specified temporary variables are displayed in the specified font. The [STEP] button is displayed. Fig. 4.1.7.4 (c) Debug window in the "Big(9inch)" font (extension signal ON) - Page 1 The execution history is displayed using line numbers. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.1.7.4 (d) Debug window in the "Big(9inch)" font (extension signal ON) - Page 2 237/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Ruby script number and the number of the line at which a break occurred are displayed. The values of the specified temporary variables are displayed in the specified font. Fig. 4.1.7.4 (e) Debug window in the "Big(9inch)" font (extension signal OFF) - Page 1 The execution history is displayed using line numbers. Fig. 4.1.7.4 (f) Debug window in the "Big(9inch)" font (extension signal OFF) - Page 2 Table 4.1.7.4 (a) List of differences between the debug window contents FP script Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 step address Ruby script RBS# Line number 65535 is displayed for the debug information after execution of the last line. Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 FPS# Drawing number Displayed content Item name at the beginning Execution history or breakpoints 238/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== FP script Ruby script General Only the variables specified in [Display variable] in the [Break detail settings] dialog box are displayed. Variable name and variable value are divided by a colon ":". When the number of variables specified in [Display variable] is less than 10, "-:-" is displayed in the line for the unset items. - Content displayed for variable names Characters are left-aligned up to eight characters. When the variable name has more than eight characters, the eighth and subsequent characters are abbreviated as "˜". Content displayed for variable values Up to 56 characters are displayed for the "Small(14inch)" font, and 26 characters for the "Big(9inch)" font, aligned to the left. The portion exceeding the display range is abbreviated as "˜". If variables exist in the script but are not defined, they are displayed as nil. When no variables exist in the script, the following is displayed. NoMethodError: undefined method '(variable name)' for (object name) When the extension signal is ON [STEP] button [COUNT] button When the extension signal is OFF [CONT.] button When the extension signal ls ON [STEP] button [CONT.] button [PG-DW] button [PG-UP] button When the extension signal ls OFF [CONT.] button [PG-DW] button [PG-UP] button Buttons in ‘Small(14inch) ’font [CONTINUE] display button - [CONT.] button [PG-DW] button [PG-UP] button Buttons in ‘Big(9inch) ’font display 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created - Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page - Name All the temporary variables are displayed. Temporary variables - Drawing number Displayed content 239/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Changes to the button content and button operations If the extension signal is ON when the debug window for Ruby scripts is displayed, you can select operations with the [STEP] and [CONT.] button. Select [STEP]: The processing proceeds to the following step and the debug window is displayed. Select [CONT.]: The processing proceeds to the next breakpoint and the debug window is displayed. Valid range of the displayed temporary variables The content of the temporary variables displayed when the [STEP] button is selected are those that were set for the breakpoint at which a break occurred before starting the STEP execution. However, if the destination reached after the STEP execution is set as another breakpoint, the content changes to that that was set for the breakpoint at the destination. At this time, even if the settings of the condition of arguments, condition of execution count, and debug target enable signal are different, the break is performed without applying them. Log file output When the specified break condition is satisfied, the log file is output in text format to the memory card in the following cases. When the log file output signal is 1 When the target is timer scripts The output of the log file is the same as the content displayed in the "Small(14inch)" font. Unicode is used as the character code. Log file name The log file name is different for each script type. Table 4.1.7.4 (b) Types and log file names for Ruby scripts Script type Log file name (*) FP script: FPSxxx.nnn Ruby script: RBSxxx.nnn FP script: TFPSxxx.nnn Ruby script: TRBSxxx.nnn Other than timer scripts Timer scripts xxx: Script number nnn: The extension is a three-digit serial number combining numbers starting from 000 and alphabetical letters. Each time the break condition is satisfied, a separate log file is output. When a file with the same name already exists or the log file could not be output to the memory card, the information of the first line of the first three items (FPS#... or RBS#…) is retained without outputting the file, and the debug processing is continued. 4.1.7.5 Extension of the Debug Signal Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name When using the extension signal for the debug operation signal, the debug operation signal is extended to the DWORD type. The content of the extended range is as follows. No change has been made to the content of the first and second byte of the debug operation signal. 240/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 STEP 3rd byte (Input signal) - Upper stage: Signal for the screen display scripts Lower stage: Signal for timer-activated scripts Step execution signal STEP [Category] Input signal [Function] Advance the processing to the next step. [Operation] When this signal is set to 0  1  0, the current debug window is closed and the processing is advanced to the next step. After that, the debug window is displayed again. The following shortcut key also performs the same operation. Shortcut key: MDI key <1> 4.1.8 Changes Due to Edition 8.0 The following changes were made to the [Create project] and [Open project] menu items. Extension The new FP Editor supports the following extensions. Target mode Table 4.1.8 (a) Mode and Extension Correspondence Table Create project Open project Standard display iHMI .fp2 .fp2x .fpp *, .fp2 .fppx *, .fp2x *: Extension for projects created with the old FP Editor. If selected with the new editor, they will be converted. For more information on coversion, refer to "Conversion Function." Error when executing "Open project" When opening a project with FP Editor, if the project is not supported, an error occurs and the project cannot be opened. The [Open project] operation performed by FP Editor will be as follows. Table 4.1.8 (b) Editor and Project Correspondence Table Type of project to be opened Projects created with an old edition of FP Editor Projects created with the new FP Editor Support for [Open project] × Not supported  Supported × Not supported  Supported Operation Open error * Conversion performed Open error * Open * If a script file is operated on directly from Explorer or some other program, a script not supported by the FP Edit or may be included in the project. A script version error occurs for the project and it cannot be opened with the FP Editor. Open error Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name If an attempt is made to use FP Editor to open an unsupported project, an open error occurs and the following dialog is shown. In this case, the project cannot be opened. 241/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.1.8 (a) Project Open Error Dialog Script version error If an attempt is made to use FP Editor to open a project that includes an unsupported FP script, a script version error occurs and the following dialog is shown. In this case, the project cannot be opened. Fig. 4.1.8 (b) Script Version Error Dialog 4.1.9 Other Functions Function name symbol function FP function symbols can be used from Ruby scripts as well. Formats for FP function symbols are shown below. If the format is not followed, an error occurs. Location used Table 4.1.9 (a) FP Function Symbol Formats for the New FANUC PICTURE Symbol format Example Value format symbol FP script End it with “[“ TEST[ Ruby script control action End it with “(“ TEST( Example value rdpmc[5_100_ rdpmc(5,100, If an FP function symbol is already registered at the time of project conversion, the FP function symbol is additionally registered in the format for Ruby script control action. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - - Only one “[“ exists - Arguments are separated with ”_” - Only one “(“ exists - Arguments are separated with ”,” Drawing number - 242/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== FP function for reading and writing character strings and character string variables In Ruby scripts, FP functions (rdstr, wrstr) for reading and writing character strings and character string variables (SVAL0 to SVAL9) can be used. This allows character strings stored in the PMC area, P-CODE variable, or key-in buffer to be read with Ruby scripts by using the FP function for reading character strings (rdstr). Once the character strings are edited within the Ruby script, the character string can be stored in the PMC area, P-CODE variable, or key-in buffer again by using the FP function for writing character strings (wrstr). Additionally, edited character strings can be displayed in the numerical value character string display control. There were no changes to the function specifications for the FP functions for reading and writing character strings. For details, refer to FANUC PICTURE MANUAL (Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0)(A-40712). The following syntaxes can be used in Ruby scripts using the FP functions for reading and writing character strings and character string variables. Syntax Table 4.1.9 (b) Examples of Supported Ruby Script Syntaxes Description Difference compared to FP script temp = rdstr(400, 0, 0, 10, 99, 0) SVAL0 = rdstr(105, 1000, 0, 20, 9, 3000) SVAL1 = SVAL0 + "123" + temp.to_s DISP_VAL = SVAL1 wrstr(300, 10000, 0, 50, 1, 99, 0) Read 10 bytes from the key-in buffer and store in the temporary variable "temp." Yes Read 1 byte each of character strings from R1000 to R1021 and store in the character string variable "SVAL0." Notify D3000 of the processing results. Add "123" to the content of the temporary variable temp and the character string variable SVAL0, then store the resultant character string in character string variable SVAL1. Store the content stored in character string variable SVAL1 in variable DISP_VAL for displaying the numerical value/character string display control. Write 1 byte each of the character string stored in the character string variable SVAL1 to P-CODE variables 10000 to 10049. Yes Character strings can be stored in an arbitrary temporary variable. Character strings can be stored in SVAL0 to 9. Yes The read character string can be edited. No No Syntaxes that are normally supported in Ruby script but that return an error (there is code that cannot be used in the program) when creating MEM in Ruby script using the FP functions for reading and writing character strings and character string variables, and response examples are shown below. Table4.1.9 (c) Examples of Ruby Script Syntaxes that Return a Script Error Description 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Store temp.to_s + "123" in SVAL1 and store SVAL1 in DISP_VAL. FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Do not omit this part. SVAL0 = SVAL0 + "123" Drawing number DISP_VAL = temp.to_s + "123" Examples of responses to errors Write the script by omitting the "store the character string resulting from adding "123" to the current content of the character string variable SVAL0 in SVAL0." Store the character string resulting from adding "123" to the content stored in the Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Syntax SVAL0 += "123" 243/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Syntax DISP_VAL = SVAL0 + "123" DISP_VAL = "123" Description Examples of responses to errors temporary variable temp directly in variable DISP_VAL for displaying the numerical value/character string display control. Store the character string resulting from adding "123" to the character string variable SVAL0 directly in variable DISP_VAL for displaying the numerical value/character string display control. Store "123" directly in variable DISP_VAL for displaying the numerical value/character string display control. SVAL1 = temp.to_s + "123" DISP_VAL = SVAL1 Store SVAL0 + "123" in SVAL1 and store SVAL1 in DISP_VAL. SVAL1 = SVAL0 + "123" DISP_VAL = SVAL1 Store "123" in SVAL1 and store SVAL1 in DISP_VAL. SVAL1 = "123" DISP_VAL = SVAL1 NOTE If a character string-type temporary variable other than character string variables SVAL0 to 9 is stored in DISP_VAL, an error is returned when the script is executed. Syntax example) temp=”123” DISP_VAL=temp Character string variables are SVAL0 to SVAL9 in Ruby script. If they were described as SVAL[0] to SVAL[9] in an FP script, they are converted to SVAL0 to SVAL9. NOTE SVAL0 to SVAL9 are reserved words indicating "character string variables." Therefore, they cannot be used in Ruby scripts as constants. Normally, Ruby scripts can handle character strings. SVAL0 to 9 exist so that compatibility with FP script syntaxes is maintained when conversion to a Ruby script is performed. For Ruby scripts, we recommend the following usage when reflecting character strings in the control using the FP functions for reading or writing character strings (rdstr, wrstr). [Examples of use in Ruby script] Overview: Periodically reflect the character string written in the PMC in the label control caption. 1 Place the label control "FPLabel1" on the screen. The screen on which it was placed is screen 1. 2 Create a script to read the character string from the key-in buffer control, save it in the PMC, and register it to start from button control. Syntax example) wrstr(105, 1000, 0, 50, 400, 99, 0) # Read characters from key-in buffer and write 50 bytes from R1000 3 Read the character string saved in the PMC, create a script to change the label control caption, and register it as a startup script so that it starts up periodically as a timer-activated script. Syntax example) str = rdstr(105, 1000, 0, 50, 99, 0) # Read 50 bytes from R1000 to variable str. FpSetProperty(1, "FPLabel1", SET_ONCAPTION, str, 0) # Change the caption for "FPLabel1" on screen 1 to the content of the variable str Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE The way of handling the line feed code and the character code that can be used are the same as in FANUC PICTURE MANUAL (Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0)(A-40712) Chapter 24 "Function for handling the string in FP script". 244/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.1.10 Remarks The function to take out partial numerical value of PMC symbol The function to take out partial numerical value of PMC symbol can be used from Ruby scripts as well. However, the address type “C” (08) and “D” (09) occur an error because ruby format treats numbers with an initial “0” as octal. In ruby script, add “0d” which means decimal number in ruby format. Example) FP script: BVAL[0] = :TEST(1):; // Address area of PMC symbol “TEST” is read, and assigned to a variable. Ruby script: BVAL0 = 0d:TEST(1): #Address area is treated as decimal numbers by adding “0d” at the beginning. Devide by zero In ruby script, division by zero causes a system alarm or application error. Please be careful. Return Execution In ruby script, the script execution error occurs if “return” is executed without being functionalized and so on. Fig. 4.1.10 (a) Script Execution Error Dialog Please consider one of the following measures when you use “return”. A) Functionalization (converting to submethod) B) Replacing “return” with “break” Examples of the above-mentioned measures are shown below. [Example of causing the script execution error] “return” is executed without being functionalized and so on. # reading R1000 ret = rdpmc(5,1000,2) # checking the value if( ret == 0 ) then return ### end causing the script execution error Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name # writing R1100 wrpmc(5,1000,2,ret) 245/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Measures] A) Functionalization (converting to submethod) # functionalization (converting to submethod) def dataProc # reading R1000 ret = rdpmc(5,1000,2) # checking the value if( ret == 0 ) then return end # writing R1100 wrpmc(5,1000,2,ret) end # main dataProc() B) Replacing with “break” (when using the repetitive processing) # return -> break loop = 0 while( loop == 0 ) do # setting the end condition loop = 1 # reading R1000 ret = rdpmc(5,1000,2) # checking value if( ret == 0 ) then break end # writing R1100 wrpmc(5,1000,2,ret) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name end 246/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.2 Functional Difference with FP Script 4.2.1 List of FP functions that can be used in Ruby scripts Refer to the following list of functions to find out whether or not an FP function can be used in a Ruby script. NOTE 1 For function specifications and compatible models, see "FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-66284EN_09.pdf)." 2 If an error occurs in the function call from a Ruby script, a pop-up is not displayed within the function, but the information about the error is returned with the return value of the function. When creating a Ruby script, implement the error handling based on the return value of the function. [FP function for CNC window] 8. machine 9. relative 10. distance 11. skip 12. srvdelay 13. accdecdly 14. 15. statinfo alarm 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13        ×                                                     ×      ×      ×         ×      FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script acts absolute ×   Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 6. 7. Event script actf Timer script 5. Startup script rdseqnum Ruby script 4. Reads the CNC system information Reads the program information Reads the program number of the program being executed Reads the sequence number of the sequence being executed Reads the actual feed rate (F) of a controlled axis Reads actual spindle speed (S) Reads the absolute position of a controlled axis Reads the machine position of a controlled axis Reads the relative position of a controlled axis Reads the distance-yet-to-go of a controlled axis Reads the skip position of a controlled axis Reads the servo delay amount of a controlled axis Reads the acceleration/deceleration delay amount for a controlled axis Reads CNC status information Reads alarm status Script call FP script sysinfo rdproginfo rdprgnum Name 1. 2. 3. Created Table4.2.1 (a) List of FP Functions for CNC Window Description Script usability API name Drawing number No. 247/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== rdlife rdcount 28. rd1length 29. rd2length 30. rd1radius 31. rd2radius 32. t1info 33. t2info 34. toolnum 35. 36. 37. 38. setpath rdpmacro wrpmacro loadtorq 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. getpath wrtofs wrset rdmacro wrmacro rdmodal rdopmsg rdprgdir progdel progsrch rdexecprog 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                 × × × × × ×  ×                    ×      ×         × ×        ×      ×      ×      ×      ×      ×      ×    × ×   × ×   × ×  × × ×   × ×   × ×     × × × × ×   ×    × ×          × ×       × × × × ×  × × × × ×    × ×          × ×       FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 26. 27.         Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page rdntool Event script 25. Timer script rdngrp Startup script 24. Reads tool offset amount Reads work zero offset Reads parameter Reads setting parameter Reads pitch error compensation data Reads diagnostics data Reads A/D conversion data Reads tool life management data (tool group number) Reads tool life management data (number of tool groups) Reads tool life management data (number of tools) Reads tool life management data (tool life) Reads tool life management data (tool life counter) Reads tool life management data (tool length compensation number 1) Reads tool life management data (tool length compensation number 2) Reads tool life management data (tool radius compensation number 1) Reads tool life management data (tool radius compensation number 2) Reads tool life management data (tool information 1) Reads tool life management data (tool information 2) Reads tool life management data (tool number) Writes path index (multi-path system) Reads P-CODE variable Writes P-CODE variable Reads abnormal load torque (estimated load torque) data Reads path index (multi-path system) Writes tool offset amount Writes setting parameter Reads custom macro variable Writes custom macro variable Reads modal data Reads operator's message Reads program directory Deletes specified program Searches specified program Reads the program being executed Script call Ruby script rdtofs rdzofs rdparam rdset rdpitchr diagnoss adcnv rdgrpid Script usability FP script 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. Description Name API name Drawing number No. 248/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 56. idwrmac 57. idprogdel 58. idprogsrch 59. idrdset2 60. idwrset 61. idrdpmac2 62. idwrpmac2 63. absolute2 64. relative2 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. settimer rdalminfo msghis rdprgdir2 setrdprgtop 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. copyval movrlap rdopmsg2 setproperty GetFPinfo swscreen rdcursor wrcursor acts2 actf3 80. absolute3 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13    ×    ×  ×  ×    ×    × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×    ×      ×    × × ×       ×    × × ×  × × ×    ×      ×  ×  ×      ×          ×     × × ×  × × × × ×  × × ×  × ×       ×  × ×            × × ×  FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script idrdmac ×  × × Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 55. Event script idwrtofs Timer script 54. Reads CNC status information (2) Reads D-RAM memory usage Reads FP driver version Reads tool offset amount (specified indirectly) Writes tool offset amount (specified indirectly) Reads custom macro variable (specified indirectly) Writes custom macro variable (specified indirectly) Deletes specified program (specified indirectly) Searches specified program (specified indirectly) Reads setting parameter (specified indirectly) Writes setting parameter (specified indirectly) Reads P-CODE variable (specified indirectly) Writes P-CODE variable (specified indirectly) Reads the absolute position of a controlled axis (type 2) Reads the relative position of a controlled axis (type 2) Presets the calendar/clock Reads the CNC alarm Reads the history message display data Reads program directory (2) Increments/decrements the rdprgdir2 display pointer Copies the variable data Reads manual overlapped motion value Reads operator's message (2) Reads/sets the control property Reads the FANUC PICTURE edition Switches the screen Reads the cursor number Writes the cursor number Reads actual spindle speed (S) (2) Reads the actual feed rate (F) of a controlled axis (3) Reads the absolute position of a controlled axis (type 3) Startup script rdncstats rdmemsize GetDrvVersion idrdtofs2 Script call Ruby script 50. 51. 52. 53. Script usability FP script Description Name API name Drawing number No. 249/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 83. distance3 84. skip3 85. srvdelay3 86. accdecdly3 87. 88. 89. rdtofs3 rdzofs3 movrlap3 90. 91. swpath rdspload 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. 98. 99. fetchtool rdtool unfetchtool wrtool deltool scroll chgtxtmsg wrparam Control script relative3 Event script 82. Reads the machine position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the relative position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the distance-yet-to-go of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the skip position of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the servo delay amount of a controlled axis (type 3) Reads the acceleration/deceleration delay amount for a controlled axis (type 3) Reads tool offset amount (type 3) Reads work zero offset (type 3) Reads manual overlapped motion value (type 3) Switches the CNC/PMC path Reads information about the load on the serial spindle Fetches the tool management data Reads the tool management data Releases the tool management data Writes the tool management data Deletes the tool management data Scrolls the message Inputs/outputs text messages Writes parameters Script call Timer script machine3 Script usability Startup script 81. Description Ruby script API name FP script No.   × × ×    × × ×    × × ×    × × ×    × × ×    × × ×        × × × × × × × × ×                                           × × × × ×                 [FP function for PMC window] 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Event script Control script     × × ×     × × ×     × × ×     × × ×     × × × × × × × × × FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge     × × × Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Timer script idwrpmc Startup script 8. Writes PMC (bit) Reads PMC (1/2/4 bytes) Writes PMC (1/2/4 bytes) Reads PMC (bit) Reads PMC (bit) (specified indirectly) Writes PMC (bit) (specified indirectly) Reads PMC (1/2/4 bytes) (specified indirectly) Writes PMC (1/2/4 bytes) (specified indirectly) Ruby script wrpmcb rdpmc wrpmc rdpmcb idrdpmcb idwrpmcb idrdpmc Script call FP script 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Name API name Drawing number No. Table4.2.1 (b) List of FP Functions for PMC Window Description Script usability 250/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Event script Control script Script call Timer script rdpmcbr wrpmcbr Script usability Startup script 9. 10. Description Ruby script API name FP script No.       × ×     Reads the PMC arbitrary bit length Writes the PMC arbitrary bit length [FP function for input/output of array type record variable data] Table4.2.1 (c) List of FP functions for Input/Output of Array Type Record Variable Data idxwrvalbr2 Control script 8. Reads the array type record variable data Reads the array type record variable bit data Writes the array type record variable data Writes the array type record variable bit data Copies the array type record variable data Writes the array index number Reads the array type record variable arbitrary bit data Writes the array type record variable arbitrary bit data Event script idxrdval idxrdvalb idxwrval idxwrvalb idxmvval idxwridx idxrdvalbr2 Script call Timer script 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Script usability Startup script Description Ruby script API name FP script No.                      × × × × × × ×                  ×   [Script-specific FP Functions] Table4.2.1 (d) List of Script-specific FP Functions 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Event script Control script  × × ×                              × ×             × ×   × × × × × × × × × × × ×                           FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Timer script setmaxlimit setminlimit getmacval setmacval errno seterrno isnan acos asin atan atan2 ceil cos cosh Startup script 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Changes the number of decimal places of the control Changes the maximum value of the control Changes the minimum value of the control Reads macro variable Writes macro variable Reads the error code Sets the error code Determines if it is NaN Calculates the arc cosine Calculates the arcsine Calculates the arctangent Calculates the arctangent (type 2) Rounds upward to an integer Calculates the cosine Calculates the hyperbolic cosine Script call Ruby script setdecimal Script usability FP script 1. Description Name API name Drawing number No . 251/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== floor fmod 20. frexp_mantissa 21. frexp_exponent 22. 23. 24. 25. ldexp log log10 modf_integer 26. modf_decimal 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. pow sin sinh sqrt tan tanh set_handler 34. remove_handler 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. settenkeypos rdstr wrstr str_keyinput * sleep Control script 18. 19. Calculates an exponential function Calculates the absolute value of a floating-point number Discards decimal places Calculates the remainder of a floating-point number Reads the mantissa part of a floating-point number Reads the exponent part of a floating-point number Calculates the product of 2 raised to a power Calculates the natural logarithm Calculates the common logarithm Reads the integer part of a floating-point number Reads the fractional part of a floating-point number Calculates the power Calculates the sine Calculates the hyperbolic sine Calculates the square root Calculates the tangent Calculates the hyperbolic tangent Executes the FP script after every specified time period Remove the FP script number setting set in set_handler Changes the ten key display position Function for reading strings Function for writing strings Inputs keys Stops tasks for a specific time period (msec) Event script exp fabs Script call Timer script 16. 17. Script usability Startup script Description Ruby script API name FP script No .       × ×           × ×        ×      ×               × × × ×            ×                        × × × × × ×                         ×          ×  ×   ×     ×       * str_keyinput can only be used in FANUC PICTURE for iHMI version. For the function specification, refer to "Section 1.3 ADDING THE FP FUNCTION" of "FANUC PICTURE for iHMI Virtual MDI/Machine Operator’s Panel Template Specification (A-41700E)". If specifying directly to control, use “_” as a delimiter of arguments instead of “,” (comma). Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Ruby Script-specific FP Functions] 252/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.2.2 Control script 5. Event script 4. Function for showing the message box Function for setting a property Function for reading a property (reading numerical values) Function for reading a property (reading strings) Reads strings corresponding to the language set by the system Timer script MsgBoxShow FpSetProperty FpGetProperty Value FpGetProperty Str LangCaption Startup script 1. 2. 3. Script call Ruby script API name FP script Table4.2.1 (e) List of Ruby Script-specific FP Functions Description Script usability No. × × ×                ×      ×      Using User Functions in Ruby Script User functions can be used in the same way as in FP script. For details on how to use user functions, see "FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-66284EN_09.pdf)." 4.2.3 Specifying Path to FP Function Argument in Ruby Script Unlike FP script, specifying the path to FP function argument is possible in each Ruby script of startup script / event script / control script. However, specifying the paths every time calling multiple FP functions is inefficient for processing, executing FP functions of the same path altogether by switching the paths with setpath function / swpath function like FP script without specifying the path to FP function argument would be recommended. Please switch the paths with swpath function in each Ruby script of asynchronous activation / timer activation like FP script. 4.3 mruby LICENSE DISPLAY 4.3.1 Overview FP driver is equipped with mruby, which is under MIT license. Therefore, the "copyright notice and this license display" for mruby must be shown to the user. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name In the FANUC PICTURE, "copyright notice and this license display" can be displayed by default, but if "No setting" is selected for the License Key Code, the license screen will not be displayed. In this case, "copyright notice and this license display" for mruby must be performed separately to meet the conditions of the MIT license. 253/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.3.2 Diagram The license display screen pops up in the center of the screen. The full MIT license text (MITL.txt) is copied to the memory card when [OUTPUT] is selected or the input <INPUT> key is selected. The license display screen is hidden when [Close] is selected or the cancel <CAN> key is selected. Fig. 4.3.2 (a) License Display Screen (Small Font) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Fig. 4.3.2 (b) License Display Screen (Big Font) 254/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 4.3.2 (c) License Display Screen (iHMI version) 4.3.3 Operation Selecting the license screen display key (set value) multiple times (set value) consecutively within 3 seconds displays the license display screen. The license screen will not be displayed while the message box is displayed. NOTE When switching to another screen while displaying the license display screen and returning to the same custom screen again, whether the license display screen is displayed or not is the same as switching to another screen while displaying the popup screen. Refer to FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 06.2 to less than 08.0) APPENDIX D, "Switching screens while displaying Popup screen" for more detail. 4.3.4 Properties Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The setting for displaying the license display screen is described below. 255/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== License display screen setting The items that can be set in the [Setting of Project] dialog related to the license display screen are shown below. Fig. 4.3.4 (a) Image Diagram of License Display Screen Setting Table 4.3.4 (a) List of License Display Screen Setting Properties Entry type Setting value Initial value Remarks Setting item License Key Code Selection No setting, A to Z, 0 to 9 O License Key Push Count Selection 5 to 10 5 Select the key for displaying the license screen. If "No setting" is selected, the license display screen will not be displayed. Select the push count required for displaying the license screen. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE 1. If "No setting" is selected for the License Key Code, the license screen will not be displayed. In this case, "copyright notice and this license display" for mruby must be performed separately to meet the conditions of the MIT license. 2. The license screen size is nessesary to set the following size or larger if the screen is displayed. Width : 546 Height : 310 256/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 5 LIBRARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED FROM RUBY SCRIPT The following library functions can be used in Ruby script. The library function list is shown from the next chapter. ・CNC window library ・PMC window library ・File operation library ・Serial library ・F-ROM library ・Network library ・ANSI C standard library ・MS-C extended C standard library ・mruby extension library NOTE Ruby script error might occur if “Example” described in "5.3 FUNCTION REFERENCE" including “return” is executed as it is. Please refer to "4.1.10 Return Execution" for details. 5.1 LISTS OF FUNCTIONS The available library functions are listed below. [List of functions related to CNC window library controlled axis/spindle] O = available × = not available cnc_rdsrvspeed 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                                  ×     FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 1.8 Event script cnc_clr5axpls   Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1.7 Timer script cnc_exaxisname2 cnc_rdaxisdata cnc_rd5axmandt cnc_rd5axovrlap Start up script 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Reads dynamic data. Clears or presets relative position of controlled axis. Reads extended axis name (2). Reads controlled axis/spindle-related data. Reads three-dimensional manual feed data. Reads machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed. Clears three-dimensional manual feed pulses. Reads servo actual speed Script call iHMI cnc_rddynamic cnc_wrrelpos Name 1.1 1.2 Applicable equipment Standard display Non PMi-A Description PMi-A API name Drawing number No. 257/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== × 1.10 cnc_rdsrvtcmd Reads servo data TCMD ×  Note  Note Control script Reads servo data TSA Event script cnc_rdsrvtsa Timer script 1.9 Script call Start up script Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No. ×     ×     NOTE Not available in Series 30i/31i/32i-A [List of functions related to CNC window library program] O = available × = not available 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 cnc_rdpdf_inf cnc_rdpdf_curdir cnc_wrpdf_curdir cnc_rdpdf_subdir cnc_rdpdf_alldir cnc_pdf_add cnc_pdf_del cnc_pdf_rename cnc_pdf_slctmain cnc_wrpdf_attr cnc_rdpdf_subdirn cnc_pdf_rdmain cnc_dwnstart4 cnc_download4 cnc_dwnend4 cnc_upstart4 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                                                                                                                                   FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 2.5 Event script cnc_seqsrch cnc_rdpdf_drive  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2.4 Timer script 2.3 Start up script cnc_verify cnc_vrfend Ruby script call iHMI 2.2 Starts output of NC program to be compared. Outputs NC program to be compared. Stops output of NC program to be compared. Searches for a sequence number. Reads program storage drive information. Reads program storage file information. Reads current directory information. Sets current directory. Reads subdirectory information. Reads file list information. Creates a directory or file. Deletes a directory or file. Renames a directory or file. Selects the main program. Changes attributes of a folder or file. Gets the number of folders and files in the specified directory. Gets the main program information. Starts output of NC program to be registered (4). Outputs NC program to be registered (4). Stops output of NC program to be registered (4). Starts reading NC program (4). Name cnc_vrfstart 2.1 Applicable equipment Standard display Non PMi-A Description PMi-A API name Drawing number No. 258/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.36 2.37 2.38 2.39 cnc_wrmdipntr cnc_rdpdf_line cnc_wrpdf_line cnc_pdf_delline cnc_pdf_rdactpt cnc_pdf_wractpt cnc_saveprog_start cnc_saveprog_end cnc_file_cpmv_st art cnc_file_cpmv_po ll cnc_file_cpmv_en d cnc_file_cpmv_re start Control script 2.27 cnc_wrmdiprog cnc_rdmdipntr Event script 2.26 cnc_exeprgname2 Timer script 2.25 Reads NC program (4). Stops reading NC program (4). Reads name of the program being executed. Reads name of the program being executed (full path format). Writes the MDI program. Reads the execution pointer for MDI operation. Writes the execution pointer for MDI operation. Reads a program line by line. Writes a program line by line. Deletes a program line by line. Gets the program execution pointer. Sets the program execution pointer. Starts saving the NC program. Ends saving the NC program. Start copying arbitrary files / folders                                                                 Note  Note  Note  Note                                                        × Get the result of copying arbitrary files / folders End of copying arbitrary files / folders × × Resume copying arbitrary files / folders Ruby script call Start up script cnc_upload4 cnc_upend4 cnc_exeprgname Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 2.22 2.23 2.24 Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No. × NOTE Not available in Series 30i/31i/32i-A [List of functions related to CNC window library data files for NC] O = available × = not available 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Timer script Event script Control script                FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge    Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26    Start up script Reads parameters (range specified). Writes parameters (multiple output). Reads workpiece coordinate system shift. Script call iHMI cnc_rdparar cnc_wrparas cnc_rdwkcdshft Non PMi-A 3.1 3.2 3.3 Applicable equipment Standard display PMi-A Description Name API name Drawing number No. 259/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.7 cnc_rdparanum 3.8 cnc_rdsetnum 3.9 cnc_rdtofsinfo2 Control script cnc_rdmacroinfo Event script 3.6 Writes workpiece coordinate system shift. Reads pitch error compensation data information Reads custom macro variable information. Reads the minimum parameter number, maximum parameter number, and total number of parameters. Reads the minimum setting parameter number, maximum setting parameter number, and total number of setting parameters. Reads tool offset information (2). Timer script cnc_wrwkcdshft cnc_rdpitchinfo Script call Start up script 3.4 3.5 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.                                           [List of functions related to CNC window library tool life management data] O = available × = not available 4.7 4.8 4.9 cnc_rdusetlno cnc_rd1tlifedat2 cnc_rd2tlifedata cnc_wr1tlifedat2 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                                               FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 4.6 Event script cnc_rdmaxtool 4.5  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page cnc_rdmaxgrp 4.4 Timer script cnc_rdusegrpid Start up script 4.3 cnc_wrcountr Script call iHMI 4.2 Reads tool life management data (number of tools, tool life, life counter) (range specified). Writes tool life management data (life counter) (range specified). Reads tool life management data (number of the tool group to be used). Reads tool life management data (maximum number of tool groups that can be registered). Reads tool life management data (maximum number of tools that can be registered in a group). Reads tool life management data (ordinal number of the tool to be used in a group). Reads tool life management data (tool data 1) (2). Reads tool life management data (tool data 2). Writes tool life management data (tool Name cnc_rdtoolrng 4.1 Applicable equipment Standard display Non PMi-A Description PMi-A API name Drawing number No. 260/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== cnc_wrgrpinfo3 cnc_deltlifegrp Control script cnc_wrgrpinfo2 Event script 4.14 cnc_wrgrpinfo Timer script 4.13 data 1) (2). Writes tool life management data (tool data 2). Writes tool life management data (tool group information). Writes tool life management data (tool group information 2). Writes tool life management data (tool group information 3). Deletes tool life management data (tool group information). cnc_wr2tlifedata Script call Start up script 4.12 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 4.11 Description Non PMi-A 4.10 API name PMi-A No.                                    [List of functions related to CNC window library tool management data] O = available × = not available 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 cnc_wrtoolgeom_tlm cnc_rdtoolgeom_tlm cnc_rdtlgeomsize_ext cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext cnc_rdmag_property cnc_wrmag_property cnc_delmag_property cnc_rdpot_property cnc_wrpot_property cnc_delpot_property 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                          × × × ×                         × × × × × ×                                     FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 5.7 5.8 5.9 Event script 5.6  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page cnc_delmagazine cnc_rdmagazine cnc_wrmagazine Timer script 5.4 5.5 Start up script cnc_regmagazine 5.3 Script call iHMI cnc_wrtool_f2 5.2 Registers tool management data as a new entry (when customization data items 21 to 40 are used). Writes tool management data (when customization data items 21 to 40 are used). Registers magazine management data as a new entry. Deletes magazine management data. Reads magazine management data. Writes individual items in magazine management data. Writes tool geometry data. Reads tool geometry data. Reads the tool geometry size data. Writes/Deletes the tool geometry size data. Reads the magazine property data. Writes the magazine property data. Deletes the magazine property data. Reads the pot property data. Writes the pot property data. Deletes the pot property data. Name cnc_regtool_f2 5.1 Applicable equipment Standard display Non PMi-A Description PMi-A API name Drawing number No. 261/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Control script   Event script × × Timer script 5.18 Moves the tool data. Searches the free pot for the oversize tool. Script call Start up script cnc_tool_move cnc_btlfpotsrh Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 5.17 Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.           [List of functions related to CNC window library history data] O = available × = not available 6.5 cnc_rdomhisno 6.6 cnc_rdalmhisno3 6.7 6.8 cnc_rdalmhistry4 cnc_rdomhistry2 6.9 Control script cnc_clearophis cnc_rdalmhisno Event script 6.4 Timer script 6.3 Stops history data sampling. Resumes history data sampling. Reads the number of operation history data items. Clears history data. Reads the number of alarm history data items. Reads the number of external operator's message history data items. Reading the number of alarm history data items (3) Reading alarm history data (4) Reading external operator’s message history data (2) Script call Start up script cnc_stopophis cnc_startophis cnc_rdophisno Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 6.1 6.2 Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.                                                                [List of functions related to the CNC window library data server] O = available × = not available 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 iHMI Start up script Timer script Event script Control script                               FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge      Script call Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Gets file list information. Gets the current folder. Changes the current folder. Makes a folder. Deletes a folder. Non PMi-A cnc_rddsfile cnc_rddsdir cnc_dschdir cnc_dsmkdir cnc_dsrmdir Applicable equipment Standard display PMi-A Description Name 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 API name Drawing number No. 262/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Control script cnc_dsrename cnc_dscopyfile Event script 7.8 7.9 Timer script 7.7 Deletes a file. Gets memory device information on the data server. Changes a folder name or file name. Copies a file on the data server. Script call Start up script cnc_dsremove cnc_rddsdevinfo Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 7.6 Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.                             [List of other functions in the CNC window library] O = available × = not available 8.5 cnc_rdsyshard 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 cnc_sysinfo_ex cnc_rdalmmsg 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15 8.16 8.17 cnc_getdtailerr cnc_statinfo2 cnc_rdcncid cnc_mcdp_create cnc_mcdp_mount cnc_mcdp_unmount cnc_mcdp_mountch k cnc_rdope_lvl cnc_prot_pswinp cnc_prot_pswcan 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                              Note  Note  Note  Note                                                                × × × ×    FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script cnc_rddiagnum Event script 8.4  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page cnc_rddiaginfo Timer script 8.3 Start up script cnc_rdsyssoft3 Script call iHMI 8.2 Reads the maximum number of significant figures and the number of decimal places. Reads the series and version of the CNC system software (3). Reads the diagnostics data information. Reads the minimum diagnostics data number, maximum diagnostics data number, and total number of diagnostics data items. Reads CNC hardware configuration information. Reads CNC system information (2). Reads all alarm messages at once. Gets CNC error details. Reads CNC status information (2). Reads the CNC identification number. Creating a new program storage file (FANUCPRG.BIN) Program storage memory card installation recognition Cancellation of program storage memory card installation recognition Checking the recognition status of the program storage memory card Acquiring the current operation level Setting/changing the operation level Changing the operation level to a level Name cnc_getfigure 8.1 Applicable equipment Standard display Non PMi-A Description PMi-A API name Drawing number No. 263/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== cnc_diagnosr Control script 8.21 cnc_rdprt_data Event script cnc_wrprt_lvl 8.19 Timer script 8.18 Script call Start up script from 0 to 3 Acquiring the change protection level/output protection level of each data item Changing the change protection level/output protection level of each data item Acquiring the use permission information of each data item Reads diagnostic data (range specified) cnc_rdprt_lvl 8.20 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.                             NOTE Not available in Series 30i/31i/32i-A [List of PMC window library functions] O = available × = not available pmc_kpmsiz 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 pmc_rdpmcinfo pmc_rdprmstart pmc_rdpmcparam pmc_rdprmend 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Control script pmc_wrkpm 9.7 Event script 9.6                             Gets PMC unit types.        Reads data from the extended nonvolatile memory. Writes data to the extended nonvolatile memory. Reads the maximum size of the extended nonvolatile memory. Gets PMC address information. Starts reading parameters. Reads parameters. Ends reading parameters.                       × × ×                         Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 9.5 Timer script 9.4 Start up script pmc_get_current_p mc_unit pmc_get_number_o f_pmc pmc_get_pmc_unit_ types pmc_rdkpm 9.3 iHMI pmc_wrpmcrng 9.2 Script call Program storage memory card installation recognition Outputs desired PMC data (specify output range). Gets the unit type of the PMC currently being operated. Gets the number of PMC paths. Name pmc_rdpmcrng 9.1 Applicable equipment Standard display Non PMi-A Description PMi-A API name Drawing number No. 264/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg==     Control script × × ×  Event script Starts writing parameters. Writes parameters. Ends writing parameters. Gets PMC error details. Timer script pmc_wrprmstart pmc_wrpmcparam pmc_wrprmend pmc_getdtailerr Script call Start up script 9.13 9.14 9.15 9.16 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.                     [List of file operation library functions] O = available × = not available _dos_findnext32 10.6 Control script 10.5 Event script Mounts memory card/USB memory. Unmounts memory card/USB memory. Gets memory card information. Gets the state of the USB memory. Finds the first file whose attributes match the specified ones (supports up to 32 characters for file names). Finds the next file whose attributes match the specified ones (supports up to 32 characters for file names). Timer script aux_file_mount aux_file_unmount aux_file_memcinfo aux_file_usbinfo _dos_findfirst32 Script call Start up script 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.           × × × × ×                       ×     [List of serial library functions] O = available × = not available Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 Control script                                        FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Event script Date    Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition Timer script Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 11.6 rs_write Start up script 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 11.5 rs_getc iHMI 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 11.4 Script call Non PMi-A rs_read Initializes the communication device. Terminates communication. Puts one character in the communication buffer. Gets one character from the communication buffer. Writes block data to the communication buffer. Reads block data from the 11.3 rs_open rs_close rs_putc Applicable equipment Standard display PMi-A Description Name 11.1 11.2 API name Drawing number No. 265/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Control script rs_wait Event script rs_status Timer script communication buffer. Tests or manipulates the communication buffer. Gets the status of the communication line and buffer. Waits for a communication event. rs_buffer Script call Start up script 11.9 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 11.8 Description Non PMi-A 11.7 API name PMi-A No.                      [List of F-ROM library functions] O = available × = not available 12.7 12.8 12.9 aux_from_getinfo aux_from_getc aux_from_gets Control script 12.6 Event script Opens the specified F-ROM file. Closes the F-ROM file. Selects data in the F-ROM file. Moves the read pointer. Reads data from the F-ROM file. Reads directory information of a F-ROM file. Reads F-ROM file information. Reads a character from the F-ROM file. Reads a line from the F-ROM file. Timer script aux_from_open aux_from_close aux_from_select aux_from_moveptr aux_from_read aux_from_getdir Script call Start up script 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.             × × × × × ×                               × × ×             [List of network library functions] O = available × = not available 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Event script Control script  ×         × ×           ×     FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Timer script eth_getopen Start up script eth_put eth_putclose iHMI 13.4 Opens the communication line in the transmission mode. Transmits data to the host. Closes the communication line opened in the transmission mode. Opens the communication line in the reception mode. Script call Non PMi-A 13.3 eth_putopen Applicable equipment Standard display PMi-A 13.2 Description Name 13.1 API name Drawing number No. 266/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 13.15 13.16 13.17 13.18 13.19 13.20 13.21 13.22 13.23 eth_rddsmode eth_wrdsmode eth_rdhost eth_wrhost eth_comopen eth_comclose eth_comsend eth_comrecv eth_comstatus eth_put_ftp2 eth_get_ftp2 Control script 13.13 13.14 eth_wrparam Event script 13.12 eth_open_ftp eth_put_ftp eth_get_ftp eth_close_ftp eth_rdparam Timer script 13.11 Receives data from the host. Closes the communication line opened in the reception mode. Opens the FTP communication line. Transmits data to the host. Receives data from the host. Closes the FTP communication line. Reads parameters for the Ethernet function. Writes parameters for the Ethernet function. Reads the mode of the data server. Changes the mode of the data server. Reads the connection host number of the Ethernet function. Sets the connection host number of the Ethernet function. Opens the communication line. Closes the communication line. Sends data. Receives data. Reads the status of the communication line. Transmits data to the host (2). Receives data from the host (2). Script call Start up script 13.7 13.8 13.9 13.10 eth_get eth_getclose Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 13.6 Description Non PMi-A 13.5 API name PMi-A No.     × ×         × × × × × × × × ×                           ×       × × ×                   ×       × × × × ×                               × × × ×           [List of ANSI C standard library functions] O = available × = not available 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 Timer script Event script Control script                                                    FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge      Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Start up script mktime time asctime iHMI Deletes a file. Changes a file name. Generates a temporary file name. Generates a pseudo-random number. Seeds the pseudo-random number generator. Converts local time to calendar time. Gets the current time. Converts the time to a string. Script call Non PMi-A 14.6 14.7 14.8 remove rename tmpnam rand srand Applicable equipment Standard display PMi-A 14.5 Description Name 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 API name Drawing number No. 267/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Event script Control script localtime difftime Timer script 14.12 Converts the time to a string. Converts the time to Greenwich mean time. Converts the time to local time. Computes the difference between two times. Script call Start up script 14.11 ctime gmtime Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 14.10 Description Non PMi-A 14.9 API name PMi-A No.                             [List of MS-C extended C standard library functions] O = available × = not available 15.17 15.18 15.19 15.20 15.21 mkdir open read rmdir tell 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13  ×       ×     × × × ×           ×  ×      ×  ×       ×                                                                                                      FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 15.16 close creat lseek Event script 15.14 15.15 hypot  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 15.13 Timer script 15.12 findclose _dos_getdiskfree getdiskfree _chdrive _getdrive chdir getcwd cabs Start up script 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 15.9 15.10 15.11 findfirstfile findnextfile iHMI 15.4 _dos_findnext Finds the first file whose attributes match the specified ones. Finds the next file whose attributes match the specified ones. Finds the specified file. Finds the next instance of the specified file. Closes the handle for finding files. Acquires disk information. Acquires disk information. Changes the current drive. Acquires the current drive. Changes the current directory. Acquires the current directory. Calculates the absolute value of a complex number. Calculates the square root of the sum of two squares. Closes a file. Creates a file. Moves the file pointer to a specified position. Creates a new directory. Opens a file. Reads data from a file. Deletes a directory. Acquires the current position of the file pointer. Script call Non PMi-A 15.3 _dos_findfirst Applicable equipment Standard display PMi-A 15.2 Description Name 15.1 API name Drawing number No. 268/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Control script  Event script  Timer script Writes data to a file. Script call Start up script write Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 15.22 Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.      [List of iHMI operation library functions] O = available × = not available Control script × × × Event script × × × Timer script Display iHMI common status. Lock / Unlock the screen switch Execute the iHMI application Script call Start up script StatusDisplay ScreenLock ExecuteApp Applicable equipment Standard display iHMI 16.1 16.2 16.3 Description Non PMi-A API name PMi-A No.                [List of mruby extension library] Currently, mruby extension library that can be used is as follows. Please refer to the Ruby reference manual for the specification of the method that can be used in each library. O = available × = not available eql? 5. size 6. 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                    FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script members 4.  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page new Event script mruby-struct Timer script format 2. Script call Start up script This method equivalent to sprintf (3) in C language. This method equivalent to sprintf (3) in C language. Create a new subclass and return it. Returns an array of structure member names. It compares each member and returns ture if it is equal. Otherwise it returns false. Returns the number of members of the structure. 1. 3. Applicable equipment iHMI sprint Description Standard display mruby-sprintf Method Name Extension library name Drawing number No. 269/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== each 12. each_pair 13. select 14. inspect 15. 16. 17. mruby-numeric-ex t 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created chr div Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13                                                                  FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Control script 11.  Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page values_at Event script to_h 10. Timer script values 9. Returns the number of members of the structure. It returns the value of the member of the structure in an array. It returns the value of the member of the structure in an array. Returns the member name and value pair as Hash. Return an array of the value of the member specified by the argument. Repeat for each member of the structure. Repeat execution of block with argument of member name and value pair of structure as argument. Get elements that match the condition expression Returns the contents of the structure as a human-readable string Retrieve the first letter. Arithmetic operator. Returns the quotient. Script call Start up script to_a 8. Applicable equipment iHMI length 7. Description Standard display Method Name Extension library name Drawing number No. 270/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION 1 Use sufficient care when you write NC data which can influence how the machine works. There is a possibility that the NC may run with settings from the wrong NC data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC data is safe and correct when doing so as it can influence how the machine works. The NC data that can influence how the machine works is as follows. It may not all be listed below after new applications or functions are released. NC data that can influence how the machine works: NC parameter, NC program, Tool offset value, Pitch error compensation data, Work zero offset value, Custom macro variables, P-CODE variables, Interference check data, Work coordinate shift value, Tool management data, Tool life management data, Tool geometry size data 2 Use sufficient care when you write PMC data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong PMC signal. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the PMC signal is safe and correct when doing so. 3 The number of times machining programs can be written to the non-volatile memory is limited. You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in cases such as when the machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at each machining. In "High-speed program management," the program is not saved to the non-volatile memory during registration, modification, or deletion of programs. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Make no guarantees about return values and retrieved data when execute not available functions. Drawing number 4 271/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 5.2 RETURN VALUES OF FUNCTIONS CNC window library return values Return value EW_HSSB(-9) EW_HANDLE(-8) EW_VERSION(-7) EW_UNEXP(-6) EW_SYSTEM(-5) EW_PARITY(-4) EW_MMCSYS(-3) EW_RESET(-2) EW_BUSY(-1) EW_BUS(-1) EW_OK(0) EW_FUNC(1) EW_LENGTH(2) EW_SYSTEM2(2) EW_NUMBER(3) EW_ATTRIB(4) EW_DATA(5) EW_NOOPT(6) EW_PROT(7) EW_OVRFLOW(8) EW_PARAM(9) EW_BUFFER(10) EW_PATH(11) EW_MODE(12) EW_REJECT(13) EW_DTSRVR(14) EW_ALARM(15) EW_STOP(16) EW_PASSWD(17) Meaning HSSB communication error (HSSB version only) Wrong handle number Version mismatch between the CNC/PMC and library Abnormal library internal status System error Shared RAM parity error (HSSB version only) Incomplete installation of FANUC driver (HSSB version only) Request for a reset or stop Busy Bus error (HSSB version only) Normal termination The function is not executed or is disabled. Error in the data block length or number of data items System error (HSSB version only) Data number error Data attribute error Data error (the specified program is not found when you are going to delete the program, when you search for the program, or when you start entering NC data). No CNC options Write protection CNC memory overflow CNC parameter error The buffer is empty or full. Path number error CNC mode error CNC processing is rejected. Data server error Alarm state Stopped state Data protection state PMC window library return values Return value Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Version mismatch between the CNC/PMC and library System error Normal termination No PMC Error in the data block length or number of data items Address range error Error in the address type or data type Data error Drawing number EW_VERSION(-7) EW_SYSTEM(-5) EW_OK(0) EW_NOPMC(1) EW_LENGTH(2) EW_RANGE(3) EW_TYPE(4) EW_DATA(5) Meaning 272/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Return value Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 No CNC options The buffer is empty or full. Data protection state Drawing number EW_NOOPT(6) EW_BUFFER(10) EW_PASSWD(17) Meaning 273/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 5.3 FUNCTION REFERENCE [Function reference related to CNC window library controlled axis/spindle] 1.1 Reading dynamic data [Function] cnc_rddynamic [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rddynamic(axis) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (1) Arguments of the cnc_rddynamic function Description Name Type axis Numerical value Axis number Specify the following value: (1) For each axis: 1 to maximum controlled axis number (2) For all axes as axis number: -1 [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (2) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rddynamic function Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array of 8 elements Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error EW_ATTRIB A value other than values from 1 to the maximum controlled axis number or -1 has been specified for the axis number. Dynamic data that has been read For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in read dynamic data." Table 5.3 (3) Values to be stored in read dynamic data Description Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element Numerical value Axis number (1) For each axis: Axis number that has been read (2) For all axes as axis number: -1 Alarm status Numerical value Number of the program being executed Numerical value Program number of the main program Numerical value Sequence number 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Element Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Element 274/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 6th element 7th element 8th element Numerical value Actual feed rate Numerical value Actual spindle speed Array of 4 elements Coordinate information (for each data type) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in the coordinate information (for each data type)." Element 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element Description Table 5.3 (4) Values to be stored in the coordinate information (for each data type) Type Meaning Array of m elements (1) For each axis: m = 1 (2) For all axes as axis number: m = Maximum axis number (Data for the current controlled axes is valid.) Array of m elements Coordinate information (absolute coordinates) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in the coordinate information." Array of m elements Coordinate information (relative coordinates) Array of m elements Coordinate information (distance to go) Coordinate information (machine coordinates) Table5.3 (5) Values to be stored in the coordinate information Element 1st to mth element Type Numerical value Meaning Coordinates (for each axis) The image of the return value that will actually be returned is as follows. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name (1) When 1 is specified for the axis number (For each axis) [ 0, # Return value of the function (0 = EW_OK) [ # Dynamic data that has been read 1, # Axis number 0, # Alarm status 0, # Number of the program being executed 3, # Program number of the main program 0, # Sequence number 0, # Actual feed rate 0, # Actual spindle speed [ # Coordinate information (for each data type) [-2182005], # Coordinate information (absolute coordinates, coordinates where the number of elements is 1) [0], # Coordinate information (machine coordinates, same as above) [0], # Coordinate information (relative coordinates, same as above) [0] # Coordinate information (distance to go, same as above) ] ] 275/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== ] (2) When -1 is specified for the axis number (For all axes as axis number) [ 0, # Return value of the function (0 = EW_OK) [ # Dynamic data that has been read -1, # Axis number 0, # Alarm status 0, # Number of the program being executed 3, # Program number of the main program 0, # Sequence number 0, # Actual feed rate 0, # Actual spindle speed [ # Coordinate information (for each data type) [-2182005, 3233365, 1232230, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ..., 0], # Coordinate information (absolute coordinates, coordinates of the number of elements = maximum number of controlled axes) # (Data for the current controlled axes is valid.) [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ..., 0], # Coordinate information (machine coordinates, same as above) [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ..., 0], # Coordinate information (relative coordinates, same as above) [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ..., 0] # Coordinate information (distance to go, same as above) ] ] ] [Description] Reads different kinds of data that changes with the operation of the NC program at the same time. This function is used for getting data to display the current position screen or the monitoring screen, etc. Relationship between read dynamic data and the functions used for reading individually is as follows. Table 5.3 (6) Relationship between read dynamic data and the functions used for reading individually Data Function used for reading individually Axis number Alarm status Number of the program being executed Program number of the main program Sequence number Actual feed rate Actual spindle speed Absolute position data of controlled axis Machine position data of controlled axis Relative position data of controlled axis Distance to go of controlled axis None alarm rdprgnum rdprgnum rdseqnum actf acts absolute machine relative distance Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The formats of each data item are the same as those shown in "Function used for reading individually". [Example] When -1 is specified as the axis number (axis) and dynamic data for all axes as axis number are read 276/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== ret= cnc_rddynamic(-1) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end # ret[0]: Return value of the function 1.2 Clearing or presetting the relative position of the controlled axis [Function] cnc_wrrelpos [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrrelpos(preset) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (7) Arguments of the cnc_wrrelpos function Type Description Name preset Array of 2 elements Preset data For details on the value to be specified, refer to the following table "Values to be set to preset data." Table 5.3 (8) Values to be set to preset data Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array of m elements (1) Specifies one axis: m = 1 (2) Specifies all axes: m = maximum number of controlled axes Axis number Specify the following value: (1) Specifies one axis: 1 to maximum controlled axis number (2) Specifies all axes: -1 Values to be preset (for each axis) The preset values at the relative position are stored in order starting from the first element of the array. If 0 is specified as the preset value, it will be the origin of the relative position. [Return] The return values from this function are as follows. Table 5.3 (9) Return values from the cnc_wrrelpos function Type Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH The number of elements for the value to be preset (for each axis) is incorrect. EW_ATTRIB A value other than values from 1 to maximum controlled axis number or -1 has been specified for the axis number. EW_DATA The preset value is out of the specifiable range. EW_REJECT Drawing number Numerical value 277/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description NC execution rejected. [Description] Presets (resets) the relative position of the axis specified for the first element of the preset data. [Example] (1) When 1 is specified as the axis number and 20000 is set as the preset value at the relative position of the first axis data=Array.new(1,20000) # Creates an array of the value to be preset (for each axis) (number of elements = 1, preset value = 20000). preset = Array.new preset.push(1) preset.push(data) # Creates an array of the preset data. # 1st element: Axis number = 1 # 2nd element: Values to be preset (for each axis) ret=cnc_wrrelpos(preset) if ret != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end # ret: Return value of the function (2) When -1 is specified as the axis number and the relative positions of the 1st to maximum controlled axis number are all set at once MAX_AXIS=32 # When the maximum number of controlled axes is 32. data=Array.new(MAX_AXIS,0) # Creates an array of the values to be preset (for each axis) (number of elements = MAX_AXIS, preset value = 0). data[0]=20000 # Specifies 20000 as the preset value for the 1st axis (data[0]). data[1]=30000 # Specifies 30000 as the preset value for the 2nd axis (data[1]). data[2]=30000 # Specifies 30000 as the preset value for the 3rd axis (data[2]). data[3]=10000 # Specifies 10000 as the preset value for the 4th axis (data[3]). data[4]=10000 # Specifies 10000 as the preset value for the 5th axis (data[4]). # 0 (origin of the relative position) is specified as the preset value for axes other than the 1st to 5th axes. preset = Array.new # Creates an array of the preset data. preset.push(-1) # 1st element (preset[0]): Axis number = -1 preset.push(data) # 2nd element (preset[1]): Array of the values to be preset ret=cnc_wrrelpos(preset) if ret != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end # ret: Return value of the function 1.3 Reading extended axis name (2) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_exaxisname2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_exaxisname2(type, absolute, num) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 278/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (10) Type Name type Numerical value absolute Numerical value num Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_exaxisname2 function Description Specify the type of axis names to be read. 0: Controlled axis name 1: Spindle name Set whether to specify axes as relative axes or absolute axes. 0: Specifies relative axes. 1: Specifies absolute axes. Specify the number of axes to be read. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Element Table 5.3 (11) Type Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_exaxisname2 function Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value 3rd element Array of n elements (n = number of axes actually acquired) Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH The number of axes (num) is 0 or less. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error. The specified data type (type) is invalid. The number of axes actually read is set. When a value larger than the current number of axes is specified in the num argument The number of currently valid axes actually read is set. When a value smaller than the number of valid axes is specified in the num argument As many data items as the specified number of axes are read, and the number of axes specified in the num argument is set. Array of axis names (up to three characters) The acquired axis name is in the form of an ASCII string. [Description] This function reads as many controlled axis and spindle axis names as specified in (num), starting with the first axis. This function allows the user to specify whether to acquire information from only the current path in the CNC or from the entire CNC. In the absolute argument, whether the information acquisition is limited to the current path (relative) or is performed through the entire CNC (absolute) can be specified. [Example] When the controlled axis name and relative axis are specified and 6 is set as the number of axes to acquire the axis name Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_exaxisname2( 0, 0, 6 ) if ret[0] != 0 then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) end 279/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.4 Reading controlled axis/spindle-related data [Function] cnc_rdaxisdata [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdaxisdata(cls, type, num, len) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (12) Description Numerical value type Array of n elements (up to 4) num Numerical value Specify the class of data to be read. 1: Coordinates 2: Servo 3: Spindle 4: Spindle currently selected 5: Speed Array for which the type of data to be read is specified The following values can be specified according to the value of cls: <cls = 1 (coordinate value)> 0: Absolute coordinates 1: Machine coordinates 2: Relative coordinates 3: Distance to go 4: Handle interrupt amount (input unit) 5: Handle interrupt amount (output unit) 6: Program restart position 7: Distance to go at the time of program restart 8: Block restart position 9: Distance to go at the time of block restart 10: Absolute coordinate value (for offset and graphic screens) 11: Relative coordinate value (for offset and graphic screens) * 0 and 2 follow bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163. 10 and 11 are always equivalent to 0 without following bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163. <cls = 2 (servo)> 0: Servo load meter 1: Load current (%) 2: Load current (A) <cls = 3 (spindle)> 0: Spindle load meter 1: Spindle motor speed 2: Spindle speed (value set according to bit 2 (ASDs) of parameter No. 3799) 3: Spindle speed (value obtained from the spindle motor speed) 4: Spindle load meter (average of values obtained every 250 ms) <cls = 4 (spindle being selected)> * (Same as the specifications as those of cls = 3) <cls = 5 (speed)> 0: Composite feedrate (F) 1: Spindle speed (S) 2: Jog feedrate/dry run feedrate Specify the number of type arrays. len Numerical value Specify the number of axes to be read. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Type cls Drawing number Name Arguments of the cnc_rdaxisdata function 280/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (13) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdaxisdata function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Array of n elements Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Error in the data block length. Alternatively, the number of axes (len) is 0 or less. EW_NUMBER Data attribute error. The specified data class (cls) is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error. The specified data type (type) is invalid. Alternatively, the number of types (num) exceeds 4. EW_NOOPT A required option is not provided. The number of axes actually read is set. Array of various axis- and spindle-related data Array of as many data items as the number of axes specified by "num × len" For details on the value, refer to the following table "Various axis- and spindle-related data." Table 5.3 (14) Type String 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value 3rd element 4th element Numerical value 5th element Numerical value 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Axis name (up to three characters) Axis names are stored in ASCII format. Data Decimal point position of the data When the 4th element (unit of data) explained below is 5 (rpm) or 8 (%), there is no data in decimal positions, and 0 is stored. Unit of data 0: Millimeters (coordinate value) 1: Inches (coordinate value) 2: Degrees (coordinate value) 3: Millimeters/minute (composite feedrate, jog/dry run feedrate) 4: Inches/minute (composite feedrate, jog/dry run feedrate) 5: rpm (spindle speed, spindle motor speed) 6: Millimeters/time (composite feedrate, jog/dry run feedrate) 7: Inches/time (composite feedrate, jog/dry run feedrate) 8: % (load meter, load current) 9: Ampere (load current) Flags Flags are set according to the cls value as follows: <cls = 1 (coordinate value)> #0: Display status 1 = Displayed on the CNC screen 0 = Not displayed on the CNC screen #1: Axis detachment Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1st element Various axis- and spindle-related data Description Name Element Drawing number 3rd element 281/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled #2: Interlock 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled #3: Machine lock 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled #4: Servo off 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled #5: In-position check 1 = Not in the in-position check state 0 = In the in-position check state #6: Mirror image 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled #7 to 31: Not used <cls = 5 (speed)> #0: Spindle speed 1 = Spindle present 0 = Spindle not present #1: Jog feedrate/dry run feedrate 1 = Dry run feedrate 0 = Jog feedrate #2 to 31: Not used <cls = Other> Not used [Description] This function reads axis- and spindle-related data. Specify the class of data to be read in the cls argument, and specify the type of data to be read in a short array (type[]). The number of arrays is specified in the num argument. Up to four types of data can be read at a time. If an attempt is made to read more than four types of data, the EW_ATTRIB error results. The number of axes to be read is specified in the (len) argument. According to the value of data class cls, (len) is set as follows: Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name 1. When cls is set to a coordinate value (=1), servo (=2), or spindle (=3) Data for as many axes as specified in (len), starting with the first axis is read. After the function is executed, if (len) is greater than the number of currently valid axes, the number of actual axes is set to the 2nd element of the return value. If (len) is smaller than the number of currently valid axes, data for as many axes as specified in (len) is read. 2. When cls is set to the selected spindle (=4) or speed (=5) Data for one axis is read at all times. However, if no spindle is selected when the selected spindle is specified, 0 is set to the 2nd element of the return value. The read data are stored in the array of the 3rd element of the return value. The read data is stored in units of the size specified in (len) in the order specified in type[] as follows: (* 3rd element of the return value: Described as axdata) 282/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== type[0] data: axdata[ 0] to axdata[ len-1] type[1] data: axdata[ len] to axdata[ 2×len-1] type[2] data: axdata[ 2×len] to axdata[ 3×len-1] type[3] data: axdata[ 3×len] to axdata[ 4×len-1] Even if the number specified in (len) is smaller than the actual number of axes, data is stored according to the value specified in (len) when the function is called. The following parameters are related to this function: Parameter Nos. 1020, 1025, and 1026 Parameter Nos. 3131, 3132, and 3133 Bits 0, 4, 5, 6, and 7 (MCN, DRL, DRC, DAL, and DAC) of parameter No. 3104 Bits 0 and 1 (NDPx and NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 Bit 2 (ASDs) of parameter No. 3799 Bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163 For details on parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When the coordinate value is specified as the class of data, absolute coordinates (for one data) as the type, and 6 as the number of axes to acquire various axis- and spindle-related data ret = cnc_rdaxisdata( 0, [0], 1, 6 ) if ret[0] != 0 then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) end 1.5 Reading three-dimensional manual feed data [Function] cnc_rd5axmandt [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rd5axmandt() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (15) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rd5axmandt function Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array of 14 Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT No options Related option: Three-dimensional manual feed function Machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed of each controlled axis Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Element 283/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description elements For details on the value, refer to the following table "Three-dimensional manual feed information." Table 5.3 (16) Three-dimensional manual feed information Description Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value 5th element Numerical value 6th element Numerical value 7th element Numerical value 8th element Numerical value 9th element 10th element 11th element 12th element 13th element 14th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Axis number of the first linear axis Axis number of the second linear axis Axis number of the third linear axis Tool tip position of the first linear axis The coordinates of the tool tip are set. The unit for the absolute coordinates of the axis that is set for the 1st element is used. Tool tip position of the second linear axis The coordinates of the tool tip are set. The unit for the absolute coordinates of the axis that is set for the 2nd element is used. Tool tip position of the third linear axis The coordinates of the tool tip are set. The unit for the absolute coordinates of the axis that is set for the 3rd element is used. The number of pulses at tool tip center C1 is set. The unit for the absolute coordinates of the axis that is set for parameter No. 19681 is used. The number of pulses at tool tip center C2 is set. The unit for the absolute coordinates of the axis that is set for parameter No.19686 is used. The number of pulses at tool axis reference position TD is set. The number of pulses at tool axis reference position R1 is set. The number of pulses at tool axis reference position R2 is set. The number of pulses at table reference position VR is set. The number of pulses at table reference position H1 is set. The number of pulses at table reference position H2 is set. [Description] Reads three-dimensional manual feed data. Various types of information items are stored in the 2nd element array of the return value. The unit of the machine axis travel distance is the same as for that of absolute coordinates. The units of td, r1, r2, vr, h1, and h2 differ depending on the value of parameter No. 19697. The unit for the absolute coordinates of the corresponding axis that is set for type1, type2, or type3 is used. Table 5.3 (17) Correspondence between parameters and types Parameter No. 19697 td and vr r1 and h1 r2 and h2 setting 1 2 3 type1 type2 type3 type2 type3 type1 type3 type1 type2 [Example] When three-dimensional manual feed data are to be acquired Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_rd5axmandt() if ret[0] != 0 then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) end 284/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.6 Reading machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed [Function] cnc_rd5axovrlap [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rd5axovrlap(axis) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (18) Name axis Arguments of the cnc_rd5axovrlap function Type Description Numerical value Specifies the axis number for which to read the distance. ALL_AXES: Specifies all axes (ALL_AXES: -1) 1 to m: Specifies one axis (m: Current number of controlled axes) [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (19) Element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rd5axovrlap function Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array of 2 elements Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_ATTRIB The specified axis is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options. Related option: - Three-dimensional manual feed function Machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed of each controlled axis For details on the value, refer to the following table "Information on machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed." Table 5.3 (20) Machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed Element 1st element 2nd element Type Description Numerical value Axis number Numerical value array with number of elements n (n = See the Description column.) Array of machine axis travel distance data n = Maximum axis number when specification of all axes (-1) is made for axis (Data for the current controlled axes is valid). n = 1 when specification of one axis (1 to m (m: current number of controlled axes)) is made for axis. [Description] Reads the machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed. Specify one of the values from 1 to the maximum controlled axis number for each axis or -1 for all axes as axis number in "axis". [Example] When specifying all axes to acquire the machine axis travel distance in three-dimensional manual feed Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_rd5axovrlap( -1 ) if ret[0] != 0 then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" 285/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) end 1.7 Clearing three-dimensional manual feed pulses [Function] cnc_clr5axpls [Syntax with arguments] cnc_clr5axpls(type) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (21) Name Arguments of the cnc_clr5axpls function Type type Numeric al value Description Specify the number of pulses to be cleared. 1: Tool tip center C1 2: Tool tip center C2 3: Tool axis reference position TD 4: Tool axis reference position R1 5: Tool axis reference position R2 6: Table reference position VR 7: Table reference position H1 8: Table reference position H2 -1: All pulses [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (22) Type Numerical value Return value of the cnc_clr5axpls function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER The specified type is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options. Related option: Three-dimensional manual feed function [Description] Clears three-dimensional manual feed pulses. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CAUTION Use sufficient care when you clear the three-dimensional manual feed pulses. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong three-dimensional manual feed pulses. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that clearing the three-dimensional manual feed pulses is safe and correct when doing so. 286/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.8 Reads servo actual speed data [Function] cnc_rdsrvspeed [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdsrvspeed() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (23) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array with m number of elements(m= maximum number of control axes) Return value of the cnc_rdsrvspeed function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_SYSTEM Not available This function cannot be used with iHMI. The value of servo tuning actual speed of each control axis. Only elements from the top of the array that are equal to the current number of control axes are valid. [Description] This function reads the servo tuning actual speed. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Example] MAX_AXIS=32 # When the maximum number of controlled axes is 32. ret = cnc_rdsrvspeed() if ret[0] != EW_OK then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) else for i in 0..(MAX_AXIS-1) do no = 100 + i #[no] = ret[1][i] end end 287/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 1.9 Reads servo data TSA [Function] cnc_rdsrvtsa [Syntax with arguments] cnc_ rdsrvtsa () [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (24) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array with m number of elements(m= maximum number of control axes) Return value of the cnc_rdsrvtsa function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_SYSTEM Not available This function cannot be used with iHMI. Or the version of connected CNC is not supported. The value of the servo data TSA of each control axis. Only elements from the top of the array that are equal to the current number of control axes are valid. [Description] This function reads the value of servo data TSA. [Example] MAX_AXIS=32 # When the maximum number of controlled axes is 32. ret = cnc_rdsrvtsa() if ret[0] != EW_OK then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) else for i in 0..(MAX_AXIS-1) do no = 100 + i #[no] = ret[1][i] end end Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 ： STEP1 series Edition 23.0 or later ： STEP2 series Edition 01.0 or later ： since the first Edition ： since the first Edition ： since the first Edition Drawing number [Available CNC] FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Plus FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus 1.10 Reads servo data TCMD 288/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Function] cnc_rdsrvtcmd [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdsrvtcmd() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (25) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array with m number of elements(m =maximum number of control axes) Return value of the cnc_rdsrvtcmd function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_SYSTEM Not available This function cannot be used with iHMI. Or the version of connected CNC is not supported. The value of the servo data TCMD for each control axis. Only elements from the top of the array that are equal to the current number of control axes are valid. [Description] This function reads the value of servo data TCMD. [Example] MAX_AXIS=32 # When the maximum number of controlled axes is 32. ret = cnc_rdsrvtcmd() if ret[0] != EW_OK then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0 ) else for i in 0..(MAX_AXIS-1) do no = 100 + i #[no] = ret[1][i] end end Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 ： STEP1 series Edition 23.0 or later ： STEP2 series Edition 01.0 or later ： since the first Edition ： since the first Edition ： since the first Edition Drawing number [Available CNC] FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Plus FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus 289/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [CNC window library program-related function reference] 2.1 Starting output NC program to be compared [Function] cnc_vrfstart [Syntax with arguments] cnc_vrfstart() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (26) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_vrfstart function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Start command for output of NC program to be compared has been rejected. This code is returned under one of the following conditions. - The CNC is performing other command processing (downloading, collating, uploading, or program number list reading). - Background editing is in progress or the MDI mode has been entered. - Alarm PW0000 or alarm PS0101 is issued. [Description] It is possible to compare an NC program already registered with the CNC and a program that is output by the application program. This function requests CNC to start comparing the NC programs. [Example] Refer to example of "Output NC program to be compared (cnc_verify function)." 2.2 Outputting NC program to be compared [Function] cnc_verify [Syntax with arguments] cnc_verify(data, number) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (27) Name Type data number Numerical value Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_verify function Description NC program data (ASCII string) Character number of NC program data (1 to 256) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 290/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (28) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_verify function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC The start-up procedure for output of the NC program to be compared has not been completed on the CNC, or no start-up command has been issued. EW_LENGTH The specified data length is invalid. EW_DATA Incorrect NC program data. This code is returned under one of the following conditions. - A difference was detected during the comparison process. - The program on the CNC that is to be compared has been selected in the foreground. - A character that cannot be used in NC programs has been detected. - When TV check is enabled, a block that includes odd characters (including "LF" at the end of the block) is detected. [Description] Outputs the NC program to be compared with one already registered with the CNC. If data cannot be output because the CNC data processing is delayed, this function waits in the library until data can be output. Moreover, "Stopping output NC program to be compared. (cnc_vrfend function)" is returned as an error of the data for several-times before the end. The following shows the comparison procedure. Fig. 5.3 (a) Procedure for outputting the NC program to be compared [Example] O1234 program O1234 ; G1F0.3W10.; M30; % When the above program and an NC program already registered with the CNC are compared Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name data = "¥nO1234¥nG1F0.3W10.¥nM30¥n%" number = 27 291/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== ret = cnc_vrfstart() if ret == EW_OK then ret = cnc_verify(data, number) end cnc_vrfend() 2.3 Stopping output of NC program to be compared [Function] cnc_vrfend [Syntax with arguments] cnc_vrfend() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (29) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_vrfend function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC The start-up procedure for output of the NC program to be compared has not been completed on the CNC, or no start-up command has been issued. EW_DATA The previously output NC program data is incorrect. This code is returned under one of the following conditions. - A difference was detected during the comparison process. - The program on the CNC that is to be compared has been selected in the foreground. - A character that cannot be used in NC programs has been detected. - When TV check is enabled, a block that includes odd characters (including "LF" at the end of the block) is detected. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Sends notification of the end of the comparison of the NC programs to the CNC. '%' must be output as NC program data before calling this function. An error (such as EW_DATA or EW_OVRFLOW) in the cnc_verify function may be returned by this function. Control is not returned from this function until the registration of data output by the cnc_verify function is completed. Control is not returned from this function until the CNC comparison process completes. The comparison process is completed even if the return code is not 0. [Example] Refer to example of "Output NC program to be compared (cnc_verify function)." 292/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.4 Searching for a sequence number [Function] cnc_seqsrch [Syntax with arguments] cnc_seqsrch(seq_no) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (30) Name Arguments of the cnc_seqsrch function Type seq_no Description Numerical value Sequence number [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (31) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_seqsrch function Type Numerical value Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA The specified sequence number does not exist. EW_MODE CNC mode error The function can only be used in MEM mode. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. - Being edited - No machining program is registered. [Description] Searches the machining program currently selected in the CNC for the sequence number specified by "seq_no". 2.5 Reading program storage drive information [Function] cnc_rdpdf_drive [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_drive() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (32) Numerical value 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1st element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_drive function Name Type Drawing number Element 293/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element 2nd element Element 1st element 2nd element Type Description Array Program storage drive information For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in program storage drive information." Table 5.3 (33) Type Numerical value Array Values to be stored in program storage drive information Description Number of drives that have been read Up to 16 drives can be returned. Drive name string As many drive name strings as drives that have been read are stored. (Array[0] to Array[maximum number of drive names - 1]) is valid. Up to 8 characters can be used as a drive name. [Description] Reads the program storage drive information. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. [Example] When the first drive name string that has been read is displayed ret_values = cnc_rdpdf_drive() if ret_values [0] == EW_OK then array = ret[1] # Program storage drive information drive_name = array[1] # Drive name string if array[0] > 0 then MsgBoxShow(drive_name[0], 0) # First drive name string that has been read end end 2.6 Reading program storage file information [Function] cnc_rdpdf_inf [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_ inf(drive, size_kind) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (34) Name Type drive String size_kind Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_rdpdf_inf function Description Drive name string Up to 8 characters can be used. Unit of data 0: Page 1: Byte 2: kByte(1kByte=1024Byte) 3: MByte(1MByte=1024kByte) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 294/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (35) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_inf function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA The drive specified by the data "drive" does not exist. Program storage drive information For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in program storage drive information." Table 5.3 (36) Values to be stored in program storage drive information Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value 3rd element 4th element Numerical value Numerical value Program storage in use Total program storage The unused program storage is obtained by (2nd element - 1st element). Number of directories being used Total number of directories The number of unused directories is obtained by (4th element - 3rd element). [Description] Reads the information about the program storage file on the specified drive. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. [Example] When the program storage drive information in the "CNC_MEM" drive is read drive = "CNC_MEM" # Name of the drive to be read size_kind = 1 # Unit of data (byte) ret_values = cnc_rdpdf_inf( drive, size_kind ) if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0 ) end 2.7 Reading current directory information [Function] cnc_rdpdf_curdir [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_curdir(dir_kind) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (37) Name Type dir_kind Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_rdpdf_curdir function Description Type of current directory to be read 1: Foreground 2: Background Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. 295/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (38) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element String Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_curdir function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_ATTRIB Incorrect data "dir_kind". Information of the acquired current directory String of the read current directory drive + directory Up to 210 characters can be used. If a problem has occurred, null characters are set. [Description] Reads current directory information. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. [Example] When the foreground current directory information is read dir_kind = 1 ret = cnc_rdpdf_curdir(dir_kind) #[100] = ret[0].to_i MsgBoxShow(ret[1],0) 2.8 Setting the current directory [Function] cnc_wrpdf_curdir [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrpdf_curdir(dir_kind, dir_name) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (39) Name Arguments of the cnc_wrpdf_curdir function Type Description dir_kind Numerical value dir_name Numerical value Type of current directory to be set 1: Foreground 2: Background String of the current directory drive + directory to be set Up to 210 characters can be used. [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (40) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrpdf_curdir function Type Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_ATTRIB Incorrect data "dir_kind". Drawing number Numerical value 296/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description EW_DATA The directory specified by the data "dir_name" does not exist. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. [Description] Sets the current directory. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. 2.9 Reading subdirectory information [Function] cnc_rdpdf_subdir [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_subdir(num_dir, path, req_num) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (41) Name Type num_dir Numerical value String path req_num Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_rdpdf_subdir function Description Maximum number of subdirectories to be read(1 to 128) Path name character string Set the drive name + directory name string. Up to 212 characters can be used. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following path as the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" Required entry number "req_num" sets the ordinal number of the subdirectory for which you want to get information. Normally, start with 0 and increment the number by 1. (The first subdirectory is 0.) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 297/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (42) Type Element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_subdir function Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Array of n elements (n = number of subdirectories that have actually been read) Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY The CNC is in use. EW_NUMBER Data error No subfolder for the required entry number (req_num) exists. EW_DATA Data error Incorrect format for the path name character string "path". EW_PROT Protect The specified directory cannot be displayed. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. EW_LENGTH “Maximum number of subdirectories to be read” is not 1 to 128. Number of subdirectories that have actually been read Subdirectory information Subdirectory information for the number of “Number of subdirectories that have actually been read” is stored in an array. For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in the subdirectory information." Table 5.3 (43) Type Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element String Values to be stored in the subdirectory information Description Whether a subdirectory exists or not Whether a subdirectory (sub-subdirectory) exists or not in the subdirectory that has been output is expressed using a bit. #0 : 0 = No subdirectory exists. 1 = A subdirectory exists. #1 : 0 = No file exists. 1 = A file exists. Subdirectory name string Up to 36 characters can be used. [Description] Reads information on subdirectories in the specified directory. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. When subdirectory editing such as creation or deletion is performed during the time from the first request until the last request, data is returned based on the data present when a request is made. [Example] When up to 5 pieces of subdirectory information in the "//CNC_MEM/USER/" path are read and the first piece of the information is returned Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 # Maximum number of directories to be read Drawing number num_dir = 5 298/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== path = "//CNC_MEM/USER/" # Path name character string req_num = 1 # Required entry number ret_values = cnc_rdpdf_subdir(num_dir, path, req_num) # Executes reading of the subdirectory information. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 2.10 Reading file list information [Function] cnc_rdpdf_alldir [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_alldir(num_prog, path, req_num, size_kind, type) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (44) Name Type num_prog Numerical value String path Arguments of the cnc_rdpdf_alldir function Description req_num Numerical value size_kind Numerical value type Numerical value Maximum number of programs to be read(1 to 128) Path name character string Set the drive name + directory name string. Up to 212 characters can be used. Set the string of drive name + directory name to "path". The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths when selecting a program in the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" Required entry number "req_num" sets the ordinal number of the directory/file for which you want to get information. Normally, start with 0 and increment the number by 1. (The first subdirectory is 0.) Size output method Set the unit of data. 0: Page 1: Byte 2: kByte(1kByte=1024Byte) 3: MByte(1MByte=1024kByte) Format of program list Specify the format of a list of programs to be read. 0: Does not acquire the size, comment, and machining time stamp. 1: Acquires the size, comment, and machining time stamp. (Specifying 0 allows faster operation.) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 299/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (45) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_alldir function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Array of n elements (n = number of programs that have actually been read) Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY The CNC is in use. EW_NUMBER Data number error No subdirectory for the required entry number (req_num) exists. EW_ATTRIB The specified size output method (size_kind) or type of program list (type) is invalid. EW_DATA The path name character string (path) data is invalid. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. EW_LENGTH “Maximum number of programs to be read” is not 1 to 128. Number of programs that have actually been read Directory list information Directory list information for the number of “Number of programs that have actually been read” is stored in an array. For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in the directory list information." Table 5.3 (46) 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element 7th element 8th element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Data type 0: Folder 1: File Last Edit Year It is valid only for files. Last Edit Month It is valid only for files. Last Edit Day It is valid only for files. Last Edit Hour It is valid only for files. Last Edit Minutes It is valid only for files. Last Edit Seconds It is valid only for files. File size (0 to 99999999) It is valid only for files. It is valid when the type argument is set to 1. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Type Numerical value Name Element 1st element Values to be stored in the directory list information Drawing number 3rd element 300/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 9th element Numerical value File/folder attribution Folder attribute #0: Editing disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled #1: Editing/display disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled File attribute #0: Editing disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled #1: Editing/display disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled #2: Encryption attribute 0: OFF 1: ON #8 to #10: Change protection level Numeric value from 0 to 7 where #10 is the MSB and #8 is the LSB #12 to #14: Output protection level Numeric value from 0 to 7 where #14 is the MSB and #12 is the LSB 10th element 11th element String 12th element String Folder/file name character string Up to 35 characters can be used. Comment A comment recorded immediately after the program number is stored. A comment consists of up to 48 characters (up to 50 characters when the parentheses before and after the comment are included). If a comment consisting of more than 48 characters is recorded, the 49th and subsequent characters of the comment are not output. When a program has no comment, only parentheses ("()") are stored. It is valid only for files. It is valid when the type argument is set to 1. Machining time stamp The machining time stamp (a comment in the format of "(xxxHxxMxxS)") recorded immediately after the program number is stored. It is valid only for files. It is valid when the type argument is set to 1. The bits other than the bits described above are ignored. String [Description] Reads file list information in a folder. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. When folder or file editing such as creation or deletion is performed during the time from the first request until the last request, data is returned based on the data present when a request is made. [Example] When up to 2 pieces of file list information in the "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" path are read and the first piece of the information is returned num_prog = 2 # Maximum number of programs to be read path = "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" # Path name character string req_num = 1 # Required entry number size_kind = 1 # Unit of data (byte) type = 0 # Program list type ret_values = cnc_rdpdf_alldir(num_prog, path, req_num, size_kind, type) # Executes reading of the file list information. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 301/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.11 Creating a directory or file [Function] cnc_pdf_add [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_add(file_path) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (47) Arguments of the cnc_pdf_add function Name Type Description file_path String Path of the directory/file to be created Set the drive name + directory name + file name string. Up to 241 characters can be used. When specifying a directory name, place "/" at the end of the string. If "/" is not present, it assumes a file name is being specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths when selecting a program in the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (48) Type Nume rical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_add function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or directory name format error 2: The specified directory name is not found. 3: The maximum allowable number of registered files is exceeded. 4: The same file name is already present. 5: The specified file or directory name is selected by the NC. EW_PROT Write protection The specified file or directory is write-protected. EW_OVRFLOW Memory overflow File or folder creation is impossible because of insufficient memory space. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Creates a directory or file in a specified directory. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the 302/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== wait state. The directory or file cannot be created in the following cases: A file with an existing number or name A directory with an existing name Directory in write-protected attribute CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. 2.12 Deleting directory or file [Function] cnc_pdf_del [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_del(file_path) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (49) Name Type file_path String Arguments of the cnc_pdf_del function Description Path of the directory/file to be deleted Set the drive name + directory name + file name string. Up to 241 characters can be used. When specifying a directory name, place "/" at the end of the string. If "/" is not present, it assumes a file name is being specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths when selecting a program in the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 303/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (50) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_del function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or directory name format error 2: The specified directory name is not found. 5: The specified file or directory name is selected by the NC. Alternatively, when a directory is deleted, the directory is not empty. EW_PROT Write protection The specified file or directory is write-protected. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. The NC is operating. [Description] Deletes a directory or file in a specified directory. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. The directory or file cannot be deleted in the following cases: The specified file is being used for operation or is selected in the foreground. The specified file is protected. The specified directory is selected as the current directory. The specified directory is not empty. CAUTION Use sufficient care when you delete the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that deleting the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. 2.13 Renaming directory or file Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_pdf_rename [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_rename(file_path, after_name) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 304/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (51) Name Type file_path String after_name String Arguments of the cnc_pdf_rename function Description Path of the directory/file to be renamed Set the drive name + directory name + file name string. Up to 241 characters can be used. When specifying a directory name, place "/" at the end of the string. If "/" is not present, it assumes a file name is being specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths when selecting a program in the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" String of the directory/file name after the change Up to 32 characters can be used. [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (52) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_rename function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or directory name format error 2: The specified directory name is not found. 4: The same file name is already present. 5: The specified file or directory name is selected by the NC. EW_PROT Write protection The specified file or directory is write-protected. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. - The CNC is operating. - The emergency stop state is engaged. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Renames a directory or file in a specified directory. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. The directory or file cannot be renamed in the following cases: The specified file is being used for operation or is selected in the foreground. The specified file is protected. The specified directory is selected as the current directory or a directory above the current directory. 305/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. 2.14 Selecting the main program [Function] cnc_pdf_slctmain [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_slctmain(file_path) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (53) Name Arguments of the cnc_pdf_slctmain function Type file_path String Description Program path with drive-name + path-name + file-name. Up to 241 characters can be used. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths for the program folder of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (54) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_slctmain function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or folder name format error 2: The specified folder name is not found. EW_MODE CNC mode error This function can be used only in the EDIT/MEM mode. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Selects a file in a specified folder as the main program. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. 306/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When the program "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234" is set as the main program ret = cnc_pdf_slctmain("//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234") if ret != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 2.15 Changing attribute of folder or file [Function] cnc_wrpdf_attr [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrpdf_attr(file_path, slct, attr) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (55) Name file_path String slct Numerical value Numerical value attr Arguments of the cnc_wrpdf_attr function Type Description Drive name + directory name + file name Up to 241 characters can be used. When specifying a directory name, place "/" at the end of the string. If "/" is not present, it assumes a file name is being specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths when selecting a program in the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" Selection Set 1 only to the bits to be changed. Set bits other than the described bits to 0. Setting data Attribute data applied after the change is set. The bit that is set to 1 in slct is changed to the data set in attr. Directory attribute #0: Editing disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled #1: Editing/display disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled File attribute #0: Editing disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled #1: Editing/display disable attribute 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled #2: Encryption attribute 0: OFF 1: ON #8 to #10: Change protection level Numeric value from 0 to 7 where #10 is the MSB and #8 is the LSB. #12 to #14: Output protection level Numeric value from 0 to 7 where #14 is the MSB and #12 is the LSB. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 307/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (56) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrpdf_attr function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or directory name format error 2: The specified directory name is not found. 5: The specified file or directory name is selected by the NC. EW_PROT Write protection The specified file or directory is write-protected. Alternatively, the file or directory is protected with a protection level. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. [Description] Changes the attribute of a directory or file in the specified directory. When editing (including background editing) on the CNC, the execution of this function is placed in the wait state. When a specified directory is selected as the current directory, its attribute cannot be changed. When changing the change protection level or output protection level, set all three of the relevant bits in slct to 1. [Example] When the attribute of the "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O0001" file is changed to "Editing/display disable attribute" file_path = "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O0001" # Path name character string slct = 1 # Bit of the attribute to be changed attr = 1 # Attribute data applied after the change ret_values = cnc_wrpdf_attr( file_path, slct, attr) # Executes the change of directory/file attribute. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 2.16 Getting the number of folders and files in the specified directory Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_rdpdf_subdirn [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_subdirn(dir_name) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 308/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (57) Name Type dir_name String Arguments of the cnc_rdpdf_subdirn function Description String of the current drive + directory to be acquired Up to 210 characters can be used. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths when selecting a program in the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table5.3 (58) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or directory name format error 2: The specified directory name is not found. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. The NC is operating. List of the number of directories/files For details on the value, refer to the following table "List of the number of directories/files." Table 5.3 (59) List of the number of directories/files Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value Numerical value 2nd element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_subdirn function Description Number of directories Number of files [Description] Gets the number of subdirectories and files in the specified directory. [Example] When the number of subdirectories and files in the "//CNC_MEM/USER/" path is acquired. dir_name = "//CNC_MEM/USER/" ret_values = cnc_rdpdf_subdirn( dir_name ) # Path name character string # Gets the number of folders and files in the specified directory. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 309/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.17 Getting main program information [Function] cnc_pdf_rdmain [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_rdmain() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (60) Element Type 1st element Numeric al value 2nd element String Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_rdmain function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. Main program information that has been acquired It is a string of the current drive + folder. Up to 242 characters can be used. If a problem has occurred, null characters are set. [Description] Reads information about the file currently selected as the main program. [Example] When the main program name is output to the message box ret = cnc_pdf_rdmain() if ret[0] == EW_OK then msg_txt = "Program name:" + ret[1] MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 2.18 Starting output of the NC program to be registered (4) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_dwnstart4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_dwnstart4(type, file_name) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 310/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (61) Name Type type Numerical value file_name String Arguments of the cnc_dwnstart4 function Description Specify the type of CNC data to be registered. 0: NC program 1: Tool offset amount 2: Parameter 3: Pitch error compensation amount 4: Custom macro variable value 5: Work origin offset Drive name and folder name (up to 241 characters) of a program. Valid only when type = 0 (NC program). The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following path as the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (62) Type Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Start command for output of NC program to be compared has been rejected. Cnc_dwnstart4 function (cnc_vrfstart function) has already been executed. Use cnc_dwnend4 function (cnc_vrfend function) to end the previous output operation. EW_ATTRIB The specified type is invalid. EW_DATA The data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: Folder name error EW_NOOPT A required option is not provided. When a custom macro variable, work origin offset, or pitch error data is registered, an option is required. EW_PARAM CNC parameter error When parameter data is registered, parameter writing must be enabled by setting. EW_MODE The mode of the CNC is incorrect. - When registering tool offset or custom macro variable data, set the emergency stop state. - When registering parameter, pitch error, or work origin offset data, set the emergency stop state. - When background editing (NC program) is being performed in the CNC, end the background editing. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. The CNC is operating. Registration of data except NC programs is not permitted during Drawing number Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_dwnstart4 function Description 311/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description operation. EW_ALARM Alarm state Alarm PW0000 is issued in the CNC. Cancel the alarm in the CNC. [Description] Requests the CNC to start registering (downloading) NC data (such as an NC program, tool offsets, or parameters). (This function must be executed before downloading is performed.) If the cnc_download4 or cnc_dwnend4 function is executed without executing this function, EW_FUNC is returned. The basic downloading procedure is shown below. Fig. 5.3 (b) Procedure for outputting NC programs to be registered Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Specify a program with a folder and a file name. So, it is impossible to download more than one program by specifying a range. When data is to be output to a memory card or data server, the full path of an output destination folder must be set in the 'file_name' argument of the cnc_dwnstart4 function. To access a data server, specify and execute the function as shown in the following example: Example) Output to DATA_SV ret = cnc_dwnstart4(0, "//DATA_SV/") [Example] Refer to the example of "Output NC program to be registered (4) (cnc_download4 function)." 312/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC data which can influence how the machine works. There is a possibility that the NC may run with values from the wrong NC data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC data is safe and correct when doing so as it can influence how the machine works. The NC data that can influence how the machine works is as follows. It may not all be listed below after new applications or functions are released. NC data that can influence how the machine works: NC parameter, NC program, Tool offset value, Pitch error compensation data, Work origin offset value, Custom macro variables 2.19 Outputting an NC program to be registered (4) [Function] cnc_download4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_download4(length, data) [Arguments] Table 5.3 (63) Name Arguments of the cnc_download4 function Type length data Numerical value Numerical value Description Number of characters of the NC data to be output NC program to be output [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_RESET The CNC has been reset. Call the cnc_dwnend4 function. EW_FUNC The start processing for outputting the NC program to be registered has not been completed in the CNC or the cnc_dwnstart4 function has not been executed. EW_LENGTH The specified data length is invalid. A negative value is specified as the number of output characters. EW_DATA The data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: Syntax error in NC data Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Name 1st element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_download4 function Description Drawing number Table 5.3 (64) Type Element 313/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Numerical value Description 2: When the TV check is enabled, a block that consists of an odd number of characters (including LF at the end of the block) is detected. 3: The maximum allowable number of registered NC programs has been exceeded. 4: The same program number has already been registered. 5: The same program number is selected by the NC. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. CNC parameters (protection or encryption of programs in the eight or nine thousands) are write-protected. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. EW_OVRFLOW The part program storage area of the CNC becomes full, so data cannot be registered any more. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. EW_BUFFER Buffer full The buffer is full. Retry. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. Number of characters of the NC data that has actually been output If the free space of the buffer for data transfer to the CNC is smaller than the number of characters specified, an amount of data equivalent to the size of the free space is output and set. [Description] Outputs (downloads) an NC program to be registered. If even one character cannot be output, EW_BUFFER is returned to the first place in the return value list. When this value is returned, the function must be called again. Return of the error (EW_DATA and EW_OVRFLOW, etc.) is generally delayed because priority is given to the transfer speed of the data to the CNC. This means that an error output at a certain point in time is sometimes due to data that was output in several data output operations preceding that point. An error that occurs in several data output operations preceding the end of the function is returned by cnc_dwnend4. [Example] O1234 program O1234 ; G1F0.3W10.; M30; % When the above program is output as many times as the number of specified characters type = 0 file_name = "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" length = 27 data = "¥nO1234¥nG1F0.3W10.¥nM30¥n%" Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret1 = cnc_dwnstart4(type, file_name) if ret1 == EW_OK then ret2 = cnc_download4(length, data) end cnc_dwnend4() if ret2[0] == EW_OK then #[100] = ret2[0].to_i # Execution result 314/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== #[101] = ret2[1].to_i # Number of characters of the NC data that has actually been output end CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC data which can influence how the machine works. There is a possibility that the NC may run with values from the wrong NC data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC data is safe and correct when doing so as it can influence how the machine works. The NC data that can influence how the machine works is as follows. It may not all be listed below after new applications or functions are released. NC data that can influence how the machine works: NC parameter, NC program, Tool offset value, Pitch error compensation data, Work origin offset value, Custom macro variables 2.20 Stopping output of NC program to be registered (4) [Function] cnc_dwnend4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_dwnend4() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (65) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_dwnend4 function Description Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC The start processing for outputting the NC program to be registered has not been completed in the CNC or the cnc_dwnstart4 function has not been executed. EW_DATA The data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: Syntax error in NC data 2: When the TV check is enabled, a block that consists of an odd number of characters (including LF at the end of the block) is detected. 3: The maximum allowable number of registered NC programs has been exceeded. 4: The same program number has already been registered. 5: The same program number is selected by the NC. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. CNC parameters (protection or encryption of programs in the eight or nine thousands) are write-protected. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Type 315/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description EW_OVRFLOW The part program storage area of the CNC becomes full, so data cannot be registered any more. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. [Description] Notifies the CNC of the end of NC data registration. (This function must be used after downloading ends.) An error (such as EW_DATA or EW_OVRFLOW) in the cnc_download4 function may be returned by this function. Control is not returned from this function until the registration of data output by the cnc_download4 function is completed. [Example] Refer to the example of "Output NC program to be registered (4) (cnc_download4 function)." CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC data which can influence how the machine works. There is a possibility that the NC may run with values from the wrong NC data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC data is safe and correct when doing so as it can influence how the machine works. The NC data that can influence how the machine works is as follows. It may not all be listed below after new applications or functions are released. NC data that can influence how the machine works: NC parameter, NC program, Tool offset value, Pitch error compensation data, Work origin offset value, Custom macro variables 2.21 Starting reading NC program (4) [Function] cnc_upstart4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_upstart4(type, file_name) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (66) 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Specify the type of CNC data to be read. 0: NC program 1: Tool offset amount 2: Parameter 3: Pitch error compensation amount 4: Custom macro variable value 5: Work origin offset 7: Operation history data 8: Maintenance information Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Name type Arguments of the cnc_upstart4 function Type Drawing number Name 316/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name file_name Type String Description Drive name, folder name, and file name (up to 241 characters) of a program Valid only when type = 0 (NC program). The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following path as the program directory of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (67) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_upstart4 function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Start command for output of NC program to be compared has been rejected. Cnc_upstart4 function has already been executed. Use cnc_upend4 function to end the previous output operation. EW_ATTRIB The specified type is invalid. EW_DATA The data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 1: File or folder name error EW_NOOPT A required option is not provided. When a custom macro variable, work origin offset, or pitch error data is registered, an option is required. EW_MODE The mode of the CNC is incorrect. Set the CNC mode to something other than the MDI mode. End background editing in the CNC. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. The CNC is operating. Reading data other than NC programs is not permitted during operation. EW_ALARM Alarm state Alarm PW0000 is issued in the CNC. Cancel the alarm in the CNC. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Requests the CNC to start reading (uploading) NC data (such as an NC program, tool offsets, or parameters) specified with a path name and file name. (This function must be executed before downloading is performed.) If the cnc_upload4 function or cnc_upend4 function is executed without executing this function, EW_FUNC is returned. The basic uploading procedure is shown below. 317/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Fig. 5.3 (c) Procedure for reading NC program (4) Specify a program with a folder and a file name. So, it is impossible to upload more than one program by specifying a range. When data is to be read from a memory card or data server, the full path of a program name must be set in the 'file_name' argument of the cnc_upstart4 function. To access a data server, specify and execute the function as shown in the following example: Example) Read program O1234: ret = cnc_upstart4(0, "//DATA_SV/O1234") ; [Example] Refer to the example of "Reading NC program (4) (cnc_upload4 function)." 2.22 Reading NC program (4) [Function] cnc_upload4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_upload4(length) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (68) Name length Arguments of the cnc_upload4 function Type Description Numerical value Number of characters to be read In this variable (length), set the number of characters to be input by one read operation. The number of characters must be a multiple of 256. If a value smaller than 256 is specified as the number of characters to be read, EW_LENGTH is returned. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 318/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (69) Type Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element String 3rd element Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_upload4 function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_RESET The CNC has been reset. Call the cnc_upend4 function. EW_FUNC The start processing for outputting the NC program to be registered has not been completed in the CNC or the cnc_upstart4 function has not been executed. EW_LENGTH The specified data length is invalid. The specified number of NC data characters to be read (length) is less than 256. EW_DATA The data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 2: No program is registered within a specified range. 3: The NC program area is corrupt. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. CNC parameters (protection or encryption of programs in the eight or nine thousands) are read-protected. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. EW_BUFFER The buffer is empty. Retry. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. Number of NC data characters that have actually been read After the end of a read operation, the number of characters actually read is set again. NC data that has actually been read Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads (uploads) NC data. This function inputs as many characters as specified in length. When the CNC data processing is delayed, and data that can be read is shorter than the specified number of characters, the data that can be read is read, and the number of characters of the read data is set in the second place in the list. The actually read data is stored in the third place in the list of the return value. If even one character cannot be read, EW_BUFFER is returned as the return value to the first place in the list. When this value is returned, the function must be called again. Because priority is given to the speed of data transfer to the CNC, an error (such as EW_DATA) is generally returned with a delay. This means that an error output at a certain point in time is sometimes due to data that was output in several data output operations preceding that point. An error that occurs in several data output operations preceding the end of the function is returned by the cnc_upend4 function. When read, NC data ends with '%'. Use this character, '%', as the condition for ending a read operation. When an attempt is made to perform a read operation after '%' is received, the function ends with an error (EW_RESET). 319/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Input data format The format of the NC data that is read from CNC is as follows: % LF bloc-1 LF block-2 LF ... LF block-n LF % where, LF = 0x0A('¥n') Or % LF CR CR block-1 LF CR CR ... LF CR CR block-n LF CR CR % where, CR = 0x0D ('¥r') and LF = 0x0A ('¥n') The format to be used is determined by the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of NC parameter No. 0100. Because of the TV check, a space (' ') may be added before LF. For details, refer to Section 13.2, "PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION" in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)" (B-63944EN, B-64484EN, B-64604EN) of the CNC. [Example] When up to 256 characters of the NC program O1234 are read type = 0 file_name = "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234" length = 256 ret1 = cnc_upstart4(type, file_name) if ret1 == EW_OK then ret2 = cnc_upload4(length) end cnc_upend4() #[100] = ret2[0].to_i # Execution result #[101] = ret2[1].to_i # Number of NC program characters that have actually been read MsgBoxShow(ret2[2].to_s, 0) # NC program that has actually been read 2.23 Stopping reading NC program (4) [Function] cnc_upend4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_upend4() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (70) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_upend4 function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC The start processing for outputting the NC program to be registered has not been completed in the CNC or the cnc_upstart4 function has not been executed. EW_DATA The data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Type Numerical value 320/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description The following is set in "Detail status" in the return value array: 2: No program is registered within a specified range. 3: The NC program area is corrupt. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. CNC parameters (protection or encryption of programs in the eight or nine thousands) are write-protected. For the timing of the occurrence of this error, see [Description]. [Description] Posts the end of reading (uploading) of NC data. (This function must be executed after uploading.) An error (such as EW_DATA) in the cnc_upload4 function may be returned by this function. [Example] Refer to the example of "Reading NC program (4) (cnc_upload4 function)." 2.24 Reading the name of the program being executed [Function] cnc_exeprgname [Syntax with arguments] cnc_exeprgname() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (71) Type Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_exeprgname function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Not available Name of program being executed For details on the value, refer to the following table "Name of program being executed." Table 5.3 (72) Element Type 1st element 2nd element String Numerical value Name of program being executed Description Name of program being executed (Up to 31 characters can be used.) Number of the program being executed Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads the name of a machining program currently selected in the CNC. A program name is stored as a string consisting of up to 31 characters. Storage of the "Name of program being executed" array for O-number programs: 1st element (string): An ASCII code indicating "O" and a number such as "O123" is stored. 2nd element (numerical value): Binary data indicating an "O" number such as "123" is stored. 321/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== - Storage of the "Name of program being executed" array for programs other than O-number programs: 1st element (string): An ASCII code indicating a program name such as "ABC" is stored. 2nd element (numerical value): Binary data indicating an 0 is stored. [Example] When the name of the program being executed and program number are acquired ret_values = cnc_exeprgname() # Executes reading of the name of the program being executed. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 2.25 Reading the name of the program being executed (full path format) [Function] cnc_exeprgname2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_exeprgname2() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (73) Type Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element String Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_exeprgname2 function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Not available Full path of the name of the program being executed Up to 256 characters can be used. [Description] Reads the name of a machining program currently selected in the CNC in the full path format. A program name consists of up to 256 characters and is stored in the second place in the list. O-number programs: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O123" Programs other than O-number programs: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/ABC" [Example] When the name of a machining program currently selected in the CNC is acquired in the full path format Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_exeprgname2() #[100] = ret[0].to_i # Execution result MsgBoxShow(ret[1].to_i, 0) # Number of characters of the NC data that has actually been output 322/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.26 Writing MDI program [Function] cnc_wrmdiprog [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrmdiprog(length, data) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (74) Name Arguments of the cnc_wrmdiprog function Type length Description Numerical value String data Number of characters in the MDI program to be written MDI program data to be written Up to 499 characters can be used as a string of MDI program data. [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (75) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrmdiprog function Type Description Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH The number of characters in the MDI program (length) is invalid. EW_DATA A character that is unavailable for NC programs is detected. EW_MODE The function is executed in an unavailable CNC mode. Set the CNC mode to MDI. EW_REJECT MDI operation is being executed or the CNC is in the emergency stop status. [Description] Writes an MDI program to the CNC. This function must be used in the MDI mode. The written data format is shown below. MDI program data registered to the CNC is an ASCII code string in the following format: LF Block1 LF Block2 LF ... LF % [Example] MDI program M03 S2000 ; G28 U0 W0 ; T0101 ; G00 X35.0 Z-10.0 ; When the above program is written to the CNC length = 45 data = "¥nM03S2000¥nG28U0W0¥nT0101¥nG00X35.0Z-10.0¥n%" Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_wrmdiprog(length, data) #[100] = ret # Execution result 323/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the MDI program. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong MDI program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the MDI program is safe and correct when doing so. 2.27 Reading an execution pointer for MDI operation [Function] cnc_rdmdipntr [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdmdipntr() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (76) Type Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdmdipntr function Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_MODE The function is executed in an unavailable CNC mode. Set the CNC mode to MDI. Execution pointer information For details on the value, refer to the following table "Execution pointer information." Element Table 5.3 (77) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value 3rd element 4th element Numerical value Execution pointer information Description Number of program being executed For MDI operation, this value is basically 0. When the program being executed is a subprogram, the subprogram number is indicated. Execution block pointer Pointer to the block currently being executed. Buffered program number Number of the buffered program. For MDI operation, this value is basically 0. When a subprogram is buffered, the subprogram number is indicated. Buffered block pointer Pointer to the last block of the program that is buffered. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads the execution pointer for MDI operation. This function must be used in the MDI mode. 324/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When the execution pointer for MDI operation is acquired ret_values = cnc_ rdmdipntr() # Executes reading of the execution pointer for MDI operation. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 2.28 Writing an execution pointer for MDI operation [Function] cnc_wrmdipntr [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrmdipntr(crntpntr) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (78) Name crntpntr Arguments of the cnc_wrmdipntr function Type Description Numerical value Execution start block pointer Specify the execution start block pointer with an absolute pointer value (block number indicated when the number of the first block of the program is 0). [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (79) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrmdipntr function Type Numerical value Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_DATA The specified execution start block pointer (crntpntr) is invalid. EW_MODE The function is executed in an unavailable CNC mode. Set the CNC mode to MDI. EW_REJECT MDI operation is being executed or the CNC is in the emergency stop status. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Specifies the execution pointer for MDI operation. (The pointer cannot be directly manipulated while a program is being executed.) Before executing this function, register an MDI program using the cnc_wrmdiprog function. This function must be used in the MDI mode. 325/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the execution pointer for MDI operation. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong execution pointer for MDI operation. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the execution pointer for MDI operation is safe and correct when doing so. 2.29 Reading programs line by line [Function] cnc_rdpdf_line [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpdf_line(prog_name, line_no, line_len, data_len) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (80) Name Type prog_name String line_no Numerical value line_len Numerical value Numerical value data_len Arguments of the cnc_rdpdf_line function Description Program path with drive-name + path-name + file-name. When prog_name data is "" (null character), the name of the last accessed program is assumed to be specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths for the program folder of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Patch 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/” For an MDI program, specify "MDI". Line number from which reading starts For the first line of the program, specify 0. If the specified number exceeds the number of registered lines, an error (EW_DATA) is returned. Number of lines to be read in the program Number of characters to be read in the program [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 4 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Busy - During the execution of a search. EW_DATA Data error Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Type Numerical value Name Element 1st element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpdf_line function Drawing number Table 5.3 (81) 326/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element String 3rd element Numerical value 4rd element Numerical value Description To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 1: Program path (prog_name) error. 2: Read start line number (line_no) error. 3: Error in the number of lines to be read (line_len). EW_PROT Write protection - CNC parameters No. 8000 to No. 8999 or No. 9000 to No. 9999 (for protection or encryption) are write-protected. EW_MODE CNC mode error. The emergency stop engaged. Contents of the program that have been read Strings of the specified line, number of lines, and number of characters If a problem occurs, a NULL character is set. Number of lines that have been read The number of lines that have actually been read. If a problem has occurred, -1 is set. Number of characters that have been read The number of characters that have actually been read. If a problem has occurred, -1 is set. [Description] Reads the specified program line by line. This function attempts to read the number of lines in the program as is specified by (line_len). However, if the number of characters that is specified for (data_len) is reached, the function stops reading the program. When the end of the line (EOB (‘¥n’)) is not read, the line is not counted as having been read, however. Example) If you want to read lines 1 to 3 of the following program, you must specify at least 33 for the number of characters to be read. If a value of 30 is specified for the number of characters to be read, a value of 2 is set for the number of read lines because line 3 cannot be read to the end. However, the return value is 30 (characters). O1234 ; N001 G01 X0. F100 ; N002 X20. ; N003 X50. ; N004 X80. ; N005 M30 ; % The following table shows the relationships between each CNC mode and target program (MDI program, selected program, and unselected program): Table 5.3 (82) CNC modes and target programs MDI mode Other modes    MDI program Selected program Unselected program ×   Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name : Can be executed. ×: Cannot be executed (EW_MODE is returned). 327/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== When this function is executed for an MDI program or selected program, the execution pointer goes to the beginning of the line specified for line_no in the following cases: When an MDI program is specified in the MDI mode When the selected program is specified in the EDIT mode When the selected program is specified in the TJOG/THND mode with a playback option [Example] When 30 characters between the 1st and 3rd lines of the program "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234" are read. ret = cnc_rdpdf_line("//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234",1,3,30) if ret[0] == EW_OK then msg_txt = "Contents to be read:" + ret[1] + "¥n" + "Lines to be read:" + ret[2].to_s + "¥n" + "Number of characters to be read:" + ret[3].to_s MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 2.30 Writing programs line by line [Function] cnc_wrpdf_line [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrpdf_line( prog_name, line_no, prog_data, data_len) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (83) Description line_no Numerical value prog_data String 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Specify the program path with drive-name + path-name + file-name. When prog_name data is "" (null character), the name of the last accessed program is assumed to be specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths for the program folder of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" For an MDI program, specify "MDI". Line number to be written Line 0 is the first line (line containing a program name and program number) of a program. Program string to be written Pay attention to the following points when making this specification: - Codes other than those significant to the NC are ignored. - Lowercase alphabetic characters are ignored. - '%' (EOR) is ignored. Even when the specified string contains multiple EOB characters ('¥n'), the registered line with the specified line number is replaced with the specified string. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page String Name prog_name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Arguments of the cnc_wrpdf_line function Type Drawing number Name 328/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name data_len Type Description Numerical value Number of characters to be written Before data is written, the unused space in the NC is checked. If the size of the space is smaller than that for the number of characters to be written + 100 characters, data is not written and an error (EW_OVRFLOW) is returned. The maximum number of characters that can be written at a time is 200 characters in Series 30i/31i/32i-A, and 1740 characters in Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B, Series 0i -F, and PMi -A. [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (84) Type Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrpdf_line function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Busy - During the execution of a search. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 1: Program path (prog_name) error. 2: Write start line number (line_no) error. 3: Error in the number of characters to be written (data_len). 4: An attempt was made to change the O number at the beginning. 5: The first character of the string is invalid. 6: An error occurred during deletion of the write start line. 7: An error occurred during writing. EW_PROT Write protection - CNC parameters No. 8000 to No. 8999 or No. 9000 to No. 9999 (for protection or encryption) are write-protected. EW_OVRFLOW Memory overflow - There is insufficient unused space on the NC. Allocate the required space. EW_MODE CNC mode error. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. - During MDI or background editing. [Description] Writes the specified program line by line. The file name on the first line cannot be changed. If an attempt is made to rewrite the file name, an error (EW_DATA) is returned. The following table shows the relationships between each CNC mode and target program (MDI program, selected program, or unselected program): Table 5.3 (85) CNC modes and target programs EDIT mode MDI mode Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 × × FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge Other modes Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26  × ×  Drawing number MDI program Selected program 329/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg==  Unselected program   : Can be executed. ×: Cannot be executed (EW_MODE is returned). When a playback option is enabled, TJOG/THND mode is assumed to be the same as EDIT mode. Even when the OP signal is set to 1, this function can be executed if the STL signal is set to 0 (in statuses such as feed hold stopped or single block stopped). When this function is executed for an MDI program or selected program, the execution pointer goes to the beginning of the line specified for line_no in the following cases: When an MDI program is specified in the MDI mode When the selected program is specified in the EDIT mode When the selected program is specified in the TJOG/THND mode with a playback option CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. [Example] When "TEST" is written on the 2nd line of the program "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234" ret = cnc_wrpdf_line("//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234",2,"TEST",4) if ret != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 2.31 Deleting programs line by line [Function] cnc_pdf_delline [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_delline( prog_name, line_no, line_len) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (86) Type 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Program path with drive-name + path-name + file-name. When prog_name data is "" (null character), the name of the last accessed program is assumed to be specified. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths for the program folder of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" For an MDI program, specify "MDI". Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 String Name prog_name Arguments of the cnc_pdf_delline function Description Drawing number Name 330/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name Type Description line_no Numerical value line_len Numerical value Line number from which deletion starts For the first line of the program, specify 0. If the specified number exceeds the number of registered lines, an error (EW_DATA) is returned. Number of lines in the program that are to be deleted. If the specified number exceeds the number of registered lines, all lines from the specified line number to the line before last are deleted. The last line (%) is not deleted. [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (87) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_delline function Type Description Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Busy - During the execution of a search. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 1: Program path (prog_name) error. 2: Deletion start line number (line_no) error. 3: Error in the number of lines to be deleted (line_len). EW_PROT Write protection - CNC parameters No. 8000 to No. 8999 or No. 9000 to No. 9999 (for protection or encryption) are write-protected. EW_MODE CNC mode error. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. - The emergency stop is engaged. [Description] Deletes the specified program line by line. When the number of the line containing the file name ("Oxxxx" or "<xxxx>") is specified for the deletion start line number, the data following the file name to the end of the line ('¥n') is deleted, but the file name is not deleted. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Example) Deletes the following program line by line: O1234(TEST PROGRAM) ; G010. F100 ; X20. ; M30 ; % 331/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== When three lines starting from line 0 in the program are deleted, the result is: O1234 M30 ; % The following table shows the relationships between each CNC mode and target program (MDI program, selected program, or unselected program): Table 5.3 (88) CNC modes and target programs EDIT mode MDI mode Other modes ×    ×  × ×  MDI program Selected program Unselected program : Can be executed. ×: Cannot be executed (EW_MODE is returned). When a playback option is enabled, TJOG/THND mode is assumed to be the same as EDIT mode. Even when the OP signal is set to 1, this function can be executed if the STL signal is set to 0 (in statuses such as feed hold stopped or single block stopped). When this function is executed for an MDI program or selected program, the execution pointer goes to the beginning of the line specified for line_no in the following cases: When an MDI program is specified in the MDI mode When the selected program is specified in the EDIT mode When the selected program is specified in the TJOG/THND mode with a playback option CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. [Example] When lines 0 to 3 of the program "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234" are deleted ret = cnc_pdf_delline("//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234",0,4) if ret != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 2.32 Getting program execution pointer Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_pdf_rdactpt [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_rdactpt() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 332/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (89) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_rdactpt function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element String 3rd element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_MODE CNC mode error - The function is executed in a mode other than the MDI, MEM, EDIT, TJOG, or THND mode. EW_REJECT Pointer get processing is rejected. Incorrect parameter number "number". - Currently, the target program does not exist. - The CNC is performing DNC or M198 operation. - The STL signal is on. - The emergency stop is engaged. Current program name When an MDI program is executed, "MDI" is set. Number of the first block of the program If a problem has occurred, -1 is set. [Description] Gets the current program name and block number in the MDI or MEM mode and EDIT, TJOG, or THND mode. The following restrictions apply to execution of this function: During DNC or M198 operation, EW_REJECT is returned. When the STL signal is on, EW_REJECT is returned. When the program is buffered, the number of the block following the buffered block is obtained. [Example] When the current program name and block number are obtained and then displayed in the message box ret = cnc_pdf_rdactpt() if ret[0] == EW_OK then msg_txt = "Program name:" + ret[1] + "n" + "Block number:" + ret[2].to_s MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 2.33 Setting program execution pointer Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_pdf_wractpt [Syntax with arguments] cnc_pdf_wractpt(prog_name, type, blk_no) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 333/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (90) Name Type prog_name String type Numerical value blk_no Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_pdf_wractpt function Description Program that sets the executing block number Specify it with drive name + path name + file name. The drive name of the memory card is "//MEMCARD/". The drive name of the data server is "//DATA_SV/". Specify the following paths for the program folder of the CNC memory. Path 1: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/" : Path 10: "//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10/" For an MDI program, specify "MDI". Execution pointer type. 0: Absolute pointer (The number of the first block of the program is 0.) 1: Relative pointer (Relative value to the current execution pointer) Block number to be set When type = 0 Specify the block number indicated when the number of the first block of the program is 0. When type = 1 Specify the value relative to the current execution pointer. If 0 is specified, the execution pointer is not changed. The following table shows values of the absolute pointer and relative pointer when the execution block is "X20. Z15.;". Table 5.3 (91) Method for specifying the absolute pointer and relative pointer Selected NC command program Absolute pointer Relative pointer 01234 G00 X0. Z0.; G01 X10. Z5. F100. ; X20. Z15.; X35.; Z20; M30; % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (92) 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error - An invalid value is specified for type. EW_DATA Data error - The specified program name is invalid or does not exist. - The specified block number is invalid or does not exist. Name Type Numerical value Drawing number Element 1st element Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_pdf_wractpt function 334/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Description Numerical value EW_MODE CNC mode error - The function is executed in a mode other than the EDIT, MEM, or MDI mode. - In the EDIT mode, "" (null character) is specified for prog_name. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. - During operation. - No MDI program exists. - No program is selected. - An alarm is issued. - Emergency stop is engaged. Execution pointer When 1 (relative value setting) is set as the execution pointer type and 0 is set as the block number, the absolute value of the pointer to be executed next is set. [Description] Sets the next block number to be executed for a program for MDI or memory operation. When a block has been buffered, the buffered block is executed before the block number set with this function is executed. CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. [Example] When 2 is set as the absolute pointer ret = cnc_pdf_wractpt("//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234",0,2) if (ret[0] != EW_OK ) then MsgBoxShow(ret[0].to_s,0) # Error display end When the absolute value of the pointer to be executed next is to be acquired ret = cnc_pdf_wractpt("//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1234",1,0) if (ret[0] == EW_OK ) then MsgBoxShow(ret[1].to_s,0) # The absolute value of the pointer to be executed next is displayed. end 2.34 Starting to save NC programs Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_saveprog_start [Syntax with arguments] cnc_saveprog_start() [Arguments] None [Return] 335/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (93) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_saveprog_start function Type Description Numer ical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. The cnc_saveprog_start function has been executed. Finish saving NC programs to nonvolatile memory by using the cnc_saveprog_end function. [Description] Saving NC programs to nonvolatile memory is started when High-speed program management is valid (bit 7 (HPM) of parameter No.11354 is 1). Although saving NC programs to nonvolatile memory can only be executed when all paths are in EDIT mode, this function returns "EW_OK" even if one of the paths is not in EDIT mode. If the NC program is not saved to nonvolatile memory because it is in the wrong operation mode or because of mistaken parameter settings, the value corresponding to the result of saving the NC program is set in the second place of the list as the return value of the cnc_saveprog_end function. The procedure for saving NC programs to nonvolatile memory is shown below. Fig. 5.3 (d) Flow for saving NC programs For details about High-speed program management, refer to the "OPERATOR'S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64484EN, B-64604EN) III.11.16 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT " Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the NC program. There is a possibility that the NC may run the wrong NC program. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the NC program is safe and correct when doing so. 336/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.35 Ending save of NC programs [Function] cnc_saveprog_end [Syntax with arguments] cnc_saveprog_end() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Element Table 5.3 (94) Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_saveprog_end function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY In a Busy state. An NC program is being saved to nonvolatile memory. EW_FUNC The cnc_saveprog_start function has not been executed. Result of saving an NC program to nonvolatile memory If the first return value of this function is "EW_OK", the following values corresponding to the NC program being saved to nonvolatile memory are set. EW_OK Saving the NC program has completed normally. EW_PARAM Parameter error EW_MODE CNC mode error EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. (If this function cannot be executed by the CNC, the return value is this error.) [Description] Ends saving the NC program to nonvolatile memory. If an NC program is being saved to nonvolatile memory, "EW_BUSY" is returned as the return value to the first place in the list. Execute this function repeatedly until the NC program is completely saved to the nonvolatile memory. Once the NC program has been saved to nonvolatile memory, "EW_OK" is set to both the first place and second place in the return value list. If a value other than "EW_OK" is set to the second place of the list, saving the NC program to the nonvolatile memory has failed. Confirm the settings of the CNC (for example, operation mode and parameter settings), execute the cnc_saveprog_start function again, and retry saving the NC program to the nonvolatile memory. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CAUTION If the power supply of the CNC is interrupted while saving an NC program to nonvolatile memory, alarm (PS0519) is displayed the next time the power supply is turned, and all NC programs are cleared. 337/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.36 Start copying arbitrary files / folders [Function] cnc_file_cpmv_start [Syntax with arguments] cnc_file_cpmv_start (cpmv_mode, src_path, dst_path, attribute) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (95) Name Type cpmv_mode Numerical value src_path String dst_path String Arguments of the cnc_file_cpmv_start function Description Action mode Specify the following values. 0 : Copy Copy source file / folder name Specify [device name]+[file name] or [device name]+[folder name]. Only ASCII characters (half-width alphanumeric characters and half-width symbols) can be specified. Example 1) When specifying a file //DATA_SV/USER/PATH1/O0001 Example 2) When specifying a folder //DATA_SV/USER/PATH1/WORK_A/ Copy destination path If "/" is not added at the end of dst_path, the program / folder specified by src_path is changed to the file / folder specified by dst_path and copied. If "/" is added to the end of dst_path, dst_path is regarded as a folder, and the program / folder specified by src_path is copied under the dst_path folder. Only ASCII characters (half-width alphanumeric characters and half-width symbols) can be specified. Example 1) Rename and copy src_path = //DATA_SV/USER/WORK1/O0001 dst_path = //USB_MEM/USER/WORK1/BBB In the above case, file O0001 is copied as file BBB in folder WORK1. Example 2) Copy files into a folder src_path = //DATA_SV/USER/WORK1/O0001 dst_path = //USB_MEM/USER/WORK1/BBB/ In the above case, file O0001 is copied as file O0001 in the folder BBB. Example 3) Change the folder name and copy src_path = //DATA_SV/USER/WORK1/AAA/ dst_path = //USB_MEM/USER/WORK1/BBB In the above case, the folder AAA is copied into the folder WORK1 as the folder BBB. Example 4) Copy a folder into a folder src_path = //DATA_SV/USER/WORK1/AAA/ dst_path = //USB_MEM/USER/WORK1/BBB/ In the above case, the folder AAA is copied as the folder AAA in the folder BBB. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical Drawing number attribute When copying from USB_MEM to CNC_MEM / MEMCARD, specify the copy destination folder (Maximum 240 characters). If dst_path = "" or dst_path = nil, copied to the foreground folder. Copy operation mode 338/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name Type Description value BIT0: Overwrite all BIT1: Skip all Specify the operation in BIT0 and BIT1 when there is a file with the same name in the copy destination. Overwriting confirmation (BIT0 = 0, BIT1 = 0) Copy processing is performed while confirming that the copy source and copy destination have the same name. If it has the same name, the copy process is interrupted and suspended until the operation is specified by the cnc_file_cpmv_restart function. Overwrite all (BIT0 = 1, BIT1 = 0) If the copy source and copy destination have the same name, the copy process is performed while always overwriting. Skip all (BIT0 = 0, BIT1 = 1) If the copy source and copy destination have the same name, the copy process is always performed while skipping the copy of the file / folder with the same name. NOTE: Setting both BIT0 and BIT1 to 1 results in an error. BIT2: Binary attribute Text attribute (0) / Binary attribute (1) This bit is valid only when copying to the data server. In the case of Text attribute, it is possible to select it as the main program and perform memory operation and editing. When handling NC data other than NC programs, specify Binary attribute. Also, when copying multiple programs such as batch backup of NC programs or data other than NC programs such as NC parameters, specify Binary attribute. NOTE: If you copy a folder, all files under the specified folder have the specified attribute. BIT3 to BIT15: Unused Set the unused bits to 0. NOTE: Not used when copying from USB_MEM to CNC_MEM / MEMCARD. Specify 0. Whether or not to overwrite depends on the parameter REP (No.3201 # 2). [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (96) Type Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Busy - The cnc_file_cpmv_start function or cnc_file_cpmv_restart function has already been executed. Use the cnc_file_cpmv_end function to end the previous copy process. - Other users are accessing the same data window. Try again. EW_ATTRIB Incorrect data attribute EW_VERSION CNC / PMC and library version mismatch Drawing number Numer ical value Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_file_cpmv_start function Description 339/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Description] Starts copying arbitrary files / folders between I / O devices. This function exits without waiting for the copy to complete. When this function is executed, execute the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function to get the processing result until the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function returns other than EW_BUSY. After that, be sure to execute cnc_file_cpmv_end and exit. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Overall flow of copy processing using this function Drawing number Fig. 5.3 (e) 340/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Executing the cnc_file_cpmv_start function will start the copy process. The cnc_file_cpmv_start function ends before the copy process is complete. You can get the result of the copy process by using the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function. Copying is in progress while EW_BUSY is returned. Continue calling until EW_OK. When the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function returns EW_OK, the result of the copy process is set in the argument result. If result is CPMV_SUCCESS, the copy process is successful. Call the cnc_file_cpmv_end function to end the copy process. If result is CPMV_ER_OVERLAPPED, the copy process is interrupted because a file with the same name as the copy source exists in the copy destination. In this case, use the cnc_file_cpmv_restart function to overwrite, skip, or select to restart the copy process. If result is anything other than CPMV_SUCCESS, CPMV_ER_OVERLAPPED, the copy process has failed completely or partially. Call the cnc_file_cpmv_end function to end the copy process. About input / output devices It is possible to copy between different devices. The devices that can be specified are as follows. - Data server device (DATA_SV) - USB memory (USB_MEM) - CNC built-in memory device (CNC_MEM) - Memory card program device (MEMCARD) src: copy source, dst: copy destination dst CNC_MEM src MEMCARD CNC_MEM MEMCARD DATA_SV USB_MEM O: Copy of file/folder is available. - :Copy of file/folder is not available. * : Only copy of file is available. DATA_SV USB_MEM - * * O O - [Example] When copying O0001 file of the data server device to a USB memory. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name # Since it uses the sleep function, it must be run as an asynchronous script. ret_value = cnc_file_cpmv_start( 0,"//DATA_SV/O0001", "//USB_MEM/", 0) if ret_value != 0.to_i then # If an abnormal value is returned if ret_value == -1.to_i then # EW_BUSY Msg = " Copy processing by cnc_file_cpmv_start function is being executed." elsif ret_value == 4.to_i then # EW_ATTRIB Msg = " Incorrect data attribute for cnc_file_cpmv_start." end else # If a normal value is returned ret = -1.to_i while ret == -1.to_i do # EW_BUSY ret_values = cnc_file_cpmv_poll() 341/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== ret = ret_values[0].to_i result = ret_values [1].to_i error_path = ret_values [2].to_s sleep(10) if ret == -1.to_i then # EW_BUSY Msg = " Copy processing by cnc_file_cpmv_start function is being executed. " elsif ret == 1.to_i then # EW_FUNC Msg = " cnc_file_cpmv_start function not called." end if result == 3.to_i then # CPMV_ER_OVERLAPPE (if a file name with the same name exists) ret_value = cnc_file_cpmv_restart(1) # Overwrite execution if ret_value == -1.to_i then # EW_BUSY Msg = " cnc_file_cpmv_start function or cnc_file_cpmv_restart function is already executed. " elsif ret_value == 1.to_i then # EW_FUNC Msg = " cnc_file_cpmv_start function is not called." elsif ret_value == 4.to_i then # EW_ATTRIB Msg = " Incorrect data attributes." end sleep(10) end end ret_value = cnc_file_cpmv_end() if ret_value == 1.to_i then Msg = " cnc_file_cpmv_start function is not called." end # EW_FUNC end [Available CNC] FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Plus FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus : STEP1 series Edition 30.0 or later : since the first Edition : since the first Edition : since the first Edition Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Copy between USB memory (USB_MEM) and CNC built-in memory device (CNC_MEM) is available with the following edition. FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B : STEP2 series Edition 43.0 or later FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Plus : Edition 08.0 or later FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F : STEP2 series Edition 36.0 or later FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus : Edition 17.0 or later 342/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== NOTE It can be used when all systems are in EDIT mode or in the emergency stop state. Copy is not performed if the following conditions are met: - When the copy destination folder has the edit prohibition attribute - When the copy source file / folder is protected for the following reasons - Parameters NE8 / NE9 - Display prohibited attribute - Protected by 8-level data protection function - BG editing program - When the copy source or copy destination files is the main program or the running program - When the copy destination folder is a subfolder of the copy source folder When you specify a folder as the copy source, you cannot copy any of the files and folders in that folder that meet the following conditions. - When the copy source and copy destination files / folders are protected for the following reasons - Parameters NE8 / NE9 - Display prohibited attribute - Protected by 8-level data protection function - If there is a BG editing program under the folder or subfolder you are trying to overwrite - When the copy source or copy destination program has a higher protection level than the operation level in 8-level data protection. - When the copy source or copy destination file is the main program or the running program. - When copying, the depth of the folder path after copying exceeds the depth of the folder path allowed by the device. - When the source folder exists in the initial state (USER, MTB1, etc.) If you copy “//DATA_SV/DIR1/WORK1/A/” including folders / files that cannot be copied under “//USB_MEM/DIR1/WORK1/” as shown below, the folders under folder A If C is protected, only the files / folders before folder C are copied, and copying of the files / folders after folder C are interrupted. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Do not copy 343/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.37 Get result of copying arbitrary files / folders [Function] cnc_file_cpmv_poll [Syntax with arguments] cnc_file_cpmv_poll() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (97) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function Description Function return value EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Busy - Copy processing by cnc_file_cpmv_start function is being executed. - Other users are accessing the same data window. Try again. EW_FUNC cnc_file_cpmv_start function is not called. EW_VERSION CNC / PMC and library version mismatch Execution result CPMV_SUCCESS (0) Copy is successful. CPMV_ER_FORMAT (1) File / folder name format is incorrect, could not copy. If you specify a USB memory path that does not exist, this error occurs. CPMV_ER_NOT_EXIST (2) The specified file / folder cannot be found, could not copy. If you specify a data server path that does not exist, this error occurs. CPMV_ER_OVERLAPPED (3) A file with the same name as the copy source has already been registered in the copy destination, copy process is interrupted. Stop copying, or overwriting / skipping with cnc_file_cpmv_restart function to continue. CPMV_ER_HIERARCHICAL (4) The hierarchy of the folder tree after copying exceeds the maximum value, could not copy all files / folders. CPMV_ER_SUBFOLDER (5) The copy destination folder is the copy source folder Therefore, it could not be copied. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CPMV_ER_MAINPRG (6) 344/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description The copy could not be made because the main program was specified as the copy destination. CPMV_ER_MAINPROG_IN_FLDR (7) The main program was included in the folder specified as the copy destination, and it was not possible to copy all files / folders. . CPMV_ER_PROT_PROG (8) The copy destination or copy source folder / file was protected for one of the following reasons and could not be copied. - Parameters NE8 / NE9 - Edit prohibited attribute - Display prohibited attribute - Protected by 8-level data protection function - BG editing program CPMV_ER_PROT_PROG_IN_FLDR (9) Protected folders / files are included in the folder specified as copy source or copy destination, could not copy all files / folders. CPMV_ER_MEMORY_OVER (10) All files / folders could not be copied due to lack of free space. CPMV_ER_EXECPROG (11) The program under operation was specified as the copy destination and could not be copied. CPMV_ER_EXECPROG_IN_FLDR (12) The program being operated was included in the folder specified as the copy destination, could not copy all files / folders. CPMV_ER_REGSTRY_NUM_OVER (13) Could not copy all files / folders because the number of registrations was exceeded. CPMV_SUCCESS_SKIP(16) Copied while skipping files / folders with the same name. CPMV_ER_SAMEPATH(17) Could not copy because the copy source and copy destination are the same. CPMV_ER_DEVBUSY(18) Could not copy because the input / output device of the copy source or copy destination is in use. CPMV_ER_DEVINVALID(19) Could not copy because the input / output device of the copy cource or copy destination cannot be used. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CPMV_ER_VERSION(20) Could not copy because the version of the control software for the input / output device is not supported. 345/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description CPMV_ER_MODE(21) Copy was interrupted because it was copyed while operating or CNC mode was changed to other than EDIT mode or emergency stop while copying. Copying is possible between the data server and the USB memory only when the entire system is in EDIT mode, or in the emergency stop state and not in operation. CPMV_ER_SAMENAME(22) The file with the same name is already registered. 3rd element CPMV_ER_ALARM(23) Copy was interrupted due to the following NC alarm. - TH Parity Alarm - TV Parity Alarm - Format error in NC program statement - No Control-in The program / folder path that caused the error If the execution result is other than CPMV_SUCCESS, the program / folder path that caused the error is set. If the file / folder is 33 characters or more, or the full path is 256 characters or more, the file / folder name is cut off and stored. NULL is stored if it is not an error for a particular file / folder. String [Description] Gets the result of the copy process started by the cnc_file_cpmv_start function. The return value is EW_BUSY during the copy process. Call this function until the return value is other than EW_BUSY. If the return value (first element) of the function is EW_OK, the result of copy processing is stored in the second element. After that, be sure to execute cnc_file_cpmv_end and exit. If the second element is other than CPMV_SUCCESS, the program / folder path that caused the error is stored in the third element. If the second element is CPMV_ER_OVERLAPPED, you can restart the process by executing the cnc_file_cpmv_restart function to specify whether to overwrite or skip the file / folder of the third element. [Example] See the example of the cnc_file_cpmv_start function. [Available CNC] FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Plus FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus : STEP1 series Edition 30.0 or later : since the first Edition : since the first Edition : since the first Edition Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE It can be used when all systems are in EDIT mode or in the emergency stop state. 346/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 2.38 End of copying arbitrary files / folders [Function] cnc_file_cpmv_end [Syntax with arguments] cnc_file_cpmv_end() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (98) Value stored in the return value of cnc_file_cpmv_end function Type Description Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC The cnc_file_cpmv_start function is not called. EW_VERSION CNC / PMC and library version mismatch [Description] The copy process started by the cnc_file_cpmv_start function is terminated. [Example] See the usage example of the cnc_file_cpmv_start function. [Available CNC] FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Plus FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus : STEP1 series Edition 30.0 or later : since the first Edition : since the first Edition : since the first Edition NOTE It can be used when all systems are in EDIT mode or in the emergency stop state. 2.39 Resume copying arbitrary files / folders Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_file_cpmv_restart [Syntax with arguments] cnc_file_cpmv_restart(check_mode) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 347/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (99) Type Name check_mode Numerical value Arguments of the cnc_file_cpmv_restart function Description Specify the operation mode when resuming copy processing. CPMV_OVERWRITE(1) : Overwrite execution CPMV_SKIP(2) : Skip execution CPMV_OVERWRITE_ALL(3) : Overwrite all CPMV_SKIP_ALL(4) : All skip execution [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (100) Value stored in the return value of cnc_file_cpmv_restart function Description Type Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Busy - The cnc_file_cpmv_start function or cnc_file_cpmv_restart function has already been executed. Use the cnc_file_cpmv_end function to end the previous copy process. - Other users are accessing the same data window. Try again. EW_FUNC The cnc_file_cpmv_start function is not called. EW_ATTRIB Incorrect data attribute The value of the operation mode (check_mode) when resuming copy processing is invalid. EW_VERSION CNC / PMC and library version mismatch [Description] With the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function, if the result is a suspended state of copy processing by a file with the same name (result = CPMV_ER_OVERLAPPED), you can specify the subsequent operation (overwrite / skip, etc.) and restart the copy process. The execution method that can be specified is as follows. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name - Overwrite execution Overwrites the file with the same name obtained by the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function. If there is a file with the same name in the subsequent copy process, the copy process is interrupted again. - Skip execution Skips the file with the same name obtained by the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function. If there is a file with the same name in the subsequent copy process, the copy process is interrupted again. - Overwrite all Until the copy processing after the file with the same name obtained by the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function is completed, all the files with the same name are overwritten and the copy processing is continued. - All skip execution 348/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== All files with the same name are skipped and the copy process is continued until the copy process after the file with the same name obtained by the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function is completed. After executing this function, get the result by using the cnc_file_cpmv_poll function in the same way as the cnc_file_cpmv_start function. After that, be sure to execute the cnc_file_cpmv_end function to end the copy process. [Example] See the example of the cnc_file_cpmv_start function. [Available CNC] FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Plus FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus : STEP1 series Edition 30.0 or later : since the first Edition : since the first Edition : since the first Edition NOTE It can be used when all systems are in EDIT mode or in the emergency stop state. [CNC window library NC data file-related function reference] 3.1 Reading parameters (range specified) [Function] cnc_rdparar [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdparar(s_number, axis, e_number, length) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (101) Arguments of the cnc_rdparar function Numerical value Numerical value axis e_number Numerical value Numerical value length 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Start parameter number Specifies the parameter number to start reading data. Axis number Specifies the following value: (1) Non-axis parameter: 0 (2) Axis parameter, one axis: 1 to maximum controlled axis number (3) Axis parameter, all axes: -1 A non-axis parameter is read regardless of which value is specified as the axis number. When a non-axis parameter (0) is specified and an axis parameter exists within a range specified with the start parameter number and end parameter number, however, an error occurs. For the details of an error, refer to "Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdparar function" for the return value. End parameter number Specifies the parameter number to stop reading data. Data block length Specifies the data block length of the parameter to be read. For details on the values to be specified, refer to the explanation below. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page s_number Name Type Drawing number Name 349/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== The size per parameter is as shown in the table below. Because the sizes are arranged in ascending order with respect to the number of parameters in the range from the start parameter number to the end parameter number, the data block length (length) to be specified is the sum of them. Table 5.3 (102) Formula for calculating the size per piece of parameter data Specified axis number (axis) Formula Non-axis parameter (0), Axis parameter, one axis (1 to maximum controlled axis number) Axis parameter, all axes (-1) 4 + (byte size of the parameter) 4 + (byte size of the parameter) × (maximum number of controlled axes) There are the following types of parameters with different type and axis attributes, and the byte size is different for each parameter to be specified. It is impossible to read a bit parameter one bit at a time. The values of the specified parameters are read all at once 8 bits (1 byte) at a time. Table 5.3 (103) Byte size for each type of Parameter data Parameter type Bit parameter Bit parameter with axis Byte parameter Byte parameter with axis Word parameter Word parameter with axis 2-Word parameter 2-Word parameter with axis Real parameter Real parameter with axis Description Byte size Every bit has a meaning. Every bit has a meaning (each axis). 1-byte data is stored. 1-byte data is stored (each axis). 2-byte data is stored. 2-byte data is stored (each axis). 4-byte data is stored. 4-byte data is stored (each axis). 4-byte data that indicates the value of a variable and 4-byte data that indicates the number of decimal places are stored. 4-byte data that indicates the value of a variable and 4-byte data that indicates the number of decimal places are stored (each axis). 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 8 If the size per parameter is not a multiple of 4, it needs to be made a multiple of 4. (Example) When reading word parameters using non-axis parameters (axis = 0), the size of one parameter will be "4 + 2 bytes = 6", which is not a multiple of 4. Therefore, add the missing 2bytes as a dummy and specify 8 for the data block length (length). [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Incorrect data block length "length". EW_NUMBER Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Name 1st element Table 5.3 (104) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdparar function Type Description Drawing number Element 350/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 2nd element Numerical value 3rd element Array of m elements (m = Number of parameters that have actually been read) Incorrect parameter number "number". EW_ATTRIB A value other than 0, values from 1 to maximum controlled axis number, or -1 has been specified for the axis number. Or, an axis parameter existed within a range specified with the start parameter number and end parameter number. Number of parameters that have actually been read The number of parameters that have actually been read may not be the same as the number of parameters in the range from the start parameter number to the end parameter number. For example, when 1421 and 1423 are specified as the start parameter number and the end parameter number, the number of parameters in this range should be 3. However, there is no parameter whose number is 1422 so only the two parameters (1421 and 1423) are read; therefore, the value to be stored will be 2. Parameters that have been read (per parameter number) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in parameters that have been read (per parameter number)." Table 5.3 (105) Values to be stored in parameters that have been read (per parameter number) Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value 3rd element Variable array Parameter number Data type (1) Upper byte: Type attribute Bit type: 0 Byte type: 1 Word type: 2 2-word type: 3 Real type: 4 (2) Lower byte: Axis number Non-axis parameter: 0 Axis parameter, one axis: Axis number that has been read Axis parameter, all axes: -1 Values of the parameters that have been read For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in parameters that have been read." Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name For the read parameter values, the array elements become variable according to the type attribute and axis number each parameter has, as shown below. When the all axes specification for axis data (-1) is made and the type of the parameters that have been read is the axis type, the data for the current controlled axes will be valid. In addition, spindle-related parameters are also handled as axis parameters, but the data for the current spindles will be valid. 351/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type attribute that parameters have Table 5.3 (106) Values to be stored in parameters that have been read Specified axis number Number of Description elements in the array Bit type (0), Byte type (1), Word type (2), 2-word type (3) Non-axis parameter (0), Axis parameter, one axis (1 to maximum controlled axis number) 1 Axis parameter, all axes (-1) Maximum number of controlled axes 2 Real type (4) Non-axis parameter (0), Axis parameter, one axis (1 to maximum controlled axis number) Axis parameter, all axes (-1) Maximum number of controlled axes Bit/byte/word/2-word type parameters or axis parameters (one axis) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in bit/byte/word/2-word type parameters or axis parameters (one axis)." Bit/byte/word/2-word type axis parameters (for each axis) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in bit/byte/word/2-word type axis parameters (for each axis)." Real parameters or axis parameters (one axis) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in real parameters or axis parameters (one axis)." Real parameters with axis (for each axis) For details on the value, refer to the following table "Values to be stored in real parameters with axis (for each axis)." Table 5.3 (107) Values to be stored in bit/byte/word/2-word type parameters or axis parameters (one axis) Element 1st element Type Description Numerical value Value of the bit/byte/word/2-word type parameter or axis parameter (one axis) Table 5.3 (108) Values to be stored in bit/byte/word/2-word type axis parameters (for each axis) Element Type Description 1st to nth elements (n = Maximum number of controlled axes) Numerical value Value of the bit/byte/word/2-word type axis parameter (for each axis) Table 5.3 (109) Values to be stored in real parameters or axis parameters (one axis) Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Data of the real parameter or axis parameter (one axis) For details on the value, refer to the descriptions of real parameters shown below. Number of decimal places of the real parameter or axis parameter (one axis) Table 5.3 (110) Values to be stored in real parameters with axis (for each axis) Element Type Description 1st to nth elements Array of 2 elements Real parameters with axis (for each axis) The details on the values are the same as those shown in the above table "Values to be stored in real parameters or axis parameters (one axis)". A real parameter contains a data section and a section for the number of decimal places, which are expressed in the following format: Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Real parameter (data section)×10-(number of decimal places) 352/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== (Example) When the data is 12345 and the number of decimal places is 3, the real parameter is expressed as "12345×10-3 = 12.345". A conceptual image of the return value that will actually be returned is shown below. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name (1) When parameter numbers 6080 and 6081 (which are 2-word parameters) are read using non-axis parameters (axis = 0) [ 0, # Processing result (0 = EW_OK) 2, # Number of parameters that have actually been read [ # Parameters that have been read (per parameter number) [ # First parameter 6080, # Parameter number 768, # Data type (768(dec) = 0x0300(hex), upper byte = 3, lower byte = 0) [0] # Value of the bit/byte/word/2-word type axis parameter (array of 1 element) ], [ # Second parameter 6081, # Parameter number 768, # Data type [0] # Value of the bit/byte/word/2-word type axis parameter ] ] ] (2) When parameter numbers 1425 (real parameter with axis) and 1426 (real parameter) are read by specifying all axes for axis parameters (axis = -1) [ 0, # Processing result (0 = EW_OK) 2, # Number of parameters that have actually been read [ # Parameters that have been read (per parameter number) [ # First parameter 1425, # Parameter number 1279, # Data type (1279(dec) = 0x04FF(hex), upper byte = 4, lower byte = -1) [ # Real parameter with axis [100000, 4], # Value of the real parameter of the 1st axis (array of 2 elements) [100000, 4], # Value of the real parameter of the 2nd axis (same as above) [100000, 4], # Value of the real parameter of the 3rd axis (same as above) ... # The following is repeated to the maximum number of controlled axes. # (Data for the current number of controlled axes or spindles will be valid.) ] ], [ # Second parameter 1426, # Parameter number 1024, # Data type (1024(dec) = 0x0400(hex), upper byte = 4, lower byte = 0) [ # Real parameter [0, 4] # Value of the real parameter (array of 2 elements) ] ] ] ] [Description] 353/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Reads the parameters in the specified range at the same time based on the start parameter number (s_number), end parameter number (e_number), and axis number (axis). Parameters may be added because of, for example, the addition of CNC software functions. For example, if a parameter is added within the read range, an error may occur (return value of the function: EW_LENGTH) or the application program may not operate correctly. To prevent these problems, specify a read range containing only a set of consecutive parameter numbers. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When non-axis parameters (axis = 0) for parameter numbers 6080 and 6081 are read at the same time sno=6080 eno=6081 axis=0 len=(4+2+2)*2 # Input parameter start number (s_number) = 6080 # Input parameter end number (e_number) = 6081 # Axis number (axis) = 0 # Data block length (length) = (4 + byte size: 2 + dummy: 2) × two parameters ret = cnc_rdparar(sno, axis, eno, len) if ret[0] != EW_OK then # ret[0]: Processing result MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 3.2 Writing parameters (multiple output) [Function] cnc_wrparas [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrparas(length, param) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (111) Arguments of the cnc_wrparas function Type Description Name length Numerical value param Array of m elements (m = Number of parameters to be rewritten) Data block length Details of the value to be specified are the same as those of the data block length shown in "Arguments of the cnc_rdparar function." Parameters to be rewritten (for each parameter number) The number of elements required is the number of parameters to be rewritten. For details on the value to be specified, refer to the following table "Values to be set to parameters to be rewritten (for each parameter number)." Table 5.3 (112) Values to be set to parameters to be rewritten (for each parameter number) 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Parameters to be rewritten (1st to mth) For details on the value to be specified, refer to the following table "Values to be set to parameters to be rewritten." Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Array of 3 elements Description Name 1st to mth elements Type Drawing number Element 354/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (113) Values to be set to parameters to be rewritten Element Type 1st element Numerical value Numerical value 2nd element 3rd element Variable array Description Parameter number Specify the number of the parameter to be rewritten. Data type Specify a value of the type attribute as an upper byte and a value of the axis number as a lower byte. Details of the values to be specified are the same as those of "Values to be stored in parameters that have been read (per parameter number)" for the cnc_rdparar function. Value of the parameter to be rewritten Details of the values to be specified are the same as those of "Values to be stored in parameters that have been read" for the cnc_rdparar function. [Return] The return values from this function are as follows. Table 5.3 (114) Return values from the cnc_wrparas function Type Description Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH The number of elements for the value to be preset (for each axis) is incorrect. EW_NUMBER Incorrect parameter number "number". EW_ATTRIB A value other than 0, values from 1 to maximum controlled axis number, or -1 has been specified for the axis number. EW_PROT Write operation is prohibited. [Description] Rewrites multiples parameters in the specified input range at the same time based on the parameter numbers, data type, and parameter values set to the param argument. For some parameters, alarm PW0000 "POWER MUST BE OFF" may be issued when the data is rewritten. If parameters whose write operation is prohibited (for example, parameters whose numbers are in the nine thousands) exist in the specified parameter range, an error occurs. However, the other parameters are rewritten. [Example] When parameter numbers 6080 and 6081 (which are 2-word parameters) are rewritten at the same time type=(0x03 << 8 | 0x00) # Data type (upper byte: 3 and lower byte: 0) param=Array.new # Creates an array of parameters to be rewritten. param.push([6080, type, [[3]]]) # Sets 3 to the 1st parameter (parameter number: 6080). param.push([6081, type, [[3]]]) # Sets 3 to the 2nd parameter (parameter number: 6081). len=(4+2+2)*2 # Data block length (length) = (4 + byte size: 2 + dummy: 2) × two parameters Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_wrparas( len, param ) if ret != EW_OK then # ret: Processing results MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) 355/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== End 3.3 Reading workpiece coordinate system shift [Function] cnc_rdwkcdshft [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdwkcdshft(axis) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Name Table 5.3 (115) Arguments of the cnc_rdwkcdshft function Description Type axis Numerical value Axis number (= (1 to the maximum controlled axis number), or -1) 1~m: Specifies one axis (m: Current number of controlled axes) -1: Specifies all axes [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (116) Return value of the cnc_rdwkcdshft function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array of 2 elements Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Not available This function cannot be used for the M series. EW_ATTRIB The specified axis number is invalid. EW_PARAM CNC parameter error. Set bit 6 (NWS) of parameter No. 1201 to 0. Workpiece coordinate system shift data For details, refer to "Workpiece coordinate system shift data" below. Table 5.3 (117) Workpiece coordinate system shift data Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array of N elements (N is 1 or maximum number of controlled axes.) Axis number Tool management data number of the tool to be stored Workpiece coordinate system shift array (maximum number of controlled axes) The number of elements in the array depends on the value specified by the axis number. Array of 1 element for one axis (1 to m) Array of maximum number of controlled axes elements for all axes (-1) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads the workpiece coordinate system shift of the axis specified by "axis". The workpiece coordinate system shift data is stored in the workpiece coordinate system shift array in workpiece coordinate system shift data in signed binary format. The data of all axes can be read at once by setting -1 for the axis number. 356/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== The decimal point of the workpiece coordinate system shift data is read by using the cnc_getfigure function. [Example] When the workpiece coordinate system shift data of axis number 1 is read ret = cnc_rdwkcdshft (1) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 3.4 Writing workpiece coordinate system shift [Function] cnc_wrwkcdshft [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrwkcdshft(type, data) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Element Type type Numerical value data Array of N elements (N is 1 or maximum number of controlled axes.) Table 5.3 (118) Arguments of the cnc_wrwkcdshft function Description Axis number 1 to m: Specifies one axis (m: Current number of controlled axes) -1: Specifies all axes Workpiece coordinate system shift data (maximum number of controlled axes) The number of elements in the array depends on the value specified by the axis number. Array of 1 element for one axis (1 to m) Array of maximum number of controlled axes elements for all axes (-1) [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (119) Return value of the cnc_wrwkcdshft function Type Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Not available This function cannot be used for the M series. EW_ATTRIB The specified axis number is invalid. EW_DATA Incorrect NC program data. The workpiece coordinate system shift is out of the specifiable range. EW_PROT Write protection. Set bit 3 (WZO) of parameter No. 3290 to 0. Drawing number Numerical value 357/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description EW_PARAM CNC parameter error. Set bit 6 (NWS) of parameter No. 1201 to 0. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. The automatic operation start signal STL <F0000.5> is 1. [Description] Writes the workpiece coordinate system shift of the axis specified by the axis number. The workpiece coordinate system shift data is set to the workpiece coordinate system shift array in signed binary format. The data of all axes can be written at once by setting -1 to the axis number. The shift units are the same as those of the cnc_rdwkcdshft function described in "Reads workpiece coordinate system shift." Refer to the explanation of that function. CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the workpiece coordinate system shift data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong workpiece coordinate system shift data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the workpiece coordinate system shift data is safe and correct when doing so. [Example] When the workpiece coordinate system shift data "123" is set to axis number 1 ret = cnc_wrwkcdshft (1,123) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 3.5 Reading pitch error compensation data information [Function] cnc_rdpitchinfo [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpitchinfo() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT No options The pitch error compensation function is required. Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Drawing number Element 1st element Table 5.3 (120) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdpitchinfo function Type Description 358/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Numerical value Description Number of pitch error compensation data items to be read [Description] Reads the number of usable pitch error compensation data items. [Example] When the number of usable pitch error compensation data items is read Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 # Reads the number of usable pitch error compensation data items. Drawing number ret_values = cnc_rdpitchinfo() if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 359/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 3.6 Reading custom macro variable information [Function] cnc_rdmacroinfo [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdmacroinfo() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (121) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdmacroinfo function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT A required option is not specified. The custom macro function is required. Custom macro variable information For details on the value, refer to the following table "Custom macro variable information." Table 5.3 (122) Custom macro variable information Description Number of local variables The number of available local variables is stored. It is always 33. Range of common variables A value indicating the range of available common variables is stored. 0: 100 to 149, 500 to 531 1: 100 to 199, 500 to 999 2: 100 to 199, 500 to 599 [Description] Reads the number of custom macro local variables and the number of available common variables. [Example] When the number of custom macro local variables and the range of available common variables are read ret_values = cnc_rdmacroinfo() # Reads the number of custom macro local variables and the number of available common variables. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 3.7 Reading the minimum parameter number, maximum parameter number, and total number of parameters Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_rdparanum [Syntax with arguments] cnc_ rdparanum() 360/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (123) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdparanum function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination Information on the maximum parameter number, minimum parameter number, and total number of parameters For details on the value, see the following "Information on the maximum parameter number, minimum parameter number, and total number of parameters". Table 5.3 (124) Information on the maximum parameter number, minimum parameter number, and total number of parameters Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Maximum parameter number Minimum parameter number Total number of parameters [Description] Reads the minimum CNC parameter number, the maximum CNC parameter number, and the total number of CNC parameters. The distribution of CNC parameters varies from model to model, and additional parameters may be provided through function expansion. [Example] When the minimum CNC parameter number, the maximum CNC parameter number, and the total number of CNC parameters are read. ret_values = cnc_rdparanum() # Reads the minimum CNC parameter number, the maximum CNC parameter number, and the total number of CNC parameters. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 3.8 Reading the minimum setting parameter number, maximum setting parameter number, and total number of setting parameters Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_rdsetnum [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdsetnum() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 361/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (125) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdsetnum function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination Information on the maximum setting parameter number, minimum setting parameter number, and total number of setting parameters For details on the value, see the following "Information on the maximum setting parameter number, minimum setting parameter number, and total number of setting parameters". Table 5.3 (126) Information on maximum setting parameter number, minimum setting parameter number, and total number of setting parameters Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Maximum setting parameter number Minimum setting parameter number Total number of setting parameters [Description] Reads the minimum CNC setting parameter number, the maximum CNC setting parameter number, and the total number of CNC setting parameters. The distribution of CNC setting parameters varies from model to model, and additional parameters may be provided through function expansion. [Example] When the minimum CNC setting parameter number, the maximum CNC setting parameter number, and the total number of CNC setting parameters are read. ret_values = cnc_rdsetnum() # Reads the minimum CNC setting parameter number, the maximum CNC setting parameter number, and the total number of CNC setting parameters. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 3.9 Reading tool offset information (2) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_rdtofsinfo2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdtofsinfo2() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 362/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (127) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdtofsinfo2 function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT A required option is not specified. M series Number of tool offsets: (16)/32/64/99/200/400/499/999/2000 sets Tool offset memory (A)/B/C Tool radius and tool-nose radius compensation T series Number of tool offsets: (16)/32/64/99/200/400/499/999/2000 sets Tool geometry and wear compensation Tool radius and tool-nose radius compensation Y-axis offset Second geometry tool offset Tool offset information For details on the value, refer to the following table "Tool offset information." Table 5.3 (128) Tool offset information Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Offset memory type - Machining center: 0: Memory type A 1: Memory type B 2: Memory type C - Lathe: 0: No tool geometry or wear compensation performed. 1: Tool geometry or wear compensation performed. Number of available offsets 0 to 999 sets Type of usable offsets #0: X-axis offset Usable = 1/not usable = 0 #1: Y-axis offset Usable = 1/not usable = 0 #2: Z-axis offset Usable = 1/not usable = 0 #3: Tool-nose radius compensation Usable= 1/not usable = 0 #4: Virtual tool tip Usable= 1/not usable = 0 #5: Second geometry compensation Usable= 1/not usable = 0 #6~#15: (Not used) [Description] Reads the tool offset memory type and the number of usable offsets. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 5 of parameter No. 5009 (for the M series only) and parameter No. 5024 For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When the tool offset memory type and the number of usable offsets are read Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 # Reads the tool offset information. Drawing number ret_values = cnc_rdtofsinfo2() if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 363/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [CNC window library tool life management data-related function reference] 4.1 Reading tool life management data (number of tools, tool life, life counter) (range specified) [Function] cnc_rdtoolrng [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdtoolrng(s_number, e_number) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (129) Arguments of the cnc_rdtoolrng function Type Description Name s_number e_number Numerical value Numerical value Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (130) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdtoolrng function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (s_number or e_number) is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. Information on the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter For details on the value, refer to the following table "Information on the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter." Table 5.3 (131) Information on the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Array of N elements (N = Number of tool groups that have been read) Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. Tool life management data that has been read As many tool life management data items as tool groups that have been read are stored in an array. For details on the value, refer to the following table "Tool life management data that has been read." Table 5.3 (132) Tool life management data that has been read Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Description Number of tools Tool life value Tool life counter Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter value of each tool group within the specified range. 364/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== The units of the tool life value and tool life counter value are [minutes] or [times]. Which unit is used depends on the setting of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800 on the CNC. The number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter value of each tool group within the specified range are stored in the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter respectively in binary format. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. Bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter value of tool groups 10 to 12 are read s_number = 10 # Read start tool group number e_number = 12 # Read end tool group number # Reads the number of tools, tool life value, and tool life counter value of the group. ret_values = cnc_rdtoolrng( s_number, e_number ) if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 4.2 Writing tool life management data (life counter) (range specified) [Function] cnc_wrcountr [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrcountr(datano_s, datano_e, data) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (133) Arguments of the cnc_wrcountr function Description Numerical value Numerical value datano_e 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Write start tool group number Write end tool group number Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page datano_s Name Type Drawing number Name 365/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name data Type Array Description Tool life counter of the groups in the specified range The tool life counter value is stored in the array in binary format. The number of elements in the array is the number of tool groups in the specified range. The unit of the tool life counter value is [minutes] or [times]. Which unit is used depends on the setting of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800 on the CNC. The maximum life counter value is as follows: When bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is set to disable the tool life management B function : For the count specification : 65535 times For the time specification : 4300 minutes When bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is set to enable the tool life management B function : For the count specification : 99999999 times For the time specification : 100000 minutes 60000 minutes (0.1-second life count intervals) [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (134) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrcountr function Type Numerical value Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (datano_s or datano_e) is invalid. EW_DATA The tool life counter value is beyond the limit. EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. [Description] Rewrites the tool life counter value of each tool group within the specified range. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (TC1) of parameter No. 6804. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When the tool life counter values of tool group numbers 10 to 12 are rewritten Each tool life counter type is as shown below. Tool group number: 10, 12 Tool life counter type: Times Tool group number: 11 Tool life counter type: Minutes 366/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== datano_s = 10 # Write start tool group number datano_e = 12 # Write end tool group number data = [65535, 4300, 65535] # Tool life counter values of tool group numbers 10 to 12 # Rewrites the tool life counter values of the specified tool groups. ret_value = cnc_wrcountr( datano_s, datano_e, data ) if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 4.3 Reading tool life management data (number of tool group being used or to be used) [Function] cnc_rdusegrpid [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdusegrpid() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (135) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdusegrpid function Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. Information on the numbers of the tool groups to be used For details on the value, refer to the following table "Information on the numbers of the tool groups to be used." Table 5.3 (136) Information on the numbers of the tool groups to be used Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Number of the next tool group to be used. Number of the tool group being used. Number of the selected tool group. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads the numbers of the tool groups being used and to be used. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire 367/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When the numbers of the tool groups to be used are read ret_values = cnc_rdusegrpid( ) if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end # Reads the numbers of the tool groups to be used. 4.4 Reading tool life management data (maximum number of tool groups that can be registered) [Function] cnc_rdmaxgrp [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdmaxgrp() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (137) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdmaxgrp function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. Maximum number of tool groups that can be registered [Description] Reads the maximum number of tool groups that can be registered. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. 368/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When the maximum number of tool groups that can be registered is read ret_values = cnc_rdmaxgrp( ) # Reads the maximum number of tool groups that can be registered. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 4.5 Reading tool life management data (maximum number of tools that can be registered in a group) [Function] cnc_rdmaxtool [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdmaxtool() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (138) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdmaxtool function Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. Maximum number of tools that can be registered in a group [Description] Reads the maximum number of tools that can be registered in a group. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When the maximum number of tools that can be registered in a group is read Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret_values = cnc_rdmaxtool( ) # Reads the maximum number of tools that can be registered in a group. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 369/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4.6 Reading tool life management data (ordinal number of the tool to be used in a group) [Function] cnc_rdusetlno [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdusetlno(s_grp, e_grp) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (139) Arguments of the cnc_rdusetlno function Name Type s_grp e_grp Numerical value Numerical value Description Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (140) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdusetlno function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error Tool group number (s_grp or e_grp) EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. Ordinal number of tools For details on the value, refer to the following table "Ordinal number of tools." Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Array Table 5.3 (141) Ordinal number of tools Description Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. Ordinal number of the tool to be used in each group As many tool ordinal numbers as tool groups that have been read are stored in an array. The number of elements in the array is the number of tool groups. [Description] Reads the ordinal numbers of tools to be used in a group. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] 370/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== When the ordinal numbers of tools to be used in tool group numbers 10 to 12 are read s_grp = 10 # Read start tool group number e_grp = 12 # Read end tool group number ret_values = cnc_rdusetlno( s_grp, e_grp ) # Reads the ordinal numbers of tools to be used in the groups. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 4.7 Reading tool life management data (tool data 1) (2) [Function] cnc_rd1tlifedat2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rd1tlifedat2(grp_num, tool_num) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (142) Arguments of the cnc_rd1tlifedat2 function Description Name Type grp_num tool_num Numerical value Numerical value Tool group number Tool number [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (143) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rd1tlifedat2 function Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (grp_num) is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified tool number (tool_num) is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. All tool information For details on the value, refer to the table "All tool information" below. Table 5.3 (144) All tool information 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Tool group number Tool number Tool length compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Name Type Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Drawing number Element 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 371/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 4th element Numerical value 5th element Numerical value Tool radius compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool information 0: (See below.) 1: The tool is registered. 2: The life of the tool ends. 3: The tool is skipped. When 0 is specified for grp_num or tool_num, the tool group or tool currently being used is referenced, respectively. When no tool group number has been specified since power-on, however, 0 is stored. [Description] Reads all tool information. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When all tool information of tool number "1001" in tool group number "10" is read grp_num = 10 # Tool group number tool_num = 1001 # Tool number ret_values = cnc_rd1tlifedat2( grp_num, tool_num ) if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end # Acquires all tool information. 4.8 Reading tool life management data (tool data 2) [Function] cnc_rd2tlifedata [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rd2tlifedata(grp_no, use_no) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (145) Arguments of the cnc_rd2tlifedata function Name grp_no use_no Type Numerical value Numerical value Description Tool group number Tool ordinal number Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 372/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Table 5.3 (146) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rd2tlifedata function Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Array Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value 5th element Numerical value 6th element Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (grp_no) is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified tool ordinal number (use_no) is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options. The tool life management function is required. All tool information For details on the value, refer to the table "All tool information" below. Table 5.3 (147) All tool information Description Tool group number Tool ordinal number Tool number Tool length compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool radius compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool information 0: (See below.) 1: The tool is registered. 2: The life of the tool ends. 3: The tool is skipped. When 0 is specified for grp_no, the tool group currently being used is referenced. When no tool group number has been specified since power-on, however, 0 is stored. When 0 is specified for use_no, the tool currently being used is referenced for the number of a tool group already used or the first tool is referenced for the number of a tool group that has not yet been used. [Description] Reads all tool information. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When all tool information of tool ordinal number 3 in tool group number 10 is read 373/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== grp_no = 10 # Tool group number use_no = 3 # Tool ordinal number ret_values = cnc_rd2tlifedata( grp_no, use_no ) # Acquires all tool information. if ret_values[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 4.9 Writing tool life management data (tool data 1) (2) [Function] cnc_wr1tlifedat2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wr1tlifedat2(datano, type, tool_num, h_code, d_code, tool_inf) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (148) Arguments of the cnc_wr1tlifedat2 function Name Type Description datano type tool_num h_code d_code tool_inf Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Tool group number (Current) tool number (New) tool number Tool length compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool radius compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool information 1: The tool is registered. 2: The life of the tool ends. 3: The tool is skipped. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 374/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (149) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wr1tlifedat2 function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (datano) is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified current tool number (type) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: New tool number (tool_num) error. 2: Tool length compensation number (h_code) error. 3: Tool radius compensation number (d_code) error. 4: Tool information (tool_inf) error. EW_NOOPT No options The tool life management function is required. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. For a normal call : An attempt was made to rewrite data of the tool group currently being used or the next tool group to be used. [Description] Writes all tool information. When all of the following conditions are satisfied for a normal call, error EW_REJECT(13) is returned: During automatic operation (OP = 1). The tool group with the target number is being used or is to be used next. Bit 1 (TCO) of parameter No. 6802 = 0. When all of the following conditions are satisfied for a normal call, the tool status cannot be changed to the cleared state: During automatic operation (OP = 1). The tool group with the target number is being used or is to be used next. The tool with the target number is being used. Bit 1 (TCO) of parameter No. 6802 = 1. Bit 2 (E17) of parameter No. 6802 = 1. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (TCO) of parameter No. 6802. Bit 2 (E17) of parameter No. 6802. Bit 1 (TC1) of parameter No. 6804. 375/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When all tool information of tool number 1001 in tool group number 10 is written datano = 10 # Tool group number type = 1001 # Current tool number tool_num = 1010 # New tool number h_code = 11 # Tool length compensation number d_code = 11 # Tool radius compensation number tool_inf = 2 # Tool information (2: The life of the tool ends.) ret_value = cnc_wr1tlifedat2( datano, type, tool_num, h_code, d_code, tool_inf ) # Writes all tool information. if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 4.10 Writing tool life management data (tool data 2) [Function] cnc_wr2tlifedata [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wr2tlifedata(datano, type, tool_num, h_code, d_code, tool_inf) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (150) Arguments of the cnc_wr2tlifedata function Name Type Description datano type tool_num h_code d_code tool_inf Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Tool group number Tool ordinal number (New) tool number Tool length compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool radius compensation number (0 is always read for the lathe system (T series).) Tool information 1: The tool is registered. 2: The life of the tool ends. 3: The tool is skipped. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 376/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (151) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wr2tlifedata function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (datano) is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified tool ordinal number (type) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: New tool number (tool_num) error. 2: Tool length compensation number (h_code) error. 3: Tool radius compensation number (d_code) error. 4: Tool information (tool_inf) error. EW_NOOPT No options The tool life management function is required. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. For a normal call : An attempt was made to rewrite data of the tool group currently being used or the next tool group to be used. [Description] Writes all tool information. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (TCO) of parameter No. 6802. Bit 2 (E17) of parameter No. 6802. Bit 1 (TC1) of parameter No. 6804. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When all tool information of tool ordinal number 3 in tool group number "10" is written Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name datano = 10 # Tool group number type = 3 # Tool ordinal number tool_num = 1010 # New tool number h_code = 11 # Tool length compensation number d_code = 11 # Tool radius compensation number tool_inf = 2 # Tool information (2: The life of the tool ends.) 377/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== ret_value = cnc_wr2tlifedata( datano, type, tool_num, h_code, d_code, tool_inf ) # Writes all tool information. if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 4.11 Writing tool life management data (tool group information) [Function] cnc_wrgrpinfo [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrgrpinfo(s_grp, e_grp, data) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (152) Arguments of the cnc_wrgrpinfo function Type Description Name s_grp e_grp data Numerical value Numerical value Array of N elements (N = Number of tool groups to be written) Element 1st element 2nd element 3rd element Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. Array of tool group information For details on the value, refer to the following table "Tool group information." Table 5.3 (153) Tool group information Type Description Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Tool life value Tool life counter Tool life counter type 0: Number of times 1: Time Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 378/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (154) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrgrpinfo function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (s_grp or e_grp) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: Tool life value (count_value) error. 2: Tool life counter value (counter) error. 3: Tool life counter type (count_type) error. 5: During automatic operation. 6: Next group to be used or group being used. (No items other than the life counter value can be changed.) Moreover, the block number including illegal data (0 or greater) is set in "Error data number" in the return value array. The tool group number is set. EW_NOOPT No options The tool life management function is required. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. For a normal call : An attempt was made to rewrite data of the tool group currently being used or the next tool group to be used. [Description] Writes tool group information. The maximum life value and life counter value are as follows: When bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is set to disable the tool life management B function : For the count specification : 65535 times For the time specification : 4300 minutes When bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is set to enable the tool life management B function : For the count specification : 99999999 times For the time specification : 100000 minutes 60000 minutes (0.1-second life count intervals) Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (TC1) of parameter No. 6804. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. 379/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When the tool group information of tool group numbers "10" and "11" is written s_grp = 10 # Read start tool group number e_grp = 11 # Read end tool group number data = [[10, 5, 0], [11, 5, 1]] # Tool group information to be written ret_value = cnc_wrgrpinfo( s_grp, e_grp,data ) # Writes tool group information. if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 4.12 Writing tool life management data (tool group information 2) [Function] cnc_wrgrpinfo2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrgrpinfo2(s_grp, e_grp, opt_grpno) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (155) Arguments of the cnc_wrgrpinfo2 function Type Description Name s_grp e_grp opt_grpno Numerical value Numerical value Array Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. Arbitrary group number As many arbitrary group numbers as tool group numbers to be written are stored in the array. The number of elements is the number of tool groups to be written. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 380/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (156) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrgrpinfo2 function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (s_grp or e_grp) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: Arbitrary group number (opt_grpno) error. Moreover, the block number including illegal data (0 or greater) is set in "Error data number" in the return value array. The tool group number is set. EW_NOOPT No options The tool life management function is required. EW_PARAM No parameter Parameters of the tool life management B function and arbitrary group number function must be specified. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. For a normal call : An attempt was made to rewrite data of the tool group currently being used or the next tool group to be used. [Description] Writes tool group information 2. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (TC1) of parameter No. 6804. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When arbitrary group numbers of tool group numbers "10" to "11" are written Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name s_grp = 10 # Read start tool group number e_grp = 11 # Read end tool group number opt_grpno = [5, 6] # Arbitrary group numbers to be written ret_value = cnc_wrgrpinfo2( s_grp, e_grp,opt_grpno ) # Writes arbitrary group numbers. if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) 381/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== end CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 4.13 Writing tool life management data (tool group information 3) [Function] cnc_wrgrpinfo3 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrgrpinfo3(s_grp, e_grp, life_rest) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (157) Arguments of the cnc_wrgrpinfo3 function Description Name Type s_grp e_grp life_rest Numerical value Numerical value Array Read start tool group number. Read end tool group number. Remaining life setting The remaining life settings for as many tool groups as written are stored in the array. The number of elements is the number of tool groups to be written. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 382/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (158) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrgrpinfo3 function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (s_grp or e_grp) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: Remaining life setting (life_rest) error. Moreover, the block number including illegal data (0 or greater) is set in "Error data number" in the return value array. The tool group number is set. EW_NOOPT No options The tool life management function is required. EW_PARAM No parameter Parameters of the tool life management B function must be specified. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. For a normal call : An attempt was made to rewrite data of the tool group currently being used or the next tool group to be used. [Description] Writes tool group information 3. Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (TC1) of parameter No. 6804. Bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When arbitrary group numbers of tool group numbers "10" to "11" are written Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 # Writes remaining life settings. Drawing number s_grp = 10 # Read start tool group number e_grp = 11 # Read end tool group number life_rest = [5, 6] # Remaining life settings ret_value = cnc_wrgrpinfo3( s_grp, e_grp, life_rest ) if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 383/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 4.14 Deleting tool life management data (tool group information) [Function] cnc_deltlifegrp [Syntax with arguments] cnc_deltlifegrp(number) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (159) Arguments of the cnc_deltlifegrp function Name number Type Numerical value Description Tool group number [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (160) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_deltlifegrp function Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_NUMBER Data number error The tool group number (number) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 5: During automatic operation. 6: Next group to be used or group being used. EW_NOOPT No options The tool life management function is required. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. No data can be written because processing is being executed for the group, the group is selected, or data of the group is being buffered. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Deletes a tool group. Information belonging to the specified group is all cleared. 384/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Up to 256 sets (for both the M and T series) are available for tool life management throughout the entire system. When additional tool set options for tool life management are added, the number of sets is extended to 1024 (for both the M and T series) throughout the entire system. The following parameters are related to this function: Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800. Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800. Parameter No. 6813. For details on the parameters, refer to the "PARAMATER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When tool group information of tool group number "15" is deleted number = 15 # Tool group number ret_value = cnc_wrgrpinfo3( s_grp, e_grp, life_rest ) if ret_value != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end # Deletes the tool group information. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CAUTION Use sufficient care when you delete the tool life management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool life management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that deleting the tool life management data is safe and correct when doing so. 385/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [CNC window library tool management data-related function reference] 5.1 Registering tool management data as a new entry (when customization data items 21 to 40 are used) [Function] cnc_regtool_f2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_regtool_f2(s_number, data_num, tool) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (161) Arguments of the cnc_regtool_f2 function Name Type Description s_number data_num Numerical value Numerical value tool Array of N elements (N = Number of registered data items) Start data number for registering data with the tool management data table Number of registered data items Set a value larger than 1 as the number of registered data items. Array of tool management data to be registered For details on the value, refer to the following table "Tool management data to be registered/set." Table 5.3 (162) Tool management data to be registered/set Description 3rd element Numerical value 4th element Numerical value 5th element Numerical value 6th element Numerical value 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Numerical value Tool type number (T) (Input range: 0 to 99999999) Tool life counter (Input range: 0 to 99999999, increment system: time) (Input range: 0 to 3599999, increment system: second) Maximum tool life value (Input range: 0 to 99999999, increment system: time) (Input range: 0 to 3599999, increment system: second) Remaining tool life value (Input range: 0 to 99999999, increment system: time) (Input range: 0 to 3599999, increment system: second) State of tool life 0: Life is not managed. 1: Unused tool 2: Life is limited. 3: Life has expired. 4: Tool damaged (skip) Customization (bits) Name 2nd element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Created Type Numerical value Drawing number Element 1st element 386/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Description 7th element Numerical value 8th element Numerical value 9th element Numerical value 10th element Numerical value 11th element 12th element Numerical value Numerical value 13th element Numerical value 14th element 15th element 16th element 17th element 18th element 19th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value 20th element Numerical value 21st element Numerical value 22nd element Numerical value 23rd element Numerical value 24th element Numerical value 25th element Numerical value 26th element Numerical value 27th element Numerical value 28th element Numerical value 29th element Numerical value Tool information bit 0 : RGS 0: Tool management data is invalid. 1: Tool management data is valid. bit 1 : TIM 0: Life is counted by counting the number of times. 1: Life is counted by counting the period of time. bit 2 : BDT 0: Normal tool 1: Tool with a large diameter bit 3 : LOC 0: Enables data access. 1: Disables data access. Bits 4 to 15: Reserved Tool length compensation No. (H) (Input range: 0 to 999) Tool radius compensation No. (D) (Input range: 0 to 999) Spindle speed (S) (Input range: 0 to 99999, increment system : /min) Cutting feedrate (F) Tool geometry compensation No. (G) (Valid only for lathe systems) Tool wear compensation No. (W) (Valid only for lathe systems) Tool geometry number Edge group number Edge number Storage destination magazine number Storage destination pot number Customizing data 1 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 2 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 3 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 4 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 5 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 6 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 7 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 8 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 9 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 10 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 11 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Type Drawing number Element 387/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Numerical value 31st element Numerical value 32nd element Numerical value 33rd element Numerical value 34th element Numerical value 35th element Numerical value 36th element Numerical value 37th element Numerical value 38th element Numerical value 39th element Numerical value 40th element Numerical value 41st element Numerical value 42nd element Numerical value 43rd element Numerical value 44th element Numerical value 45th element Numerical value 46th element Numerical value 47th element Numerical value 48th element Numerical value 49th element Numerical value 50th element Numerical value 51st element Numerical value 52nd element Numerical value 53rd element Numerical value 54th element Numerical value 55th element Numerical value 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Customizing data 12 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 13 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 14 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 15 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 16 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 17 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 18 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 19 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 20 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 21 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 22 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 23 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 24 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 25 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 26 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 27 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 28 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 29 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 30 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 31 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 32 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 33 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 34 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 35 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 36 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 37 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 30th element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Name Type Drawing number Element 388/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 56th element Numerical value 57th element Numerical value 58th element Numerical value Customizing data 38 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 39 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) Customizing data 40 (Input range: -99999999 to 99999999) NOTE 1 For customization 5 through 20, registration and setting operations are permitted only when equipped with the customization data expansion (5 to 20) option of the tool management function. 2 For customization 5 through 40, registration and setting operations are permitted only when equipped with the customization data expansion (5 to 40) option of the tool management function. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (163) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_regtool_f2 function Numerical value 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. EW_NUMBER Start data number error The start data number (s_number) is invalid. Or, an attempt was made to exceed the valid number of data items in the tool management data table. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: Tool type number error. 2: Tool life counter error. 3: Error in the maximum tool life value. 4: Error in the tool life value reported in advance. 5: Error in the tool life status. 6: Customization 0 error. 7: Tool information error. 8: Tool length compensation number (H) error. 9: Tool radius compensation number (D) error. 10: Spindle speed (S) error. 11: Cutting feedrate (F) error. 12: Tool geometry compensation number (G) error. 13: Tool wear compensation number (W) error. 14: Tool geometry number error. 15: Edge group number error. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1st element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Name Type Drawing number Element 389/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 16: 17: 18: 27: 2nd element Numerical value Edge number error. Error in the storage destination magazine number. Error in the storage destination pot number. The magazine and pot specified as the storage destination have already been registered. 29: Multi edge data is illegal. (There is an inconsistency in the data for a multi-edged tool in the tool management function.) 31-70: Customization 1 to 40 error. EW_NOOPT Required option not specified. The tool life management function (64, 240, or 1000 pairs) is required. EW_PROT Write protection The tool management data table is write-protected. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. An attempt was made to register an already existing tool management data table entry. Number of data items actually registered [Description] In the tool management data table, it registers tool management data in the range specified with the starting data number and the number of data items. Tool management data items are sequentially registered one by one. If an error occurs, the subsequent registration operations are not performed. CAUTION Use sufficient care when writing the tool management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool management data is safe and correct when doing so. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Example] When tool data with respect to the following two tool management data items are registered starting from start data number 10: 1 Tool type number = 20, Tool life counter = 21, Maximum tool life value = 22, Remaining tool life value = 23, Tool life state = 3, Customization (bits) = 24, Tool information = 25, Tool length compensation number = 26, Tool radius compensation number = 27, Spindle speed = 28, Cutting feedrate = 29, Tool geometry compensation number = 32, Tool wear compensation number = 33, Tool geometry number = 0, Edge group number = 0, Edge number = 0, Storage destination magazine number = 1, Storage destination pot number = 1, Customization 1 to 40 = 0 2 Tool type number = 10, Tool life counter = 11, Maximum tool life value = 12, Remaining tool life value = 13, Tool life state = 3, Customization (bits) = 14, Tool information = 15, Tool length compensation number = 16, Tool radius compensation number = 17, Spindle speed = 18, Cutting feedrate = 19, Tool geometry compensation number = 22, Tool wear compensation number = 23, 390/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Tool geometry number = 0, Edge group number = 0, Edge number = 0, Storage destination magazine number = 1, Storage destination pot number = 1, Customization 1 to 40 = 0 s_number = 10 # Start data number data_num = 2 # Number of registered data items tool1[58]=[20,21,22,23,3,24,25,26,27,28,29,32,33,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0] # 1st tool management data to be registered tool2[58]=[10,11,12,13,2,14,15,16,17,18,19,22,23,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0] # 2nd tool management data to be registered tool[2] = [tool1,tool2] ret = cnc_regtool_f2(s_number, data_num, tool ) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 5.2 Writing tool management data (when customization data items 21 to 40 are used) [Function] cnc_wrtool_f2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrtool_f2(number, tool) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (164) Arguments of the cnc_wrtool_f2 function Name Type Description number tool Numerical value Array Data number in the tool management data table Tool management data to be set For details on the value, refer to "Tool management data to be registered/set." [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (165) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrtool_f2 function Description Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. EW_NUMBER Data number error The start data number (number) is invalid. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: Tool type number error. 2: Tool life counter error. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Type 391/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 27: 29: Error in the maximum tool life value. Error in the tool life value reported in advance. Error in the tool life status. Customization 0 error. Tool information error. Tool length compensation number (H) error. Tool radius compensation number (D) error. Spindle speed (S) error. Cutting feedrate (F) error. Tool geometry compensation number (G) error. Tool wear compensation number (W) error. Tool geometry number error. Edge group number error. Edge number error. Error in the storage destination magazine number. Error in the storage destination pot number. The magazine and pot specified as the storage destination have already been registered. Multi edge data is illegal. (There is an inconsistency in the data for a multi-edged tool in the tool management function.) 31-70: Customization 1 to 40 error. EW_NOOPT Required option not specified. The tool life management function (64, 240, or 1000 pairs) is required. EW_PROT Write protection The tool management data table is write-protected. [Description] Writes a specific tool management data item in the tool management data table. To set individual items in specific tool management data, use the wrtool function. CAUTION Use sufficient care when writing the tool management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool management data is safe and correct when doing so. 5.3 Registering magazine management data as a new entry Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_regmagazine [Syntax with arguments] cnc_regmagazine(data_num, mag) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 392/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (166) Arguments of the cnc_regmagazine function Type Description Name data_num Numerical value mag Array of N elements (N = Number of registered data items) Table 5.3 (167) Tool management data to be registered Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value 3rd element Number of registered data items Set a value larger than 1 as the number of registered data items. Array of tool management data For details on the value, refer to "Tool management data to be registered." Magazine number A spindle position and a standby position can also be specified. In such a case, a pot number need not be specified. (Input range: 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 21 to 24) Pot number (Input range: Depends on the CNC options and CNC parameter settings.) Tool management data number (Input range: 0 to 65535) [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (168) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_regmagazine function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 21: Magazine number error. 22: Pot number error. 23: Tool management data number error. EW_NOOPT Required option not specified. The tool life management function (64, 240, or 1000 pairs) is required. EW_PROT Write protection The tool management data table is write-protected. EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. An attempt was made to register an already existing magazine management table entry. Number of data items actually registered Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Registers a tool management data number in the magazine management table. 393/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== The magazine management table is searched for the magazine number and pot number, and a tool management data number is written for each matching entry. CAUTION Use sufficient care when writing the tool management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool management data is safe and correct when doing so. [Example] When the following two tool management data items are registered 1st item: Magazine number = 1, Pot number = 1, Tool management data number = 10 2nd item: Magazine number = 2, Pot number = 2, Tool management data number = 20 data_num = 2 mag1[3] = [1,1,10] mag2[3] = [2,2,20] mag[2] = [mag1, mag2] # Number of registered data items # 1st tool management data to be registered # 2nd tool management data to be registered ret = cnc_regmagazine(data_num, mag) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 5.4 Deleting magazine management data [Function] cnc_delmagazine [Syntax with arguments] cnc_delmagazine(data_num, mag) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (169) Arguments of the cnc_ delmagazine function Type Description Array of N elements (N = Number of data items to be deleted) 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page mag Number of data items to be deleted Set a value larger than 1 as the number of registered data items. Array of magazine management data to be deleted For details on the value, refer to "Magazine management data to be deleted." Name Numerical value Drawing number Name data_num 394/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (170) Magazine management data to be deleted Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Magazine number A spindle position and a standby position can also be specified. In such a case, a pot number need not be specified. (Input range: 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 21 to 24) Pot number (Input range: Depends on the CNC options and CNC parameter settings.) [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (171) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_ delmagazine function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. EW_DATA Data error To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 21: Magazine number error. 22: Pot number error. EW_NOOPT Required option not specified. The tool life management function (64, 240, or 1000 pairs) is required. EW_PROT Write protection The tool management data table is write-protected. Number of data items actually deleted [Description] Deletes a tool management data number in the magazine management table. The magazine management table is searched for the magazine number and pot number, and the tool management data numbers are deleted for each matching entry. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CAUTION Use sufficient care when writing the tool management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool management data is safe and correct when doing so. 395/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When the following two tool management data items are deleted 1st item: Magazine number = 1, Pot number = 1 2nd item: Magazine number = 2, Pot number = 2 data_num = 2 # Number of data items to be deleted mag1[2] = [1,1] # 1st magazine management data item to be deleted mag2[2] = [2,2] # 2nd magazine management data item to be deleted mag[2] = [mag1, mag2] ret = cnc_delmagazine(data_num, mag) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 5.5 Reading magazine management data [Function] cnc_rdmagazine [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdmagazine(data_num, mag) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (172) Arguments of the cnc_rdmagazine function Name Type Description data_num Numerical value mag Array of N elements (N = Number of data items to be read) Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Number of data items to be read Set a value larger than 1 as the number of registered data items. Array of tool management data to be read For details on the value, refer to "Magazine management data to be read." Table 5.3 (173) Magazine management data to be read Description Magazine number A spindle position and a standby position can also be specified. In such a case, a pot number need not be specified. (Input range: 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 21 to 24) Pot number (Input range: Depends on the CNC options and CNC parameter settings.) [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Name 1st element Table 5.3 (174) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdmagazine function Type Description Drawing number Element 396/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description EW_DATA Data error To obtain more detailed information about this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 21: Magazine number error. 22: Pot number error. EW_NOOPT Required option not specified. The tool life management function (64, 240, or 1000 pairs) is required. Number of data items actually read Array of N elements (N = Number of data items to be read) Array of tool management data For details on the value, refer to the following table "Tool management data that has been read." Element Table 5.3 (175) Tool management data that has been read Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value 3rd element Numerical value Magazine number The value specified for the argument is returned. Pot number The value specified for the argument is returned. Tool management data number [Description] Reads a tool management data number in the magazine management table. The magazine management table is searched for magazine number and pot number, and a tool management data number is read for each matching entry. [Example] When the following two tool management data items are deleted 1st item: Magazine number = 1, Pot number = 1 2nd item: Magazine number = 2, Pot number = 2 data_num = 2 mag1[2] = [1,1] mag2[2] = [2,2] mag[2] = [mag1, mag2] # Number of read data items # 1st read magazine management data item # 2nd read magazine management data item ret = cnc_ rdmagazine(data_num, mag) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 5.6 Writing individual items in magazine management data Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_wrmagazine 397/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrmagazine(magazine, pot, tool_index) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Name Type magazine Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value pot tool_index Table 5.3 (176) Arguments of the cnc_wrmagazine function Description Specify a magazine number. (Input range: 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 21 to 24) Specify a pot number. (Input range: Varies depending on the CNC options and CNC parameter settings.) Specify a tool management data number. (Input range: 1 to 65535) [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (177) Return value of the cnc_wrmagazine function Description Type Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. EW_DATA The argument is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA 21: Magazine number error 22: Pot number error 23: Tool management data number error EW_NOOPT A required option is not specified. The tool management function (64, 240, or 1000 pairs) is required. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. The magazine management table is write-protected. [Description] Writes a tool management data number in a magazine management table entry specified by a magazine number and a pot number. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name CAUTION Use sufficient care when writing the tool management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool management data is safe and correct when doing so. 398/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When data having magazine number = 1, pot number = 1, and tool management data number = 10 is written ret = cnc_wrmagazine(1,1,10) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 5.8 Writing tool geometry data [Function] cnc_wrtoolgeom_tlm [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrtoolgeom_tlm(snum, datanum, tool) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (178) Arguments of the cnc_wrtoolgeom_tlm function Name Type snum Numerical value Numerical value datanum tool Array Description Specify a tool geometry data registration number. Specify the number of data items to register. The tool geometry data of the number of "datanum" items are registered starting from the tool geometry data number specified by "snum". Array in which the tool geometry data items to be registered are stored For the elements of each item, refer to the table "Array of tool geometry data to be registered." Table 5.3 (179) Array of tool geometry data to be registered Type Description Element 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Set a value from 0 to 4 as the number of pots occupied to the left. Set a value from 0 to 4 as the number of pots occupied to the right. Set a value from 0 to 4 as the number of pots occupied above. Set a value from 0 to 4 as the number of pots occupied below. Set 0 for geometry A or 1 for geometry B. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (180) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrtoolgeom_tlm function Type Description 1st element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY Another user is accessing the same data window. Execute this function again. EW_LENGTH The specification of the number of data items to register (datanum) is invalid. EW_NUMBER Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Element 399/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Numerical value Description The registration number of tool geometry data (snum) is invalid. EW_DATA One of the values specified for tool geometry data is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set to "Detail status" of the return value array: 0: Error other than EW_DATA 1: Error in the number of pots occupied to the left 2: Error in the number of pots occupied to the right 3: Error in the number of pots occupied above 4: Error in the number of pots occupied below 5: Geometry error EW_NOOPT No options The optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and a large radius tool supporting option are required. EW_PROT If the tool geometry data to be changed is registered with a tool stored in a pot, the data is assumed to be protected, and this value is returned. Number of data items that have been registered successfully [Description] Writes as many tool geometry data items as the number specified for datanum, starting from the tool geometry data number specified for snum. To enable this function, the optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and a large radius tool supporting option are required. [Example] When the following information is written in the tool geometry data: Number of the tool geometry data to be written: 1, registration number: 2 1st registration Number of pots occupied to the left: 1, Number of pots occupied to the right: 2, Number of pots occupied above: 3, Number of pots occupied below: 4, Geometry B 2nd registration Number of pots occupied to the left: 4, Number of pots occupied to the right: 3, Number of pots occupied above: 2, Number of pots occupied below: 1, Geometry A Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name exv_list = [0, 2] ret = cnc_wrtoolgeom_tlm(1,2,[[1,2,3,4,1], [4,3,2,1,0]]) if ret[0].to_s == exv_list[0].to_s then msg_txt = "OK¥n" else msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" end MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0) 400/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== CAUTION Use sufficient care when you write the tool geometry data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool geometry data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool geometry data is safe and correct when doing so. 5.8 Reading tool geometry data [Function] cnc_rdtoolgeom_tlm [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdtoolgeom_tlm(snum, datanum) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (181) Arguments of the cnc_rdtoolgeom_tlm function Name Type snum Description Numerical value Numerical value datanum Specify the start number for reading tool geometry data. Specify the number of data items to be read from the tool geometry data. This function gets the number of tool geometry data items defined by "datanum" starting from the tool geometry data numbers that start with "snum." [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (182) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdtoolgeom_tlm function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Array Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_BUSY The same data window is being accessed by another user. Execute the function again. EW_LENGTH The specification of the number of tool geometry data items to be acquired ("datanum") is invalid. EW_NUMBER Data number error. The setting of the data number for starting acquisition ("snum") is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options The optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and a large radius tool supporting option are required. Number of data items successfully acquired. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Array for storing the read tool geometry data. For the elements of each item, see “Array of read tool geometry data.” Drawing number 3rd element 401/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (183) Array of read tool geometry data Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element Array Array Array Array Array Description The number of pots occupied to the left The number of pots occupied to the right The number of pots occupied above The number of pots occupied below Set 0 for geometry A and 1 for geometry B. [Description] This function reads the number of tool geometry data items defined by datanum, starting from the tool geometry data number specified by snum. To enable this function, the optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and a large radius tool supporting option are required. [Example] To read the following information from the tool geometry data - Read tool geometry data number: 1, Number of read data items: 2 exv_list = [0,2,[[1,2,3,4,1],[4,3,2,1,0]]] ret = cnc_rdtoolgeom_tlm(1,2) if ret[0].to_s == exv_list[0].to_s then msg_txt = "OK¥n" else msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" end MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0) 5.9 Reading the tool geometry data [Function] cnc_rdtlgeomsize_ext [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdtlgeomsize_ext(coord, s_number, data_num) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (184) Arguments of the cnc_rdtlgeomsize_ext function Name coord s_number data_num Type Description Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Specify 0. Specify the data number to start acquisition. Specify the number of items to be acquired. The tool geometry size data that belongs to one data number is counted as one acquired number. The number of tool geometry data items defined by "data_num" are acquired starting from the data number specified by "s_number." Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 402/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (185) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdtlgeomsize_ext function Element Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Array Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The specification of the number of tool geometry size data items to be acquired ("data_num") is invalid. EW_NUMBER Data number error The specified data number for starting acquisition ("s_number") is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specification of the program coordinate system ("coord") is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options The option for the 32-pair tool geometry size data, the 100-pair tool geometry size data, or the 300-pair tool geometry size data is required. Number of data items acquired 3rd element An array for storing the acquired tool geometry data. For the elements of each item, see “Array of read tool geometry size data.” Table 5.3 (186) Array of read tool geometry size data 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Numerical value Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2nd element Description Tool data 1 In the case of NULL, "0x7FFFFFFF" is returned. Tool data 2 In the case of NULL, "0x7FFFFFFF" is returned. Tool data 3 In the case of NULL, "0x7FFFFFFF" is returned. Tool data 4 In the case of NULL, "0x7FFFFFFF" is returned. Tool type 0: Tool is not defined 10: General tool 11: Thread tool 12: Grooving tool 13: Button turning tool 14: Straight tool 15: Versatile tool 20: Drill tool 21: Chamfering tool 22: Flat end mill tool 23: Ball end mill tool 24: Tap tool 25: Reamer tool 26: Boring tool 27: Face mill tool Attachment value The value differs depending on the type of the tool. Name Type Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Drawing number Element 1st element 403/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 7th element Numerical value 8th element String In the case of 0, the value of the attachment is not set. 0 to 16: General tool 0 to 16: Thread tool 0 to 16: Grooving tool 0 to 16: Button turning tool 0 to 12: Straight tool 0 to 16: Versatile tool 0 to 4: Drill tool 0 to 4: Chamfering tool 0 to 4: Flat end mill tool 0 to 4: Ball end mill tool 0 to 4: Tap tool 0 to 4: Reamer tool 0 to 4: Boring tool 0 to 4: Face mill tool Holder number The setting range is as follows. 0 to 120: 1 path system 0 to 60: 2 path system 0 to 40: 3 path system 0 to 30: 4 or more path system Tool name [Description] This function acquires the tool geometry size data specified by the data number for starting acquisition ("s_number") and the number of acquired data items ("data_num"). Acquisition is performed one data number ("s_number") at a time. If an error occurs in the middle of acquisition, the subsequent acquisition process is discontinued. [Example] To read the following information from the tool geometry size data - Data number at which to start acquisition: 1, Number of data items acquired: 1 exv_list = [0,1,[[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0]]]] ret = cnc_rdtlgeomsize_ext(0,1,1) if ret[0].to_s == exv_list[0].to_s then msg_txt = "OK¥n" else msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" end MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0) 5.10 Writing/deleting the tool geometry size data Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext(coord, type, s_number, data_num, tlgsext) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 404/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name Type coord Table 5.3 (187) Arguments of the cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext function Description Numerical value Numerical value type s_number Numerical value Numerical value data_num tlgsext Array Specify 0. Specify the tool geometry size data to be set or deleted. Specify 3 to delete the tool geometry size data. The relationship between each data item and setting value is as follows. 0: All data 1: Data 1 2: Data 2 3: Tool type 4: Attachment 5: Tool name 6: Data 3 7: Data 4 8: Holder number Specify the data number to start setting or deleting items. Specify the number of items to be set or deleted. The tool geometry size data that belongs to one data number is counted as one set or deleted item. The number of tool geometry size data items defined by "data_num" are set/delete starting from the data number specified by "s_number." An array for storing the tool geometry size data to be set/deleted. For the elements of each item, see "Array of tool geometry size data to be set/deleted." Table 5.3 (188) Array of tool geometry size data to be set/deleted Numerica l value Numerica l value Numerica l value Numerica l value 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Tool data 1 In the case of NULL, 0x7FFFFFFF is specified. Tool data 2 In the case of NULL, 0x7FFFFFFF is specified. Tool data 3 In the case of NULL, 0x7FFFFFFF is specified. Tool data 4 In the case of NULL, 0x7FFFFFFF is specified. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1st element Name Type Drawing number Element 405/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 5th element Numerica l value 6th element Numerica l value 7th element Numerica l value 8th element String Tool type Specify 0 to delete the tool geometry size data. The tool type and the setting values are as follows. 0: Delete the tool geometry size data 10: General tool 11: Thread tool 12: Grooving tool 13: Button turning tool 14: Straight tool 15: Versatile tool 20: Drill tool 21: Chamfering tool 22: Flat end mill tool 23: Ball end mill tool 24: Tap tool 25: Reamer tool 26: Boring tool 27: Face mill tool Attachment value The setting range depends on the tool type. If the value of the attachment direction is not set, specify 0. 0 to 16: General tool 0 to 16: Thread tool 0 to 16: Grooving tool 0 to 16: Button turning tool 0 to 12: Straight tool 0 to 16: Versatile tool 0 to 4: Drill tool 0 to 4: Chamfering tool 0 to 4: Flat end mill tool 0 to 4: Ball end mill tool 0 to 4: Tap tool 0 to 4: Reamer tool 0 to 4: Boring tool 0 to 4: Face mill tool Holder number The setting range is as follows. 0 to 120: 1 path system 0 to 60: 2 path system 0 to 40: 3 path system 0 to 30: 4 or more path system Tool name An ASCII string of up to 8 characters. (9th and following characters are discarded.) [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (189) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext function Numerica l value 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1st element 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Name Type Drawing number Element 406/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Description Numerica l value EW_LENGTH Data block length error The specification of the number of tool geometry size data items to be set/deleted ("data_num") is invalid. EW_NUMBER Data number error The data number specified for starting setting/deleting ("s_number") is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error Specification of program coordinate system ("coord") or setting value of the tool geometry size data The specification of ("type") is invalid. EW_DATA Error of the member in the structure A member in the structure is incorrect. Execute the cnc_getdtailerr function to get more detailed information on this return value. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 0: Error other than EW_DATA 1: Data 1 error 2: Data 2 error 3: Tool type error 4: Attachment error 5: Tool name error 6: Data 3 error 7: Data 4 error 8: Holder number error EW_NOOPT No options The 32-pair tool geometry size data, the 100-pair tool geometry size data, or the 300-pair tool geometry size data is required. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. The tool geometry size table is write-protected. The number of data items actually set or deleted is returned. [Description] This function sets/deletes the tool geometry size data specified by the data number for starting setting/deletion ("s_number") and the number of data items to be set/deleted ("data_num"). The data numbers ("s_number") are set/deleted in order one at a time. If an error occurs, the subsequent setting or deletion process is discontinued. [Example] To set the following information to the tool geometry size data - Setting start data number: 1, Number of setting data items: 2 - First set data item: tool data 1: 2, tool data 2: 3, tool data 3: 4, tool data 4: 5, tool type: general tool, attachment value: 5, holder number: 20, tool name: general - Second set data item: tool data 1: 6, tool data 2: 7, tool data 3: 8, tool data 4: 9, tool type: thread tool, attachment value: 0, holder number: 0, tool name: thread Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name exv_list = [0,2] ret = cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext(0,0,1,2,[[2,3,4,5,10,5,20,"General"],[6,7,8,9,11,0,0,"Thread"]]) if ret[0].to_s == exv_list[0].to_s then 407/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== msg_txt = "OK¥n" else msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" end MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0) To delete the following information of the tool geometry size data - Setting start data number: 1, number of setting data items: 3 exv_list = [0,3] ret = cnc_wrtlgeomsize_ext(0,0,1,3,[[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,""],[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,""],[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,""]]) if ret[0].to_s == exv_list[0].to_s then msg_txt = "OK¥n" else msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" end MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0) NOTE Use sufficient care when you write the tool geometry size data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool geometry size data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool geometry size data is safe and correct when doing so. 5.11 Reading the magazine property data [Function] cnc_rdmag_property [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdmag_property(data_num, mag) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (190) Arguments of the cnc_rdmag_property function Name Type data_num Numerical value mag Array of N elements (N = Number of acquired items) Description Number of acquired items 1 to 8 Specify -1 when getting all magazine data. Array of magazine numbers (Except for reading all magazine data) Specify the magazine number to be acquired. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 408/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Table 5.3 (191) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdmag_property function Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The number of data items (data_num) is incorrect. EW_NUMBER Data number error Magazine number is incorrect. EW_NOOPT Required option is not added. Tool life management function (64, 240, and 1000 pairs) and the tool management expansion B function are required. Number of data items actually read Array of N elements (N = Number of read data items) Element Table 5.3 (192) Magazine property data Description Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element Array of magazine property data For details on the value, see “Magazine property data ”below. Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Array Magazine number Magazine information data Matrix row number Matrix column number An array of 4 elements that contains the customized data. For details on the value, see “Customized data ”below. Table 5.3 (193) Customized data Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Value of customized data 1 Value of customized data 2 Value of customized data 3 Value of customized data 4 [Description] This function gets the specified number of magazine property data items. [Example] To get two magazine property data items (magazine number 1, 2) data_num = 2 mag[2] = [1, 2] #Number of acquired items #Magazine number to be acquired Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_rdmag_property(data_num, mag) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end 409/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 5.12 Writing the magazine property data [Function] cnc_wrmag_property [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrmag_property(data_num, magprty) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (194) Arguments of the cnc_wrmag_property function Type Description Name data_num Numerical value magprty Array of N elements (N = Number of setting items) Number of setting items 1 to 8 Specify -1 when setting all magazine data Array of magazine property data For details on the value, see “Magazine property data.” [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (195) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_wrmag_property function Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The number of data items set (data_num) is incorrect. EW_NUMBER Data number error Magazine number is incorrect. EW_DATA Data error. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 0: Error other than EW_DATA. 1: Magazine information error. 11 to 14: Error in customized data 1 to 4. EW_NOOPT Required option is not added. Tool life management function (64, 240, and 1000 pairs) and the tool management expansion B function are required. Number of data items actually set Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] This function sets the specified number of magazine property data items. [Example] To set the following two magazine property data items First magazine property data item: Magazine number=1, Magazine information data=5, Matrix line number=10, Matrix row number=1, All customized data=0 410/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Second magazine property data item: Magazine number=2, Magazine information data=5, Matrix line number=20, Matrix row number=2, All customized data=0 data_num = 2 #Number of items to be set magprty1[5] = [1,5,10,1,[0,0,0,0]] #First magazine property data to be set magprty2[5] = [2,5,20,2,[0,0,0,0]] #First magazine property data to be set magprty[2] = [magprty1, magprty2] ret = cnc_wrmag_property(data_num, magprty) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end NOTE Use sufficient care when you write the magazine property data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong magazine property data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing of the magazine property data is safe and correct when doing so. 5.13 Deleting the magazine property data [Function] cnc_delmag_property [Syntax with arguments] cnc_delmag_property(data_num, magprty) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (196) Arguments of the cnc_delmag_property function Name Type Description data_num Numerical value magprty Array of N elements (N = Number of items to be deleted) Number of items to be deleted 1 to 8 Specify -1 when deleting all magazine data. Array of magazine numbers (Except for when deleting all magazine data) Specify the number of the magazine to be deleted. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (197) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_delmag_property function 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The number of data items deleted (data_num) is incorrect. Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Numerical value Name Type 1st element Drawing number Element 411/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element 2nd element Type Description EW_NUMBER Data number error Magazine number is incorrect. EW_NOOPT Required option is not added. Tool life management function (64, 240, and 1000 pairs) and the tool management expansion B function are required. Number of data items actually deleted Numerical value [Description] This function deletes the specified number of magazine property data items. [Example] To delete two magazine property data items (magazine number 1, 2) data_num = 2 magprty[2] = [1, 2] #Number of items to be deleted ret = cnc_ delmag _property(data_num, magprty) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0) end NOTE Use sufficient care when you delete the magazine property data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong magazine property data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that deletion of the magazine property data is safe and correct when doing so. 5.14 Reading the pot property data [Function] cnc_rdpot_property [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdpot_property(magazine, s_number, data_num) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (198) Arguments of the cnc_rdpot_property function Name Type Description magazine Numerical value Magazine number to be acquired s_number Numerical value Pot number for starting acquisition data_num Numerical value Number of acquired items Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 412/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (199) Return value of the cnc_rdpot_property function Type Description Element 1st element Numerical value 2nd element 3rd element Numerical value Array of N elements (N = Number of acquired pot property data) Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The specification of the number of items to be acquired ("data_num") is invalid. EW_NUMBER Data number error The specified data number for starting acquisition ("s_number") is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified magazine number is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options The optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and the tool management expansion B function option are required. Number of acquired pot property data items Acquired pot property data For details, see “Pot property data ”below. Table 5.3 (200) Pot property data Description Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Array of 10 elements Tool management number Pot type Pot information 1 Pot information 2 Customized data For details, see “Customized data.” Table 5.3 (201) Customized data Element 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element 7th element 8th element 9th element 10th element Type Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Description Customized data 1 Customized data 2 Customized data 3 Customized data 4 Customized data 5 Customized data 6 Customized data 7 Customized data 8 Customized data 9 Customized data 10 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] This function sets the magazine number ("magazine") and the pot number for starting acquisition ("s_number") to get the specified number of pot property data items ("data_num"). 413/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When setting 1 for the magazine number to be acquired, 1 for the pot number for starting acquisition, and 2 for the number of items to be acquired ret = cnc_rdpot_property(1,1,2) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 5.15 Writing pot property data [Function] cnc_wrpot_property [Syntax with arguments] cnc_wrpot_property(magazine, s_number, data_num, potprty) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (202) Arguments of the cnc_wrpot_property function Name Type magazine Numerical value Magazine number to be set Description s_number Numerical value Pot number for starting setting data_num potprty Numerical value Array of 5 (N) elements (N = Number of setting items) Number of setting items Pot property data to be set For details, see “Pot property data to be set ”below. Table 5.3 (203) Pot property data to be set Element Type 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Array of 10 elements Element Description Tool management number Pot type Pot information 1 Pot information 2 Customized data For details, see “Customized data.” Table 5.3 (204) Customized data Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element 7th element 8th element 9th element 10th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Customized data 1 Customized data 2 Customized data 3 Customized data 4 Customized data 5 Customized data 6 Customized data 7 Customized data 8 Customized data 9 Customized data 10 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. 414/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Table 5.3 (205) Return value of the cnc_wrpot_property function Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The specification of the number of items to be set ("data_num") is invalid. EW_NUMBER Data number error The data number specified for starting setting ("s_number") is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified magazine number is invalid. EW_DATA A member of the array is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 0: Error other than EW_DATA 1: Tool management number error 2: Pot type error 3: Pot information 1 error 4: Pot information 2 error 11 to 20: Error in customized data 1 to 10 100: Tool interference 101: Multi edge error EW_NOOPT No options The optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and the tool management expansion B function option are required. Number of data items actually set [Description] This function sets the magazine number ("magazine") and the pot number for starting setting ("s_number") to set the specified number of pot property data items ("data_num"). NOTE Use sufficient care when you write pot property data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong pot property data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the pot property data is safe and correct when doing so. [Example] When setting 1 for the magazine number to be set, 1 for the pot number for starting setting, 1 for the number of items to be set, 1 for the pot property data (work management number = 1, pot type = 1, pot information 1 = 1, pot information 2 = 1, and customized data 1 to 10 as 1 to 0) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_wrpot_property(1,1,1,[[1,1,1,1,[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0]]]) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 415/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 5.16 Deleting pot property data [Function] cnc_delpot_property [Syntax with arguments] cnc_delpot_property(magazine, s_number, data_num) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (206) Arguments of the cnc_delpot_property function Name Type Description magazine Numerical value s_number Numerical value Magazine numbers to be deleted (1 to 8) Specify -1 when deleting all magazine pot data. Pot number for starting deletion data_num Numerical value Number of items to be deleted [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (207) Return value of the cnc_delpot_property function Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_LENGTH Data block length error The specification of the number of items to be deleted ("data_num") is invalid. EW_NUMBER Data number error The data number specified for starting deletion ("s_number") is invalid. EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error The specified magazine number is invalid. EW_NOOPT No options The optional tool management function for 64, 240, or 1000 pairs and the tool management expansion B function option are required. Number of data items actually deleted [Description] This function sets the magazine number ("magazine") and the pot number for starting deletion ("s_number") to delete the specified number of pot property data items ("data_num"). Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE Use sufficient care when you write pot property data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong pot property data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the pot property data is safe and correct when doing so. 416/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Example] When setting 1 for the magazine number to be deleted, 1 for the pot number for starting deletion, and 1 for the number of items to be deleted ret = cnc_delpot_property(1,1,1) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 5.17 Tool data transfer [Function] cnc_tool_move [Syntax with arguments] cnc_tool_move(src_magazine, src_pot, dest_magazine, dest_pot) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (208) Arguments of the cnc_tool_move function Name Type Description src_magazine Numerical value src_pot Numerical value Numerical value Magazine number of transfer source A spindle position and a standby position can also be specified. In such a case, a pot number need not be specified. Pot number of transfer source dest_magazine dest_pot Numerical value Magazine number of transfer destination A spindle position and a standby position can also be specified. In such a case, a pot number need not be specified. Pot number of transfer destination [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination. EW_DATA Structure member error. A member in the structure is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 0: Error other than EW_DATA 1: Error in magazine number of transfer source 2: Error in pot number of transfer source 3: There is no tool in the magazine and pot of the transfer source. 4: Error in magazine number of transfer destination 5: Error in pot number of transfer destination 6: There is a tool in the magazine and pot of the transfer destination. EW_NOOPT Name Numerical value Table 5.3 (209) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_tool_move function Description Drawing number Type 417/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Type Description No options. The tool management function for 64 pairs, the tool management function for 240 pairs, or the tool management function for 1000 pairs is required. EW_PROT Write protection is applied. The magazine management data table and the tool management data table are write-protected. EW_REJECT If a tool management function with large diameter support is set, the tool transfer to a magazine or a pot in the transfer destination interferes with other tools. [Description] This function transfers the tool information set in the specified magazine and pot to the magazine and pot of the transfer destination. Unlike the tool attachment function or the tool detachment tool, there is no input or output of signals. [Example] To transfer the tool management data with the following information - Transfer source magazine number: 1, transfer source pot number: 1, transfer destination magazine number: 1, transfer destination pot number: 2 exv_list = [0] ret = cnc_tool_move(1,1,1,2) if ret[0].to_s == exv_list[0].to_s then msg_txt = "OK¥n" else msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" end MsgBoxShow( msg_txt, 0) NOTE Use sufficient care when writing the tool management data. There is a possibility that the NC may run with the wrong tool management data. In this case, it may cause unexpected machine behavior, and tools, machines or workpieces may be damaged. You have to make sure that writing the tool management data is safe and correct when doing so. 5.18 Searching the free pot for a large-diameter tool Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_btlfpotsrh [Syntax with arguments] cnc_btlfpotsrh(type, magnum, geomnum, potnum) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. 418/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Name Type Table 5.3 (210) Arguments of the cnc_btlfpotsrh function Description type Numerical value magnum geomnum potnum Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Search direction of the free pot For the relationship between each search direction and the setting value, see “Search direction and setting value ”below. Magazine number of search target Geometry number of the tool to be stored Pot number for starting search Table 5.3 (211) Search direction and setting value Search direction Setting value Reverse -1 Both 0 Forward 1 [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (212) Return value of the cnc_btlfpotsrh function Description Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination. EW_BUSY The same data window is being accessed by another user. Execute the function again. EW_NUMBER The specified search direction ("type") is invalid. EW_DATA The magazine number ("magnum"), the search pot number ("potnum"), or the tool geometry number ("geomnum") is incorrect. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 0: Error other than EW_DATA 21: Magazine number error 22: Pot number error 26: Tool geometry number error. EW_NOOPT No options. The optional tool management function for 64 pairs, the tool management function for 240 pairs, or the tool management function for 1000 pairs is required. EW_OVRFLOW There are no free pots. Number of pots actually searched Search the free pot in which the tool with geometry specified by "geomnum" can be stored among the magazines of the magazine number specified by "magnum." Search is performed in the direction specified by "type," starting from the pot number specified by "potnum." Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 1st element Name Type Drawing number Element 419/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Description] Search the free pot that fits the specified geometry ("geomnum") in the same magazine ("magnum") based on the specified pot position ("potnum") as a reference. The free pot is searched in the direction specified by ("type"). [Example] When setting -1 (reverse order) for the free pot search direction, 1 for the search target magazine number, 20 for the geometry number of the tool to be stored, and 4 for the pot number for starting search Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret = cnc_btlfpotsrh(-1,1,20,4) if ret[0] != EW_OK then MsgBoxShow("ERROR",0) end 420/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [CNC Window Library History Data Related Function Reference] 6.1 History data sampling stop [Function] cnc_stopophis [Syntax with arguments] cnc_stopophis() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (213) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_stopophis function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_REJECT CNC processing is rejected. [Description] This function instructs the CNC to stop sampling operation history data, alarm history data, and external operator's message history data. 6.2 History data sampling restart [Function] cnc_startophis [Syntax with arguments] cnc_startophis() [Arguments] None [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Type Numerical value Table 5.3 (214) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_startophis function Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] This function instructs the CNC to restart the sampling of the operation history data, the alarm history data, and the external operator message history data. 421/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 6.3 Reading the number of operation history data items [Function] cnc_rdophisno [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdophisno() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Element Table 5.3 (215) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdophisno function Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). Number of operation history data items [Description] This function reads the number of operation history data items. When reading the operation history data with the cnc_rdophistry3 function, use the cnc_rdophisno3 function instead of this function. Before using this function, stop the history data sampling (cnc_stopophis function). (Example) When the following history data is displayed on the NC operation history screen, the number of operation history data items can be read as 3 with this function. History number Operation history 1 1999/11/22 Power ON time 12:34:56 2 PS0181 Alarm 1999/11/22 13:00:00 MDI key operation 3 [SOFT1] [Example] To get the number of operation history data items ret = cnc_rdophisno() if ret[0] == EW_OK then msg_txt = "Number of operation history data items:" + ret[1].to_s + "¥n" MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 6.4 Clearing the history data Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_clearophis 422/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Syntax with arguments] cnc_clearophis(slct) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Name Table 5.3 (216) Arguments of the cnc_clearophis function Description Type slct Numerical value Specify the type of history data to be cleared. 0: Operation history data 1: Alarm history data 2: External operator message history data [Return] Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (217) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_clearophis function Type Numerical value Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_ATTRIB Data attribute error Specification of history data type (slct) is incorrect. EW_PARAM CNC parameter error Define parameter EKE(No.3195#7)=1. [Description] The history data to be cleared depends on the parameters SAH (No.11354#2) and SOH (No.11354#3) and the setting of the slct argument. For details, see the following table. Table 5.3 (218) History data to be cleared Parameter SAH (No.11354#2) SOH (No.11354#3) 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 slct argument Operation history data Alarm history Data External operator Message history Data 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Not cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Not cleared Cleared Not cleared Not cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Not cleared Cleared Not cleared Cleared Cleared Not cleared Not cleared Cleared Not cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Not cleared Cleared Not cleared Not cleared Cleared Not cleared Not cleared Cleared 6.5 Reading the number of alarm history data items Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Function] cnc_rdalmhisno 423/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdalmhisno() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Element Table 5.3 (219) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdalmhisno function Type Description 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). Number of alarm history data items [Description] This function reads the number of alarm history data items. When reading the alarm history data using the cnc_rdalmhistry4 function, use the cnc_rdalmhisno3 function instead of this function to read the number of alarm history data. Before using this function, stop the history data sampling (cnc_stopophis function). [Example] To get the number of alarm history data items ret = cnc_rdalmhisno() if ret[0] == EW_OK then msg_txt = "Number of alarm history data items:" + ret[1].to_s + "¥n” MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 6.6 Reading the number of external operator message history data items [Function] cnc_rdomhisno [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdomhisno() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Element Table 5.3 (220) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdomhisno function Type Description 1st element Numerical value Date Created Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page Edition Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Name 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed 424/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Description History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). EW_PARAM CNC parameter error Define parameter HOM(No.3196#6)=0 and OMH(No.3112#2)=1 Number of external operator message history data items Numerical value [Description] This function reads the number of external operator message history data items. Before using this function, stop the history data sampling (cnc_stopophis function). This function involves the following parameters. - Parameter OMH(No.3112#2)=1 (Be sure to set this parameter to use this function.) - Parameter HOM(No.3196#6)=0 (Be sure to set this parameter to use this function.) - Parameter EAH(No.3112#3) For details on the parameters, see “PARAMETER MANUAL (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) ”of the CNC. [Example] To get the number of external operator message history data items ret = cnc_ rdomhisno () if ret[0] == EW_OK then msg_txt = "Number of external operator message history data items:" + ret[1].to_s + "¥n ” MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 6.7 Reading the number of alarm history data items (3) [Function] cnc_rdalmhisno3 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdalmhisno3() [Arguments] None [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below Table 5.3 (221) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdalmhisno3 function Element 1st element Type Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value Description Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). Number of alarm history data items Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] Reads the number of alarm history data items. 425/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== When reading the alarm history data using the cnc_rdalmhistry4 function, use this function instead of the cnc_rdalmhisno function to read the number of alarm history data. Before using this function, stop history data sampling (execute cnc_stopophis function). [Example] To get the number of alarm history data items ret_value = cnc_stopophis() if ret_value[0] == 0 then ret_value2 = cnc_rdalmhisno3() cnc_startophis() if ret_value2[0] == 0 then Msg = "Number of alarm history data =" + ret_value2[1].to_s else MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0 ) end end 6.8 Reading the alarm history data (4) [Function] cnc_rdalmhistry4 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdalmhistry4(s_no, e_no) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (222) Arguments of the cnc_rdalmhistry4 function Name Type s_no Description Numerical value Numerical value e_no Specifies the start record number (Specify 1 or greater). Specifies the end record number (Specify 1 or greater). Specify the end record number so that the number of alarm history data to be acquired at one time is within 32 records. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (223) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdalmhistry4 function Element Type Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). EW_LENGTH Error in the number of data items Specify the end record number so that the number of alarm history data to be acquired is within 32 records. Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Drawing number 1st element 426/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element Description Array of 3 elements EW_NUMBER Data number error The start record number (s_no) or end record number (e_no) is invalid. Or history data is not recorded. Start record number, End record number, Alarm history data For details on the value, see “Start record number, End record number, Alarm history data” below. Table 5.3 (224) Start record number, End record number, Alarm history data Type Description Element 1st element 3rd element Numerical value Numerical value Array of n elements (n = Number of records) Element Type 1st element Numerical value A type of alarm is set. 0: The parameter write switch is on. (SW) 1: A parameter that requires turning off the power was input. (PW) 2: I/O error (IO) 3: Foreground P/S (PS) 4: Overtravel/external data input error (OT) 5: Overheat (OH) 6: Servo alarm (SV) 7: Data input/output error (SR) 8: Macro alarm (MC) 9: Spindle alarm (SP) 10: OT alarm that will not lead to a PS alarm (DS) 11: Alarm related to malfunction prevention (IE) 12: Background P/S (BG) 13: Synchronization error too high (SN) 14: Reserved 15: External alarm message (EX) 16: External alarm message (EX2) 17: External alarm message (EX3) 18: External alarm message (EX4) 19: PMC error (PC) 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value An alarm number is set. 2nd element Start record number of the read range End record number of the read range Array of alarm history data For details on the value, see “Alarm history data” below. Table 5.3 (225) Alarm history data Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 An absolute axis number (1 to the maximum controlled axis number) or absolute spindle number(1 to the number of spindles) is set. (0 is set for an alarm which is not relevant to an axis or spindle.) Drawing number 3rd element Description 427/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 4th element 5th element 6th element 7th element 8th element 9th element 10th element 11th element 12th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value String Year (1995 to 2094). Month (1 to 12). Day (1 to 31). Hours (0 to 23). Minites (0 to 59). Second (0 to 59). Number of characters in the alarm message (0 to 63). Path number(1 to 10). Alarm message. [Description] Reads alarm history data. When using this function, use the cnc_rdalmhisno3 function instead of the cnc_rdalmhisno function to read the number of alarm history data. The unit of one alarm history data item is called a record. With the cnc_rdalmhistry4 function, up to 32 records of alarm history data can be acquired at a time. Operation history data, alarm history data, and external operator’s message history data are automatically recorded by the CNC. To access these data items, data sampling by the CNC must be stopped temporarily. To stop data sampling, before using this function, execute "stop history data sampling" (cnc_stopophis function). To minimize the history data sampling stop time, execute "resume history data sampling" (cnc_startophis function) immediately after history data has been read. The start/end record number is the number assigned to each alarm history data record to be read. These record numbers are effective after "stop history data sampling" is executed until "resume history data sampling" is executed. If the number of records in the recorded history data is less than the range of start / end record numbers specified by the argument, the end record number of the return value will be the last record number read. [Example] When acquiring the data of the alarm history records No.1 to No.5. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret_value = cnc_stopophis() if ret_value[0] == 0 then s_no = 1 e_no = 5 ret_value3 = cnc_rdalmhistry4(s_no, e_no) if ret_value3[0] == 0 then record_list = ret_value3[1] 428/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== s_no2 = record_list[0] e_no2 = record_list[1] for i in 0.. e_no2-s_no2 do record = record_list[2][i] alm_msg[i] = record[11] end else MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0 ) end cnc_startophis() end 6.9 Reading external operator’s message history data (2) [Function] cnc_rdomhistry2 [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rdomhistry2(s_no, e_no) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (226) Arguments of the cnc_rdomhistry2 function Name Type s_no Description Numerical value Numerical value e_no Specifies the start record number (Specify 1 or greater) Specifies the end record number (Specify 1 or greater) Specify the end record number so that the number of external operator’s message history data to be acquired at one time is within 32 records. [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 2 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (227) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rdomhistry2 function Element Type Description Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Execution result EW_OK Normal termination EW_FUNC Function not executed History data sampling is not stopped (cnc_stopophis). EW_LENGTH Error in the number of data items Specify the end record number so that the number of external operator’s message history data to be acquired is within 32 records. EW_NUMBER Data number error The start record number (s_no) or end record number (e_no) is invalid. Or history data is not recorded. EW_PARAM CNC parameter error Define parameter OMH(No.3112#2)=1 Name 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Numerical value Drawing number 1st element 429/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description 2nd element Array of 3 elements Start record number, End record number, External operator’s message history data For details on the value, see “Start record number, End record number, External operator’s message history data” below. Table 5.3 (228) Start record number, End record number, External operator’s message history data Element Type 1st element Numerical value Numerical value Array of n elements (n = Number of records) 2nd element 3rd element Description Start record number of the read range End record number of the read range Array of External operator’s message history data For details on the value, see “External operator’s message history data” below. Table 5.3 (229) External operator’s message history data Element Type 1st element Numerical value Message display flag. 1: Displays EXxxxx. 0: Displays the message as is. 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value String Message number. 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element 7th element 8th element 9th element Description Year (1995 to 2094). Month (1 to 12). Day (1 to 31). Hours (0 to 23). Minites (0 to 59). Second (0 to 59). Message [Description] Reads external operator’s message history data. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name The unit of one external operator’s message history data item is called a record. With the cnc_rdomhistry2 function, up to 32 records of external operator’s message history data can be acquired at a time. Operation history data, alarm history data, and external operator’s message history data are automatically recorded by the CNC. To access these data items, data sampling by the CNC must be stopped temporarily. To stop data 430/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== sampling, before using this function, execute "stop history data sampling" (cnc_stopophis function). To minimize the history data sampling stop time, execute "resume history data sampling" (cnc_startophis function) immediately after history data has been read. The start/end record number is the number assigned to each external operator’s message history data record to be read. These record numbers are effective after "stop history data sampling" is executed until "resume history data sampling" is executed. If the number of records in the recorded history data is less than the range of start / end record numbers specified by the argument, the end record number of the return value will be the last record number read. The following parameters are related to this function: - Bit 2 (OMH) of parameter No. 3112 = 1 --- Must be set. - Bit 6 (HOM) of parameter No. 3196 = 0 --- Must be set. - Bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112. - Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301. For information about the parameters, refer to "PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-63950EN, B-64490EN, B-64610EN) of the CNC. [Example] When acquiring the data of the external operator’s message history records No.1 to No.5. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name ret_value = cnc_stopophis() if ret_value[0] == 0 then s_no = 1 e_no = 5 ret_value3 = cnc_rdomhistry2(s_no, e_no) if ret_value3[0] == 0 then record_list = ret_value3[1] s_no2 = record_list[0] e_no2 = record_list[1] for i in 0.. e_no2-s_no2 do record = record_list[2][i] ope_msg[i] = record[8] end else MsgBoxShow("ERROR", 0 ) end cnc_startophis() end 431/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== [CNC Window Library Data Server Related Function Reference] 7.1 Getting file list information [Function] cnc_rddsfile [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rddsfile(dev_name, ds_file_in ) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Name Table 5.3 (230) Arguments of the cnc_rddsfile function Description Type dev_name String Specify the name of the device to which the file list information is acquired. The device name that can be specified is as follows. Data server "DATA_SV" ds_file_in Array of 6 elements Specify the conditions for acquiring the file list information. For details on the value, see “File list acquisition condition ”below Element Type Table 5.3 (231) File list acquisition condition Description 1st element String Specify the reference file name and reference folder name. (Up to 255 characters) 2nd element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Specify the serial number of a file to be defined as a reference of the file list information. Specify the offset from a file to be defined as a reference of the file information list. 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element Numerical value Specify the number of files in the file list information to be acquired. (Up to 32 characters) Specify the data unit of the file list information to be acquired. 0 Pages 1 Bytes 2 KBytes (1 KByte＝1024 Bytes) 3 MBytes (1 MByte＝1024 KBytes) Specify whether the comment information is read with the file list information. 0 The comment information is not read. 1 The comment information is read. For details of each element mentioned above, see the [Argument] column of the function reference for the cnc_rddsfile function in the C Language Executor Programming Manual (B-63943JA-3). [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (232) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rddsfile function 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination EW_NOOPT No options To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. Name Type Numerical value Drawing number Element 1st element 432/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type 2nd element 3rd element Description Array of 4 elements Array of n elements (n = Number of files in the file list information acquired (up to 32)) The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 22: No fast Ethernet board. 24: The data server function is not available. EW_BUSY The data server is being used by other functions. EW_LENGTH The specification of the number of files in the file list information acquired by the 4th element of the ds_file_in argument. The information of the folder in which the file list information was acquired For details on the value, see “File list acquisition folder information ”below. Acquired file list information Array of the file information. For details on the file information, see “File information ”below. Table 5.3 (233) File list acquired folder information Description Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value 3rd element 4th element Numerical value String Element Type Description 1st element 2nd element 3rd element 4th element 5th element 6th element 7th element 8th element Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value Numerical value 9th element 10th element String String Year of last edit Month of last edit Day of last edit Hour of last edit Minute of last edit Second of last edit File size. (Not used for folders) File/folder attributes 31st bit: Always 1 30th bit 0: Folder 1: File 04th bit 0: Normal file (folder) 1: Data folder 03rd bit 0: Text 1: Binary 00th bit 0: Editable 1: Uneditable Bits other than the above: Not used File/folder name. ASCII character string up to 35 characters Comment information. ASCII character string up to 127 characters Contents of the comment block immediately after the program number is File management format of the CF card of the data server 0 CNC file management format Serial number of the first file of the file list information of the 3rd element of the return value Total number of files in the target folder specified by the ds_file_in argument The full path of the folder in which the file list information was acquired is returned. (Up to 255 characters) Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name Table 5.3 (234) File information 433/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== Element Type Description stored. It is effective only when the 6th element of the ds_file_in argument is 1 and in the case of a file. If a comment block does not exist, 127 character strings starting from the beginning of the data body are returned. This information is not returned for the program selected as the main program. [Description] This function gets the list information of a file (including subfolders) in the CF card of the data server. The file list information in the current folder is acquired when the only a file name or NULL character is specified for the path argument. When the full path of a file or folder is specified for the path argument, the file list information in the folder is acquired. For specific examples, see the [Description] column of the function reference for the cnc_rddsfile function in the C Language Executor Programming Manual (B-63943JA-3). [Example] To get the file information of the folder "//DATA_SV/TEST001/" ds_file_in = ["//DATA_SV/TEST001/TEST01",0,0,3,1,1] /* Reference file = " TEST01 ”(serial number = 0, offset = 0) Number of acquired files = 3 Data size units = Bytes */ ret = cnc_rddsfile( "DATA_SV", ds_file_in ) if ret[0] != EW_OK then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name NOTE 1 When the data folder is protected by a password, the folder information of the data folder is not acquired even if the file list information in the folder including the data folder is acquired. In this case, the serial number of the file advances by one. 2 Even if the data folder is protected by a password, the file list information in the data folder can be acquired in the following cases. - The data folder is set as the current folder and only the file name or a NULL character is specified for the 1st element of the ds_file_in argument. - The full path of the file in the data folder is specified as the 1st element of the ds_file_in argument. - The full path of the data folder is specified as the 1st element of the ds_file_in argument. 3 If CNC software or communication software that does not support full path specification for the 1st element of the ds_file_in argument is used, the file list information is acquired based on the first file in the current folder when the full path of the file or folder is specified. 434/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== 7.2 Getting the current folder [Function] cnc_rddsdir [Syntax with arguments] cnc_rddsdir(dev_name) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (235) Arguments of the cnc_rddsdir function Name Type Description dev_name String Device name The device name that can be specified is as follows. Data server "DATA_SV" [Return] For this function, the return value is an array of 3 elements. Details of the return values are as shown below. Table 5.3 (236) Value to be stored in the return value of the cnc_rddsdir function Element Type 1st element Numerical value 2nd element Numerical value String 3rd element Description Return value of the function EW_OK Normal termination. EW_NOOPT No options. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 22: No fast Ethernet board. 24: The data server function is not available. EW_BUSY The data server is being used by other functions. EW_DATA The specification of the dev_name argument is incorrect. EW_DTSRVR An error occurred in the data server. To get more detailed information on this return value, execute the cnc_getdtailerr function. The following is set in “Detail status ”in the return value array. 464: No CF card. Or, the CF card is not formatted 0 is set as a fixed value. Acquired current folder name Acquired current drive + current folder name string Maximum number of characters is 255. If a problem occurs, a NULL character is set. Edition Date Created Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.5 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.4 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 11.0 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.9 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.8 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.7 Update for FANUC PICTURE Edition 10.6 Person in charge 2018.11.13 A-42146EN-042/30 FANUC CORPORATION Changes Person in charge FANUC PICTURE Specification (Edition 8.0 or later) Approved © MyFANUC CE4B7058D7564B669B922BFEB8C32DAA Page 2022/10/19 2022/04/25 2023/12/20 2023/10/12 2023/07/14 2023/05/24 2023/02/24 Drawing number 25 24 30 29 28 27 26 Name [Description] This function gets the full path of the current folder on the CF card of the data server. [Example] To get the current folder of the data server 435/821 7169FiXT6lVrRje/Ma0DMRpz37lzorKKIwzN97n0eoQsyHkIC+2wd68VWEg== ret = cnc_rddsdir( "DATA_SV" ) if ret[0] != EW_OK then msg_txt = “ERROR(“ + ret[0].to_s + ")¥n" MsgBoxShow(msg_txt,0) end 7.3 Changing the current folder [Function] cnc_dschdir [Syntax with arguments] cnc_dschdir(dev_name, dir) [Arguments] The arguments of this function are as shown below. Table 5.3 (237) Arguments of the cnc_dschdir function Name Type dev_name String Specify the name of the device for which the current folder is to be changed. The device name that can be specified is as follows. Data server "DATA_SV" Description dir String Specify the folder name to be changed. If only the folder name is specified, that folder becomes one in the current folder. The folder can be directly changed to the folder outside the current folder by specifying a full pa

FANUC PICTURE Specification: HMI Software for Industrial Automation

Related documents

Products

Support

FANUC PICTURE Specification: HMI Software for Industrial Automation

Related documents

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib